Preface
Contents
Overview
Machine Features
Color and Image Quality Functions
- Basic Color Modes
- Adjusting Image Quality and Color
Guides Provided with the Machine
About the Operation Guide (this Guide)
- Structure of the guide
- Conventions Used in This Guide
Menu Map
1 Legal and Safety Information
- Notice
2 Installing and Setting up the Machine
3 Preparation before Use
4 Printing from PC
5 Operation on the Machine
6 Using Various Functions
- Functions Available on the Machine
- Functions
7 Status/Job Cancel
8 Setup and Registration (System Menu)
- System Menu
9 User Authentication and Accounting (User Login, Job Accounting)
10 Troubleshooting
- Regular Maintenance
- Troubleshooting
11 Appendix

KYOCERA M3645dn User Manual

Displayed below is the user manual for M3645dn by KYOCERA which is a product in the Multifunctionals category. This manual has pages.

Related Manuals

KYOCERA M3645dn/KL3 Manual

KYOCERA P7040cdn Manual

KYOCERA TASKalfa 306ci Manual

KYOCERA TASKalfa 2552ci MFP A3 Colour Manual

KYOCERA TASKALFA 6052CI MFP LAS COL A3 Manual

KYOCERA TASKALFA 3252CI MFP LAS COL A3 Manual

ECOSYS M3145dn

PRINT COPY SCAN

ECOSYS M3645dn

PRINT COPY SCAN FAX

OPERATION GUIDE

> Preface

Preface

Thank you for purchasing this machine.

This Operation Guide is intended to help you operate the machine correctly, perform routine maintenance, and take

simple troubleshooting measures as needed so that the machine can always be used in the optimum condition.

Please read this Operation Guide before using the machine.

To maintain quality, we recommend using genuine own brand toner containers, which must

pass numerous quality inspections.

Please use our genuine toner containers, which have passed rigorous quality control testing.

The use of non-genuine toner containers may cause failure.

We will not be liable for any damages caused by the use of third party supplies in this machine.

A label is affixed to our replacement genuine toner containers, as shown below.

Checking the Equipment's Serial Number

The equipment's serial number is printed in the location shown in the figure.

You'll need the equipment's serial number when contacting your Service Representative. Please check the number

before contacting your Service Representative

Contents

Preface ..................................................................................................................................... i

Contents.................................................................................................................................. ii

Overview .............................................................................................................................. viii

Machine Features .................................................................................................................. ix

Color and Image Quality Functions................................................................................... xiii

Basic Color Modes ...................................................................................................... xiii

Adjusting Image Quality and Color.............................................................................. xiv

Guides Provided with the Machine..................................................................................... xv

About the Operation Guide (this Guide) .......................................................................... xvii

Structure of the guide................................................................................................. xvii

Conventions Used in This Guide................................................................................ xviii

Menu Map.............................................................................................................................. xx

1 Legal and Safety Information ................................................................ 1-1

Notice ................................................................................................................................. 1-2

Safety Conventions in This Guide ............................................................................. 1-2

Environment .............................................................................................................. 1-3

Precautions for Use ................................................................................................... 1-4

Laser Safety (Europe) ............................................................................................... 1-5

SAFETY OF LASER BEAM (USA) ........................................................................... 1-6

Safety Instructions Regarding the Disconnection of Power ...................................... 1-7

Compliance and Conformity ...................................................................................... 1-7

Other precautions (for users in California, the United States) ................................... 1-7

Warranty (the United States and Canada) ................................................................ 1-8

Legal Restriction on Copying/Scanning .................................................................... 1-9

EN ISO 7779 ............................................................................................................. 1-9

EK1-ITB 2000 ............................................................................................................ 1-9

Wireless Connection (Mexico only) ........................................................................... 1-9

Security Precautions when Using Wireless LAN (If equipped) ................................. 1-9

Limited Use of This Product (If equipped) ............................................................... 1-10

Legal Information .................................................................................................... 1-11

Energy Saving Control Function ............................................................................. 1-17

Automatic 2-Sided Print Function ............................................................................ 1-17

Resource Saving - Paper ........................................................................................ 1-17

Environmental benefits of "Power Management" .................................................... 1-17

Energy Star (ENERGY STAR®) Program ............................................................... 1-18

2 Installing and Setting up the Machine .................................................. 2-1

Part Names ......................................................................................................................... 2-2

Machine Exterior ....................................................................................................... 2-2

Connectors/Interior .................................................................................................... 2-4

With Optional Equipments Attached ......................................................................... 2-6

Connecting the Machine and Other Devices .................................................................. 2-7

Connecting Cables ............................................................................................................ 2-8

Connecting LAN Cable .............................................................................................. 2-8

Connecting USB Cable ............................................................................................. 2-9

Connecting the Power Cable .................................................................................... 2-9

Power On/Off ................................................................................................................... 2-10

Power On ................................................................................................................ 2-10

Power Off ................................................................................................................ 2-10

Using the Operation Panel ............................................................................................. 2-11

Operation Panel Keys ............................................................................................. 2-11

Operation Method ................................................................................................... 2-12

Display for Originals and Paper .............................................................................. 2-13

Help Screen ............................................................................................................ 2-13

iii

Login/Logout ................................................................................................................... 2-14

Login ....................................................................................................................... 2-14

Logout ..................................................................................................................... 2-15

Default Settings of the Machine ..................................................................................... 2-16

Setting Date and Time ............................................................................................ 2-16

Network Setup ................................................................................................................. 2-17

Configuring the Wired Network ............................................................................... 2-17

Configuring the Wireless Network ........................................................................... 2-19

Setting Wi-Fi Direct ................................................................................................. 2-23

Energy Saver function .................................................................................................... 2-25

Low Power Mode .................................................................................................... 2-25

Sleep and Auto Sleep ............................................................................................. 2-25

Installing Software .......................................................................................................... 2-28

Software on DVD (Windows) .................................................................................. 2-28

Installing Software in Windows ............................................................................... 2-29

Uninstalling the Software ........................................................................................ 2-35

Installing Software in Mac Computer ...................................................................... 2-36

Setting TWAIN Driver .............................................................................................. 2-38

Setting WIA Driver ................................................................................................... 2-40

Checking the Counter ..................................................................................................... 2-41

Additional Preparations for the Administrator ............................................................. 2-42

Sending Documents to a PC ................................................................................... 2-42

Strengthening the Security ...................................................................................... 2-42

Command Center RX ...................................................................................................... 2-44

Accessing Command Center RX ............................................................................ 2-45

Changing Security Settings ..................................................................................... 2-46

Changing Device Information .................................................................................. 2-48

E-mail Settings ........................................................................................................ 2-50

Registering Destinations ......................................................................................... 2-54

Creating a New Custom Box ................................................................................... 2-55

Printing a document stored in a Custom Box .......................................................... 2-56

Transferring Data from Our Other Products ................................................................. 2-58

Migrating the Address Book .................................................................................... 2-58

3 Preparation before Use .......................................................................... 3-1

Loading Paper ................................................................................................................... 3-2

Precaution for Loading Paper ................................................................................... 3-3

Loading in the Cassettes ........................................................................................... 3-4

Loading Paper in the Multi Purpose Tray .................................................................. 3-8

Specifying Paper Size and Media Type .................................................................. 3-12

Paper Stopper .................................................................................................................. 3-14

Preparation for Sending a Document to a Shared Folder in a PC .............................. 3-15

Making a note of the computer name and full computer name ............................... 3-15

Making a note of the user name and domain name ................................................ 3-16

Creating a Shared Folder, Making a Note of a Shared Folder ................................ 3-17

Configuring Windows Firewall ................................................................................. 3-21

Registering Destinations in the Address Book ............................................................ 3-25

Adding a Destination (Address Book) ..................................................................... 3-25

Adding a Destination on One Touch Key (One Touch Key) .................................... 3-31

4 Printing from PC ..................................................................................... 4-1

Printing from PC ................................................................................................................ 4-2

Printing on Non-standard Sized Paper ...................................................................... 4-4

Banner printing .......................................................................................................... 4-5

Printer Driver Print Settings Screen .......................................................................... 4-9

Printer Driver Help ................................................................................................... 4-10

Changing the Default Printer Driver Settings (Windows 8.1) .................................. 4-10

Canceling Printing from a Computer ....................................................................... 4-10

Printing by AirPrint ......................................................................................................... 4-11

Printing by Google Cloud Print ...................................................................................... 4-11

Printing by Mopria ........................................................................................................... 4-11

Printing with Wi-Fi Direct ................................................................................................ 4-11

Printing Data Saved on the Printer ................................................................................ 4-12

Specifying the Job Box from a Computer and Storing the Job ............................... 4-12

Printing Documents from Private Print Box ............................................................. 4-13

Printing Document from Stored Job Box ................................................................. 4-15

Printing Document from Quick Copy Box ................................................................ 4-17

Printing Document from Proof and Hold Box .......................................................... 4-19

Status Monitor ................................................................................................................. 4-21

Accessing the Status Monitor .................................................................................. 4-21

Exiting the Status Monitor ....................................................................................... 4-21

Status Monitor Display ............................................................................................ 4-21

5 Operation on the Machine ..................................................................... 5-1

Loading Originals .............................................................................................................. 5-2

Placing Originals on the Platen ................................................................................. 5-2

Loading Originals in the Document Processor .......................................................... 5-3

Program .............................................................................................................................. 5-5

Registering Programs ............................................................................................... 5-5

Confirming the Registered Program .......................................................................... 5-6

Recalling Program ..................................................................................................... 5-6

Overwriting Program ................................................................................................. 5-7

Deleting Program ...................................................................................................... 5-7

Select Key Settings ........................................................................................................... 5-8

Copying .............................................................................................................................. 5-9

Basic Operation ......................................................................................................... 5-9

Canceling Jobs ........................................................................................................ 5-11

Sending ............................................................................................................................ 5-12

Basic Operation ....................................................................................................... 5-13

Specifying Destination ............................................................................................. 5-14

Checking and Editing Destinations ......................................................................... 5-20

Confirmation Screen of Destinations ....................................................................... 5-21

Recall ...................................................................................................................... 5-22

Send to Me (E-mail) ................................................................................................ 5-22

Sending to Different Types of Destinations (Multi Sending) .................................... 5-23

Canceling Sending Jobs ......................................................................................... 5-24

WSD Scan ............................................................................................................... 5-25

Using fax server to send a fax

(fax server transmission) ......................................................................................... 5-27

Scanning using TWAIN or WIA ............................................................................... 5-29

How to use the FAX Function ........................................................................................ 5-30

What is Document Box? ................................................................................................. 5-31

Using a Custom Box ....................................................................................................... 5-33

Creating a New Custom Box ................................................................................... 5-33

Editing and Deleting Custom Box ........................................................................... 5-35

Storing Documents .................................................................................................. 5-35

Printing Documents ................................................................................................. 5-36

Editing Documents .................................................................................................. 5-37

Deleting Documents ................................................................................................ 5-38

Printing Documents Stored in Removable USB Memory ............................................ 5-39

Saving Documents to USB Memory (Scan to USB) ..................................................... 5-41

Check the USB Memory Information ............................................................................. 5-42

Removing USB Memory .................................................................................................. 5-43

6 Using Various Functions ....................................................................... 6-1

Functions Available on the Machine ............................................................................... 6-2

Copy .......................................................................................................................... 6-3

Send .......................................................................................................................... 6-4

Custom Box (Printing) ............................................................................................... 6-6

Removable Memory (Store File, Printing Documents) .............................................. 6-7

Functions ........................................................................................................................... 6-9

ID Card Copy ............................................................................................................ 6-9

Original Size .............................................................................................................. 6-9

Paper Selection ....................................................................................................... 6-10

Orig. Orientation (Original Orientation) ................................................................... 6-11

Mixed Size Orig. (Mixed Size Originals) .................................................................. 6-12

Collate ..................................................................................................................... 6-12

Density .................................................................................................................... 6-12

Original Image ......................................................................................................... 6-13

EcoPrint ................................................................................................................... 6-13

Color Selection ........................................................................................................ 6-14

Sharpness ............................................................................................................... 6-14

Contrast ................................................................................................................... 6-15

Background Density ................................................................................................ 6-15

Prevent Bleed-t (Prevent Bleed-thru) ...................................................................... 6-16

Zoom ....................................................................................................................... 6-16

Combine .................................................................................................................. 6-18

Duplex ..................................................................................................................... 6-20

Continuous Scan ..................................................................................................... 6-22

Job Finish Notice ..................................................................................................... 6-22

File Name Entry ...................................................................................................... 6-22

Print Override .......................................................................................................... 6-23

Quiet Mode .............................................................................................................. 6-23

Skip Blank Page ...................................................................................................... 6-23

Duplex (2-sided Original) ........................................................................................ 6-24

Sending Size ........................................................................................................... 6-25

File Format .............................................................................................................. 6-26

File Separation ........................................................................................................ 6-30

Scan Resolution ...................................................................................................... 6-30

Subject/Body ........................................................................................................... 6-30

FTP Encrypted TX ................................................................................................... 6-31

Del. after Print (Delete after Printed) ....................................................................... 6-31

Storing Size ............................................................................................................. 6-32

Long Original ........................................................................................................... 6-32

Encrypted PDF ........................................................................................................ 6-33

JPEG/TIFF Print ...................................................................................................... 6-33

XPS FitTo Page ...................................................................................................... 6-33

7 Status/Job Cancel .................................................................................. 7-1

Checking Job Status ......................................................................................................... 7-2

Checking Job History ....................................................................................................... 7-8

Sending the Log History .......................................................................................... 7-12

Job Operation .................................................................................................................. 7-13

Pause and Resumption of Jobs .............................................................................. 7-13

Canceling of Jobs .................................................................................................... 7-13

Device/Communication ................................................................................................... 7-14

Checking the Remaining Amount of Toner and Paper (Paper/Supplies) ................... 7-16

8 Setup and Registration (System Menu) ............................................... 8-1

System Menu ..................................................................................................................... 8-2

System Menu Settings .............................................................................................. 8-3

Report ....................................................................................................................... 8-5

System/Network ........................................................................................................ 8-7

User/Job Account .................................................................................................... 8-23

User Property .......................................................................................................... 8-23

Common Settings .................................................................................................... 8-24

Copy ........................................................................................................................ 8-38

Printer ...................................................................................................................... 8-39

Send ........................................................................................................................ 8-41

FAX ......................................................................................................................... 8-41

Document Box ......................................................................................................... 8-42

Edit Destination ....................................................................................................... 8-43

Adjust/Maint. ........................................................................................................... 8-44

9 User Authentication and Accounting (User Login, Job Accounting) 9-1

Overview of User Login Administration .......................................................................... 9-2

Enabling User Login Administration ............................................................................... 9-3

Setting User Login Administration .................................................................................. 9-5

Authentication Security ............................................................................................. 9-5

Adding a User (Local User List) ................................................................................ 9-6

Changing User Properties ......................................................................................... 9-9

User Login Administration for Printing ..................................................................... 9-11

To Manage the Users to Scan Using TWAIN .......................................................... 9-13

To Manage the Users to Scan Using WIA .............................................................. 9-14

To Manage the Users that Send Faxes from a PC ................................................. 9-15

Local Authoriz. (Local Authorization) ...................................................................... 9-16

Group Auth. (Group Authorization Settings) ........................................................... 9-17

Guest Authorization Set. ......................................................................................... 9-18

NW User Property (Obtain Network User Property) ................................................ 9-21

ID Card Settings ...................................................................................................... 9-22

PIN Login Settings .................................................................................................. 9-23

Using User Login Administration .................................................................................. 9-24

Login/Logout ........................................................................................................... 9-24

Overview of Job Accounting .......................................................................................... 9-25

Enabling Job Accounting ............................................................................................... 9-26

Job Accounting Access ........................................................................................... 9-27

Setting an Account .......................................................................................................... 9-28

Adding an Account .................................................................................................. 9-28

Restricting the Use of the Machine ......................................................................... 9-30

Editing an Account .................................................................................................. 9-31

Deleting an Account ................................................................................................ 9-32

Job Accounting for Printing ..................................................................................... 9-33

Job Accounting for Scan Using TWAIN .................................................................. 9-34

Job Accounting for Scan Using WIA ....................................................................... 9-35

Job Accounting for the FAX Transmitted from a Computer .................................... 9-36

Configuring Job Accounting .......................................................................................... 9-37

Default Setting ......................................................................................................... 9-37

Counting the Number of Pages Printed .................................................................. 9-39

Print Accounting Report .......................................................................................... 9-40

Using Job Accounting .................................................................................................... 9-41

Login/Logout ........................................................................................................... 9-41

Unknown User Settings .................................................................................................. 9-42

Unknown ID Job ...................................................................................................... 9-42

vii

Registering Information for a User whose ID is Unknown ....................................... 9-43

10 Troubleshooting ................................................................................... 10-1

Regular Maintenance ...................................................................................................... 10-2

Cleaning .................................................................................................................. 10-2

Toner Container Replacement ................................................................................ 10-5

Waste Toner Box Replacement .............................................................................. 10-9

Troubleshooting ............................................................................................................ 10-11

Solving Malfunctions ............................................................................................. 10-11

Responding to Messages ...................................................................................... 10-16

Clearing Paper Jams ............................................................................................. 10-27

11 Appendix ............................................................................................... 11-1

Optional Equipment ........................................................................................................ 11-2

Overview of Optional Equipment ............................................................................. 11-2

Optional Applications .............................................................................................. 11-7

Character Entry Method .................................................................................................. 11-9

Using the Keys ........................................................................................................ 11-9

Selecting Type of Characters ................................................................................ 11-10

Characters That Can be Entered Using the Numeric Keys ................................... 11-10

Entering Symbols .................................................................................................. 11-11

Entering Characters .............................................................................................. 11-11

Entering Using the Character Selection Screen .................................................... 11-13

Paper .............................................................................................................................. 11-14

Basic Paper Specifications .................................................................................... 11-14

Choosing the Appropriate Paper ........................................................................... 11-15

Special Paper ........................................................................................................ 11-18

Specifications ................................................................................................................ 11-22

Machine ................................................................................................................. 11-22

Copy Functions ..................................................................................................... 11-24

Printer Functions ................................................................................................... 11-24

Scanner Functions ................................................................................................ 11-25

Document Processor ............................................................................................. 11-25

Paper Feeder (500-sheet) (Option) ....................................................................... 11-26

Glossary ......................................................................................................................... 11-27

Index ............................................................................................................................ Index-1

viii

> Overview

Overview

This machine is equipped standard with copy and print functions, and a scanned image can be sent to an E-mail

recipient as an attachment or to a computer on the same network. On products with a FAX function, it is also possible to

use the fax function.

NOTE

• Before using the machine, be sure to read the following:

Legal and Safety Information (page 1-1)

• For preparations for use of the machine such as cable connections and software installation, refer to the following:

Installing and Setting up the Machine (page 2-1)

• To learn how to load paper, set up shared folders, and add addresses to the address book, refer to the following:

Preparation before Use (page 3-1)

Operations from your PC

Document

Box functions

Security

Output Data

Copy functions Printer functions USB memory

Send functions

Fax functions

Original Electronic data Fax dataUSB memory

Input Data

Wi-Fi connection

FAX Operation

Guide

This function is useful for a variety of purposes,

including saving data in the machine and in a

USB memory stick.

Printing Data Saved on the Printer (page 4-

12)

Using a Custom Box (page 5-33)

You can use the machine security

levels according to your needs.

Sending (page 5-12)

Command Center RX

You can check the status and change the

settings of the machine from a Web browser

on your computer.

Command Center RX (page 2-44)

Command Center RX User Guide

Strengthening the

Security (page 2-42)

Copying (page 5-9)

Printing from PC (page 4-1)

Saving Documents to

USB Memory (Scan to

USB) (page 5-41)

Wi-Fi or Wi-Fi Direct

connection is possible.

Configuring the

Wireless Network (page

2-19)

> Machine Features

Machine Features

The machine is equipped with many useful functions.

Using Various Functions (page 6-1)

Here are some examples.

Optimize your office workflow

Access to frequently used functions

with just one touch (Program)

You can preset frequently used functions.

Once you register frequently used

settings as favorite, you can call up the

settings easily. Using this favorite brings

the same results even if operated by

another person.

Program (page 5-5)

Scan originals of different sizes at a

time (Mixed Size Originals)

It is useful when preparing conference

materials.

You can set the different sized originals at

one time so you don't need to reset the

originals regardless of size.

Mixed Size Orig. (Mixed Size

Originals) (page 6-12)

Scan a large number of originals in

separate batches and produce as one

job (Continuous Scan)

It is useful when preparing many-page

handouts.

When a large number of originals cannot

be placed in the document processor at

one time, the originals can be scanned in

separate batches and then copied or sent

as one job.

Continuous Scan (page 6-22)

Optimize your office workflow

Send one time with multiple sending

options (Multi Sending)

You can send a same document to the

multiple destinations using a different

method.

You can specify multiple destinations of

different send methods such as E-mail,

SMB, and Fax.

You can reduce your workflow by sending

a job at once.

Sending to Different Types of

Destinations (Multi Sending) (page

5-23)

Save frequently used documents in

the machine (Custom Box)

You can save the frequently used

document in the machine and print it

when needed.

Using a Custom Box (page 5-33)

Send a FAX from a PC

(Sending FAX from PC)

You can save the paper used for sending

a FAX with this function.

You can send a file to be faxed from the

PC without printing the file, so that you

can reduce the number of pieces of paper

and perform sending jobs efficiently.

FAX Operation Guide

1~10

1~30

11~20

21~30

> Machine Features

Save energy and cost

Save energy as needed

(Energy Saver function)

The machine is equipped with Energy

Saver function that automatically

switched into Sleep Mode.

Energy Saver function (page 2-25)

Use less toner for printing

(EcoPrint)

You can save toner consumption with this

function.

When you only need to check the printed

content, such as a trial print run or

documents for internal confirmation, use

this function to save toner.

Use this function when a high-quality print

is not required.

EcoPrint (page 6-13)

Reduce paper use

(Paper Saving Printing)

You can print originals on both sides of

the paper. You can also print multiple

originals onto one sheet.

Combine (page 6-18)

Duplex (page 6-20)

Save energy and cost Create attractive documents

Skip blank pages when printing

(Skip Blank Page)

When there are blank pages in a scanned

document, this function skips the blank

pages and prints only pages that are not

blank.

Skip Blank Page (page 6-23)

Send a FAX to reduce the

communication cost

(FAX Delayed Transmission)

You can reduce the communication cost

with this function.

The communication cost can be reduced

by setting the timer to the time period

during which the communication cost is

low.

FAX Operation Guide

Prevent image bleed-through

(Prevent Bleed-through)

You can prevent image bleed-through

from the reverse side when scanning thin

originals.

Prevent Bleed-t (Prevent Bleed-thru)

(page 6-16)

Off

> Machine Features

Strengthen security

Password-protect a PDF file

(PDF Encryption Functions)

Use the PDF format's password security

options to restrict document viewing,

printing and editing.

Encrypted PDF (page 6-33)

Protect data on the SSD

(Encryption / Overwrite)

You can overwrite the unnecessary data

that remains on the SSD automatically.

To prevent an external leakage, the

machine is able to encrypt data before

writing it to the SSD.

Data Security (page 8-21)

Prevent loss of finished documents

(Private Print)

You can temporarily save a printer

document in the machine. By printing the

document from the machine prevents

someone takes your document.

Printing Data Saved on the Printer

(page 4-12)

Strengthen security Use functions more efficiently

(Card Authentication)

You can log in simply by touching an ID

card. You don't need to enter your user

name and password.

Card Authentication Kit(B) "Card

Authentication Kit" (page 11-3)

Strengthen security

(Settings for Administrator)

Various functions are available for

administrators to strengthen security.

Strengthening the Security (page 2-

42)

Make the machine quiet

(Quiet Mode)

You can make the machine quiet by

reducing its running noise. You can

configure this mode by job.

Quiet Mode (page 6-23)

OK !

xii

> Machine Features

Use functions more efficiently

Install the machine without concerning

the network cables (Wireless Network)

In an environment where the wireless

LAN is used, you can install the machine

without concerning the network cables.

Setup (page 8-18)

Use USB memory

(USB Memory)

It is useful when you need to print

document outside your office or you

cannot print document from your PC.

You can print the document from the USB

memory by plugging it directly into the

machine.

Original scanned at the machine can be

saved in the USB memory also.

Printing Documents Stored in

Removable USB Memory (page 5-

39)

Saving Documents to USB Memory

(Scan to USB) (page 5-41)

Specify image file format

(File Format)

You can select the various file formats

when sending/storing images.

File Format (page 6-26)

Use functions more efficiently

Perform remote operation

(Command Center RX)

You can access to the machine remotely

to print, send or download data.

Administrators can configure the machine

behavior or management settings.

Command Center RX (page 2-44)

xiii

> Color and Image Quality Functions

Color and Image Quality Functions

The machine is equipped with various color and image quality functions. You can adjust the scanned image as desired.

Basic Color Modes

The basic color modes are as follows.

For details, refer to the following:

Color Selection (page 6-14)

Color mode Description

Reference image Reference

page

Before After

Auto Color Automatically recognizes whether a

document being scanned is color or black

& white.

page 6-14

Full Color Scans a document in full color. page 6-14

Grayscale Scans a document in grayscale. page 6-14

Black & White Scans a document in black & white. page 6-14

xiv

> Color and Image Quality Functions

Adjusting Image Quality and Color

To adjust the image quality or color of an image, use the following functions.

I want to...

Sample image

Function Page

Before After

Adjust the color precisely.

Adjust the density. Density page 6-12

Adjust the image quality precisely

Emphasize or blur the image

outline.

Example: Emphasize the image

outlines

Sharpness page 6-14

Adjust the difference between

dark and light parts of the image.

Contrast page 6-15

Darken or lighten the background

(the area with no texts or images)

of a document.

Example: Lightening the

background

Background Density page 6-15

Prevent bleed-through in 2-sided

originals.

Prevent Bleed-

through

page 6-16

Adjust the scanned image

Decrease the file size and

produce the characters clearly.

File format

[High Comp. PDF]

page 6-26

> Guides Provided with the Machine

Guides Provided with the Machine

The following guides are provided with the machine. Refer to each guide as needed.

The contents of the guides are subject to change without notice for the purpose of improvement of machine

performance.

Printed guides

Start using the

machine quickly

Quick Guide

Explains how to use basic functions of the machine, how to use convenient features, how

to perform routine maintenance, and what to do when problems occur.

For safe use of the

machine

Safety Guide

Provides safety and cautionary information for installation environment and use of the

machine. Be sure to read this guide before using the machine.

Safety Guide (ECOSYS M3145dn/ECOSYS M3645dn)

Indicates the space required for machine installation, and describes the cautionary labels

and other safety information. Be sure to read this guide before using the machine.

xvi

> Guides Provided with the Machine

Guides (PDF) on the DVD (Product Library)

Install the following versions of Adobe Reader to view the manuals on the DVD.

Version 8.0 or later

Use the machine

thoughtfully

Operation Guide (This Guide)

Explains how to load paper and perform copy, print and scan operations, and indicates

default settings and other information.

Use the fax functions FAX Operation Guide

Explains how to use the fax function.

Use the ID card Card Authentication Kit (B) Operation Guide

Explains how to perform authentication using the ID card.

Strengthen security

Data Security Kit (E) Operation Guide

Explains how to introduce and use the Data Security kit (E), and how to overwrite and encrypt

data.

Easily register

machine information

and configure settings

Command Center RX User Guide

Explains how to access the machine from a Web browser on your computer to check and

change settings.

Print data from a

computer

Printer Driver User Guide

Explains how to install the printer driver and use the printer function.

Directly print a PDF file KYOCERA Net Direct Print Operation Guide

Explains how to print PDF files without launching Adobe Acrobat or Reader.

Monitor the machine

and printers on the

network

KYOCERA Net Viewer User Guide

Explains how to monitor your network printing system (the machine) with KYOCERA Net

Viewer.

Print without using the

printer driver

PRESCRIBE Commands Command Reference

Describes the native printer language (PRESCRIBE commands).

PRESCRIBE Commands Technical Reference

Describes the PRESCRIBE command functions and control for each type of emulation.

Adjust the print or

scan position

Maintenance Menu User Guide

Maintenance Menu provides the explanation on how to configure the print, scan, and other

settings.

xvii

> About the Operation Guide (this Guide)

About the Operation Guide (this Guide)

Structure of the guide

The Operation Guide contains the following chapters.

Chapter Contents

1Legal and Safety Information Provides precautions regarding use of the machine and trademark information.

2Installing and Setting up the

Machine

Explains part names, cable connections, installation of the software, login, logout, and

other matters related to administration of the machine.

3Preparation before Use Explains preparations and settings that are required in order to use the machine, such

as how to use the operation panel, load paper, and create an address book.

4Printing from PC Explains functions that are available when the machine is used as a printer.

5Operation on the Machine Explains the basic procedures for using the machine, such as placing originals, making

copies, sending documents, and using document boxes.

6Using Various Functions Explains convenient functions that are available on the machine.

7Status/Job Cancel Explains how to check the status of a job and the job history, and how to cancel jobs

being printed or waiting to print. Also explains how to check paper and toner levels, how

to check the device status, and how to cancel fax transmission.

8Setup and Registration (System

Menu)

Explains System Menu and how it relates to the operation of the machine.

9User Authentication and

Accounting (User Login, Job

Accounting)

Explains user login and job accounting.

10 Troubleshooting Explains what to do when toner runs out, an error is displayed, or a paper jam or other

problem occurs.

11 Appendix Describes convenient options that are available for the machine. Provides information

on media types and paper sizes, and gives a glossary of terms. Explains how to enter

characters, and lists the specifications of the machine.

xviii

> About the Operation Guide (this Guide)

Conventions Used in This Guide

Adobe Reader XI is used as an example in the explanations below.

Certain items are indicated in this guide by the conventions described below.

NOTE

The items that appear in Adobe Reader vary depending on how it is used. If the Table of Contents or tools do not

appear, refer to Adobe Reader Help.

Convention Description

[Bold] Indicates keys and buttons.

"Regular" Indicates a message or setting.

Click to move from the current page to the previously

displayed page. This is convenient when you want to return

to the page from which you jumped to the current page.

Click an item in the Table of

Contents to jump to the

corresponding page.

CAUTION

Indicates that personal injury or

mechanical damage may result

from insufficient attention to or

incorrect compliance with the

related points.

NOTE

Indicates supplemental

explanations and reference

information for operations.

IMPORTANT

Indicates operational requirements

and restrictions to operate the

machine correctly, and avoid

damage to the machine or property.

Refer to

Click the underlined text to jump to

the corresponding page.

xix

> About the Operation Guide (this Guide)

Conventions used in procedures for operating the machine

In this Operation Guide, continuous operation is as follows:

Actual procedure Procedure indicated in this guide

Select the [System Menu/Counter] key.



Select the [▲] or [] key to select [Common settings].



Select the [OK] key.

[System Menu/Counter] key > [▲] [] key >

[Common Settings] > [OK] key

> Menu Map

Menu Map

This is a list of menus displayed on the message display. Depending on the settings, some menus may not be displayed.

Some menu names may differ from their reference titles.

Quiet Mode (page 6-23)

Paper Selection (page 6-10)

Collate (page 6-12)

ID Card Copy (page 6-9)

Duplex (page 6-20)

Zoom (page 6-16)

Combine (page 6-18)

Original Size (page 6-9)

Orig.Orientation (page 6-11)

Mixed Size Orig. (page 6-12)

Original Image (page 6-13)

Density (page 6-12)

EcoPrint (page 6-13)

Continuous Scan (page 6-22)

File Name Entry (page 6-22)

JobFinish Notice (page 6-22)

Print Override (page 6-23)

Sharpness (page 6-14)

Contrast (page 6-15)

Backgrnd Density (page 6-15)

Prevent Bleed-t (page 6-16)

Skip Blank Page (page 6-23)

xxi

> Menu Map

Me(E-mail) (page 5-22)

E-mail (page 5-16)

Folder(SMB) (page 5-17)

Folder(FTP) (page 5-17)

WSD Scan (page 5-26)

FAX Server (page 5-27)

FAX (Refer to FAX Operation Guide.)

Quiet Mode (page 6-23)

Color Selection (page 6-14)

Original Size (page 6-9)

Original Image (page 6-13)

Scan Resolution (page 6-30)

Sending Size (page 6-25)

Zoom (page 6-16)

Orig.Orientation (page 6-11)

Mixed Size Orig. (page 6-12)

Continuous Scan (page 6-22)

File Format (page 6-26)

File Name Entry (page 6-22)

Subject/Body (page 6-30)

Long Original (page 6-32)

JobFinish Notice (page 6-22)

FAX Resolution (Refer to FAX Operation Guide.)

FAX Delayed TX (Refer to FAX Operation Guide.)

FAX Direct TX (Refer to FAX Operation Guide.)

FAX RX Polling (Refer to FAX Operation Guide.)

FAX TX Report (Refer to FAX Operation Guide.)

Density (page 6-12)

Duplex (page 6-24)

FTP Encrypted TX (page 6-31)

File Separation (page 6-30)

Sharpness (page 6-14)

Contrast (page 6-15)

Backgrnd Density (page 6-15)

Prevent Bleed-t (page 6-16)

Skip Blank Page (page 6-23)

xxii

> Menu Map

Custom

Box

(File

Selection)

Print (ChangeSet) Quiet Mode (page 6-23)

Collate (page 6-12)

Paper Selection (page 6-10)

Duplex (page 6-20)

EcoPrint (page 6-13)

File Name Entry (page 6-22)

JobFinish Notice (page 6-22)

Print Override (page 6-23)

Del. After Print (page 6-31)

Sub Address Box (Refer to FAX Operation Guide.)

Polling Box (Refer to FAX Operation Guide.)

Job Box Private/Stored (page 4-13)

Quick/Proof (page 4-17)

USB

Memory

Store File Quiet Mode (page 6-23)

Color Selection (page 6-14)

Original Size (page 6-9)

Original Image (page 6-13)

Scan Resolution (page 6-30)

Storing Size (page 6-32)

Zoom (page 6-16)

Orig.Orientation (page 6-11)

Mixed Size Orig. (page 6-12)

Continuous Scan (page 6-22)

Long Original (page 6-32)

File Format (page 6-26)

File Separation (page 6-30)

File Name Entry (page 6-22)

JobFinish Notice (page 6-22)

Density (page 6-12)

Duplex (page 6-24)

Sharpness (page 6-14)

Contrast (page 6-15)

Backgrnd Density (page 6-15)

Prevent Bleed-t (page 6-16)

Skip Blank Page (page 6-23)

xxiii

> Menu Map

USB

Memory

(File

Selection)

Print Quiet Mode (page 6-23)

Collate (page 6-12)

Paper Selection (page 6-10)

Duplex (page 6-20)

EcoPrint (page 6-13)

File Name Entry (page 6-22)

JobFinish Notice (page 6-22)

Print Override (page 6-23)

Encrypted PDF (page 6-33)

JPEG/TIFF Print (page 6-33)

XPS FitTo Page (page 6-33)

Recall program. (page 5-5)

Print Job Status (page 7-4)

Send Job Status (page 7-5)

Store Job Status (page 7-6)

Scheduled Job (page 7-7)

Print Job Log (page 7-10)

Send Job Log (page 7-11)

Store Job Log (page 7-12)

FAX Job Log (Refer to FAX Operation Guide.)

Scanner (page 7-14)

Printer (page 7-14)

FAX (Refer to FAX Operation Guide.)

Toner Status (page 7-16)

Paper Status (page 7-16)

USB Memory (page 7-14)

SSD (page 7-14)

USB Keyboard (page 7-14)

Keyboard (page 7-14)

Network (page 7-14)

Wi-Fi (page 7-14)

Wi-Fi Direct (page 7-15)

Option Network (page 7-15)

xxiv

> Menu Map

Report Report Print Menu Map (page 8-5)

Status Page (page 8-5)

Font List (page 8-5)

Opt NW Status (page 8-5)

Data Sanitization (page 8-5)

Admin Rpt Set. (Refer to FAX Operation Guide.)

Result Rpt Set. (page 8-6)

Job Log History Auto Sending (page 8-6)

Send History (page 8-6)

Destination (page 8-6)

Subject (page 8-6)

SSFC Log Subject (page 8-6)

Personal Info. (page 8-6)

Counter (page 2-41)

xxv

> Menu Map

System/Network Network Setting Host Name (page 8-7)

Wi-Fi Direct Set Wi-Fi Direct (page 8-7)

Device Name (page 8-7)

IP Address (page 8-7)

Auto Disconnect (page 8-7)

Wi-Fi Settings Wi-Fi (page 8-8)

Setup (page 8-8)

TCP/IP Settings (page 8-10)

Restart Network (page 8-11)

Wired Netwk. Set TCP/IP Settings (page 8-11)

LAN Interface (page 8-11)

Bonjour (page 8-12)

IP Filter (IPv4) (page 8-12)

IP Filter (IPv6) (page 8-12)

IPSec (page 8-12)

Protocol Settings (page 8-16)

Secure Settings (page 8-7)

Ping (page 8-17)

Restart Network (page 8-17)

Optional Network Basic (page 8-17)

Wireless Network Setup (page 8-18)

Basic (page 8-17)

Primary Network (page 8-19)

I/F Block Set. USB Host (page 8-20)

USB Device (page 8-20)

USB Storage (page 8-20)

Option I/F (page 8-20)

Bluetooth Set. (page 8-20)

Security Level (page 8-20)

Data Security (page 8-21)

Restart (page 8-22)

Op Functions (page 8-22)

Software Version (page 8-22)

FAX Server Set. (page 8-22)

xxvi

> Menu Map

User/Job Account User Login Set. User Login (page 9-3)

Local User List (page 9-6)

Local Authoriz. (page 9-16)

Account Lockout (page 9-5)

ID Card Settings Key Login (page 9-22)

Additional Auth. (page 9-22)

Group Auth. (page 9-17)

Guest Auth. Set. (page 9-18)

PIN Login (page 9-18)

NW User Property (page 9-21)

Job Account.Set. Job Accounting (page 9-26)

AccountingAccess (page 9-27)

Account. Report (page 9-40)

Total Accounting (page 9-39)

Each Job Account (page 9-39)

Account. List (page 9-28)

Default Setting Apply Limit (page 9-37)

Copy/Print Count (page 9-37)

Counter Limit (page 9-38)

Unknown User Unknown ID Job (page 9-42)

User Property (page 9-43)

User Property (page 9-10)

Common Settings Language (page 8-24)

Default Screen (page 8-24)

Sound Buzzer (page 8-24)

FAX Speaker (Refer to FAX Operation Guide.)

FAX Monitor (Refer to FAX Operation Guide.)

Display Bright. (page 8-24)

Orig./Paper Set. Custom Orig.Size (page 8-25)

Detect Orig.(DP) (page 8-25)

Def. Orig. Size (page 8-25)

Custom PaperSize (page 8-26)

xxvii

> Menu Map

Common Settings Orig./Paper Set. Cassette 1 Set. Cassette 1 Size (page 8-28)

Cassette 1 Type (page 8-28)

Cassette 2 Set. Cassette 2 Size (page 8-28)

Cassette 2 Type (page 8-28)

Cassette 3 Set. Cassette 3 Size (page 8-28)

Cassette 3 Type (page 8-28)

Cassette 4 Set. Cassette 4 Size (page 8-28)

Cassette 4 Type (page 8-28)

Cassette 5 Set. Cassette 5 Size (page 8-28)

Cassette 5 Type (page 8-28)

MP Tray Set. MP Tray Size (page 8-28)

MP Tray Type (page 8-28)

Media Type Set. (page 8-27)

Media for Auto (page 8-27)

Def. PaperSource (page 8-27)

SpcialPaper Act. (page 8-27)

Paper Setup Msg (page 8-27)

Preset Limit (page 8-29)

Measurement (page 8-29)

Error Handling DuplexPaperError (page 8-30)

PaperMismatchErr (page 8-30)

Date Setting Date/Time (page 8-30)

Date Format (page 8-30)

Time Zone (page 8-30)

Summer Time (page 8-30)

Timer Setting Auto Panel Reset (page 8-31)

PanelReset Timer (page 8-31)

Low Power Timer (page 8-31)

Sleep Level (models except for Europe) (page 8-31)

Sleep Rules (models for Europe) (page 8-31)

Sleep Timer (page 8-31)

Weekly Timer Set. (page 8-32)

Power Off Rule (page 8-32)

Power Off Timer (page 8-32)

Auto Err. Clear (page 8-32)

Err. Clear Timer (page 8-32)

Unusable Time (Refer to FAX Operation Guide.)

Ping Timeout (page 8-32)

xxviii

> Menu Map

Common Settings Function Default Color Selection (page 8-33)

Scan Resolution (page 8-33)

FAX Resolution (Refer to FAX Operation Guide.)

Orig.Image(Copy) (page 8-33)

Orig.Image(Send) (page 8-33)

Zoom (page 8-33)

Collate (page 8-33)

Orig.Orientation (page 8-33)

Backgrnd(Copy) (page 8-33)

Backgrnd(Send) (page 8-33)

EcoPrint (page 8-33)

Prevent B-t Copy (page 8-33)

Prevent B-t Send (page 8-33)

Skip Blank(Copy) (page 8-33)

Skip Blank(Send) (page 8-33)

File Name Entry (page 8-33)

Subject/Body (page 8-34)

Con.scan-Copy (page 8-34)

Con.scan-FAX (page 8-34)

Con.scan-Others (page 8-34)

File Format (page 8-34)

File Separation (page 8-34)

JPEG/TIFF Print (page 8-34)

XPS FitTo Page (page 8-34)

Detail Setting 2 in 1 Layout (page 8-34)

4 in 1 Layout (page 8-34)

Border Line (page 8-34)

Orig. Binding (page 8-34)

Finish. Binding (page 8-34)

Image Quality (page 8-34)

Color TIFF Comp. (page 8-34)

PDF/A (page 8-34)

High Comp.PDF (page 8-34)

Items To Skip Copy

(page 8-34)

Items To Skip Send

(page 8-34)

RAM Disk Mode (page 8-35)

xxix

> Menu Map

Common Settings Optional Memory (page 8-35)

Disp. Status/Log (page 8-36)

Keyboard Type (page 8-36)

Low Toner Alert (page 8-36)

Show PowerOffMsg (page 8-36)

EnergySaver Set. (page 8-37)

Msg Banner Print (page 8-37)

Copy Paper Selection (page 8-38)

AutoPaperSelect. (page 8-38)

Auto % Priority (page 8-38)

Reserve Priority (page 8-38)

Select Key Set. (page 8-38)

Printer Emulation Set. (page 8-39)

EcoPrint (page 8-39)

Override A4/LTR (page 8-39)

Duplex (page 8-39)

Copies (page 8-39)

Orientation (page 8-39)

Wide A4 (page 8-39)

FormFeed TimeOut (page 8-39)

LF Action (page 8-39)

CR Action (page 8-39)

Job Name (page 8-40)

User Name (page 8-40)

MP Tray Priority (page 8-40)

Paper Feed Mode (page 8-40)

Auto Cass. Change (page 8-40)

Resolution (page 8-40)

KIR (page 8-40)

Job Terminator (page 8-40)

Send Select Key Set. (page 8-41)

DestinationCheck (page 8-41)

New Dest. Entry (page 8-41)

Recall Dest. (page 8-41)

Broadcast (page 8-41)

Default Screen (page 8-41)

Send and Forward (page 8-41)

FAX (Refer to FAX Operation Guide.)

xxx

> Menu Map

Document Box Custom Box (page 5-33)

Sub Address Box (Refer to FAX Operation Guide.)

Job Box Quick Copy Jobs (page 8-42)

JobRet. Deletion (page 8-42)

Storage Media (page 8-42)

Polling Box (Refer to FAX Operation Guide.)

Select Key Set. (page 8-38)

Edit Destination Address Book (page 8-43)

Edit Restriction (page 8-43)

Print List (page 8-43)

AddrBookDefaults (page 8-43)

Adjust/Maint. Quiet Mode (page 8-44)

Copy Denst. Adj. (page 8-44)

Send/Box Density (page 8-44)

Contrast (Copy) (page 8-44)

Contrast (Send) (page 8-44)

Backgrnd Density (page 8-44)

EcoPrint Setting (page 8-44)

Print Density (page 8-44)

AutoColorCorrect (page 8-44)

Correct. Bk Line (page 8-45)

Service Setting (page 8-45)

1-1

1 Legal and Safety

Information

Please read this information before using your machine. This chapter provides information on the following topics.

Notice ................................................................................................................................................................. 1-2

Safety Conventions in This Guide ........................................................................................................... 1-2

Environment ............................................................................................................................................. 1-3

Precautions for Use ................................................................................................................................. 1-4

Laser Safety (Europe) .............................................................................................................................. 1-5

SAFETY OF LASER BEAM (USA) .......................................................................................................... 1-6

Safety Instructions Regarding the Disconnection of Power ..................................................................... 1-7

Compliance and Conformity .................................................................................................................... 1-7

Other precautions (for users in California, the United States) .................................................................. 1-7

Warranty (the United States and Canada) ............................................................................................... 1-8

Legal Restriction on Copying/Scanning ................................................................................................... 1-9

EN ISO 7779 ............................................................................................................................................ 1-9

EK1-ITB 2000 .......................................................................................................................................... 1-9

Wireless Connection (Mexico only) ......................................................................................................... 1-9

Security Precautions when Using Wireless LAN (If equipped) ................................................................ 1-9

Limited Use of This Product (If equipped) ............................................................................................. 1-10

Legal Information .................................................................................................................................... 1-11

Energy Saving Control Function ............................................................................................................ 1-17

Automatic 2-Sided Print Function .......................................................................................................... 1-17

Resource Saving - Paper ....................................................................................................................... 1-17

Environmental benefits of "Power Management" ................................................................................... 1-17

Energy Star (ENERGY STAR®) Program .............................................................................................. 1-18

1-2

Legal and Safety Information > Notice

Notice

Safety Conventions in This Guide

The sections of this guide and parts of the machine marked with symbols are safety warnings meant to protect the user,

other individuals and surrounding objects, and ensure correct and safe usage of the machine. The symbols and their

meanings are indicated below.

WARNING: Indicates that serious injury or even death may result from insufficient

attention to or incorrect compliance with the related points.

CAUTION: Indicates that personal injury or mechanical damage may result from

insufficient attention to or incorrect compliance with the related points.

Symbols

The  symbol indicates that the related section includes safety warnings. Specific points of attention are indicated

inside the symbol.

... [General warning]

... [Warning of high temperature]

The symbol indicates that the related section includes information on prohibited actions. Specifics of the prohibited

action are indicated inside the symbol.

... [Warning of prohibited action]

... [Disassembly prohibited]

The  symbol indicates that the related section includes information on actions which must be performed. Specifics of

the required action are indicated inside the symbol.

... [Alert of required action]

... [Remove the power plug from the outlet]

... [Always connect the machine to an outlet with a ground connection]

Please contact your service representative to order a replacement if the safety warnings in this Operation Guide are

illegible or if the guide itself is missing (fee required).

NOTE

An original which resembles a bank note closely may not be copied properly in some rare cases because this

machine is equipped with a counterfeiting prevention function.

1-3

Legal and Safety Information > Notice

Environment

The service environmental conditions are as follows:

Avoid the following locations when selecting a site for the machine.

• Avoid locations near a window or with exposure to direct sunlight.

• Avoid locations with vibrations.

• Avoid locations with drastic temperature fluctuations.

• Avoid locations with direct exposure to hot or cold air.

• Avoid poorly ventilated locations.

If the floor is delicate against casters, when this machine is moved after installation, the floor material may be damaged.

During copying, some ozone is released, but the amount does not cause any ill effect to one's health. If, however, the

machine is used over a long period of time in a poorly ventilated room or when making an extremely large number of

copies, the smell may become unpleasant. To maintain the appropriate environment for copy work, it is suggested that

the room be properly ventilated.

Temperature 50 to 90.5 °F (10 to 32.5 °C)

Humidity 15 to 80%

1-4

Legal and Safety Information > Notice

Precautions for Use

Cautions when handling consumables

CAUTION

Do not attempt to incinerate parts which contain toner. Dangerous sparks may cause burns.

Keep parts which contain toner out of the reach of children.

If toner happens to spill from parts which contain toner, avoid inhalation and ingestion, as well as contact with your eyes

and skin.

• If you do happen to inhale toner, move to a place with fresh air and gargle thoroughly with a large amount of water. If

coughing develops, contact a physician.

• If you do happen to ingest toner, rinse your mouth with water and drink 1 or 2 cups of water to dilute the contents of

your stomach. If necessary, contact a physician.

• If you do happen to get toner in your eyes, flush them thoroughly with water. If there is any remaining tenderness,

contact a physician.

• If toner does happen to get on your skin, wash with soap and water.

Do not attempt to force open or destroy parts which contain toner.

Other precautions

Return the exhausted toner container and waste toner box to your dealer or service representative. The collected toner

container and waste toner box will be recycled or disposed in accordance with the relevant regulations.

Store the machine while avoiding exposure to direct sunlight.

Store the machine in a place where the temperature stays below 40 °C while avoiding sharp changes of temperature

and humidity.

If the machine will not be used for an extended period of time, remove the paper from the cassette and the Multi Purpose

(MP) Tray, return it to its original package and reseal it.

1-5

Legal and Safety Information > Notice

Laser Safety (Europe)

Laser radiation could be hazardous to the human body. For this reason, laser radiation emitted inside this machine is

hermetically sealed within the protective housing and external cover. In the normal operation of the product by user, no

radiation can leak from the machine.

This machine is classified as Class 1 laser product under IEC/EN 60825-1:2014.

Regarding CLASS 1 laser products, information is provided on the rating label.

1-6

Legal and Safety Information > Notice

SAFETY OF LASER BEAM (USA)

1. Safety of laser beam

This machine has been certified by the manufacturer to Class 1 level under the radiation performance standards

established by the U.S.DHHS (Department of Health and Human Services) in 1968. This indicates that the product is

safe to use during normal operation and maintenance. The laser optical system, enclosed in a protective housing and

sealed within the external covers, never permits the laser beam to escape.

2. The CDRH Act

A laser-product-related act was implemented on Aug. 2, 1976, by the Center for Devices and Radiological Health

(CDRH) of the U.S. Food and Drug Administration (FDA). This act prohibits the sale of laser products in the U.S. without

certification, and applies to laser products manufactured after Aug. 1, 1976. The label shown below indicates

compliance with the CDRH regulations and must be attached to laser products marketed in the United States. On this

machine, the label is on the rear.

3. Maintenance

For safety of the service personnel, follow the maintenance instructions in the other section of this manual.

4. Safety switch

The power to the laser unit is cut off when the front cover is opened.

ECOSYS M3145dn / ECOSYS M3645dn

1-7

Legal and Safety Information > Notice

Safety Instructions Regarding the Disconnection of

Power

Caution: The power plug is the main isolation device! Other switches on the equipment are only functional switches and

are not suitable for isolating the equipment from the power source.

Attention: Le débranchement de la fiche secteur est le seul moyen de mettre l'appareil hors tension. Les interrupteurs

sur l'appareil ne sont que des interrupteurs de fonctionnement: ils ne mettent pas l'appareil hors tension.

Compliance and Conformity

This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class B digital device, pursuant to Part 15 of

the FCC Rules.

These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference in a residential installation. This

equipment generates, uses and can radiate radio frequency energy and, if not installed and used in accordance with the

instructions, may cause harmful interference to radio communications. However, there is no guarantee that interference

will not occur in a particular installation. If this equipment does cause harmful interference to radio or television

reception, which can be determined by turning the equipment off and on, the user is encouraged to try to correct the

interference by one or more of the following measures:

• Reorient or relocate the receiving antenna.

• Increase the separation between the equipment and receiver.

• Connect the equipment into an outlet on a circuit different from that to which the receiver is connected.

• Consult the dealer or an experienced radio/TV technician for help.

• The use of a non-shielded interface cable with the referenced device is prohibited.

CAUTION — The changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for compliance could void

the user's authority to operate the equipment.

This device complies with Part 15 of FCC Rules.

Operation is subject to the following two conditions; (1) this device may not cause harmful interference, and (2) this

device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation.

This device complies with Industry Canada licence-exempt RSS standard(s). Operation is subject to the following two

conditions: (1) this device may not cause interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference, including

interference that may cause undesired operation of the device.

The antenna(s) used for this transmitter must be installed to provide a separation distance of at least 20 cm from all

persons and must not be co-located or operating in conjunction with any other transmitter.

* The above statements are valid only in the United States of America and Canada.

NOTE — Use shielded interface cables.

Other precautions

(for users in California, the United States)

Perchlorate Material - special handling may apply. See www.dtsc.ca.gov/hazardouswaste/perchlorate.

Hereby, KYOCERA Document Solutions Inc. declares that the radio equipment type ECOSYS M3145dn/

ECOSYS M3645dn are in compliance with Directive 2014/53/EU.

The full text of the EU declaration of conformity is available at the following internet address:

https://www.kyoceradocumentsolutions.eu/index/service/dlc.html

Module name Software Ver. Frequency band in

which the radio

equipment operates:

Maximum radio-frequency power transmitted in the

frequency band in which the radio equipment

operates:

IB-51 (Option) 2.2.6 2.4GHz 100mW

IB-36 (Option) 2014.12 2.4GHz 100mW

1-8

Legal and Safety Information > Notice

Warranty (the United States and Canada)

ECOSYS M3145dn / M3645dn

MULTIFUNCTIONAL PRODUCT LIMITED WARRANTY

KYOCERA Document Solutions America, Inc. and KYOCERA Document Solutions Canada, Ltd.

(both referred to as "KYOCERA") warrant the Customer's new Multifunctional Product (referred to

as "MFP"), and the new accessories installed with the initial installation of the MFP, against any

defects in material and workmanship for a period of one year, or 300,000 copies/prints from date of

installation, whichever first occurs. In the event the MFP or an accessory is found to be defective

within the warranty period, KYOCERA's only obligation and the Customer's exclusive remedy shall

be replacement of any defective parts. KYOCERA shall have no obligation to furnish labor.

This warranty is valid only for the original retail purchaser (referred to as the "Customer") of a new

KYOCERA MFP in the United States of America or Canada, based upon the country of purchase.

In order to obtain performance of this warranty, the Customer must immediately notify the

Authorized KYOCERA Dealer from whom the product was purchased. If the KYOCERA Dealer is

not able to provide service, write to KYOCERA at the address below for the name and address of

the Authorized KYOCERA Dealer in your area, or check KYOCERA's website at

http://www.kyoceradocumentsolutions.com for KYOCERA Document Solutions America, Inc. or

http://www.kyoceradocumentsolutions.ca for KYOCERA Document Solutions Canada, Ltd.

This warranty does not cover MFPs or accessories which: (a) have become damaged due to

operator negligence, misuse, accidents, improper storage or unusual physical or electrical stress,

(b) have used parts or supplies which are not genuine KYOCERA brand parts or supplies, (c) have

been installed or serviced by a technician not employed by KYOCERA or an Authorized KYOCERA

Dealer, or (d) have had the serial number modified, altered, or removed.

This warranty gives the Customer specific legal rights. The Customer may also have other rights,

which vary from state to state, or province to province. Neither the seller, nor any other person, is

authorized to extend the time period or expand this warranty on behalf of KYOCERA.

THIS WARRANTY IS MADE IN LIEU OF ALL OTHER WARRANTIES AND CONDITIONS,

EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, AND KYOCERA SPECIFICALLY DISCLAIMS ANY IMPLIED

WARRANTY OR CONDITION OF MERCHANTABILITY OR FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR

PURPOSE. THIS WARRANTY SHALL NOT EXTEND TO, AND KYOCERA SHALL NOT BE

LIABLE FOR, ANY INCIDENTAL OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES WHICH MAY ARISE OUT OF

THE USE OF, OR INABILITY TO USE, THE MFP.

KYOCERA Document Solutions Canada, Ltd.

6120 Kestrel Rd., Mississauga, ON L5T 1S8,

Canada

KYOCERA Document Solutions America, Inc.

225 Sand Road, P.O. Box 40008

Fairfield, New Jersey 07004-0008, USA

1-9

Legal and Safety Information > Notice

Legal Restriction on Copying/Scanning

It may be prohibited to copy/scan copyrighted material without permission of the copyright owner.

Copying/Scanning the following items is prohibited and may be penalized by low. It may not be limited to these items. Do

not knowingly copy/scan the items that are not to be copied/scanned.

• Paper money

• Bank note

• Securities

•Stamp

• Passport

• Certificate

Local laws and regulations may prohibit or restrict copying/scanning of other items not mentioned above.

EN ISO 7779

Maschinenlärminformations-Verordnung 3. GPSGV, 06.01.2004: Der höchste Schalldruckpegel beträgt 70 dB (A) oder

weniger gemäß EN ISO 7779.

EK1-ITB 2000

Das Gerät ist nicht für die Benutzung im unmittelbaren Gesichtsfeld am Bildschirmarbeitsplatz vorgesehen. Um

störende Reflexionen am Bildschirmarbeitsplatz zu vermeiden, darf dieses Produkt nicht im unmittelbaren Gesichtsfeld

platziert werden.

Wireless Connection (Mexico only)

The operation of this equipment is subject to the following two conditions:

(1) it is possible that this equipment or device may not cause harmful interference, and (2) this equipment or device must

accept any interference, including interference that may cause undesired operation.

La operación de este equipo está sujeta a las siguientes dos condiciones:

(1) es posible que este equipo o dispositivo no cause interferencia perjudicial y (2) este equipo o dispositivo debe

aceptar cualquier interferencia, incluyendo la que pueda causar su operación no deseada.

Security Precautions when Using Wireless LAN

(If equipped)

Wireless LAN allows information to be exchanged between wireless access points instead of using a network cable,

which offers the advantage that a LAN connection can be established freely within an area in which radio waves can be

transmitted.

On the other hand, the following problems may occur if security settings are not configured, because radio waves can

pass through obstacles (including walls) and reach everywhere within a certain area.

Secretly Viewing Communication Contents

A third person with malicious objectives may intentionally monitor radio waves and gain unauthorized access to the

following communication contents.

• Personal information including ID, passwords, and credit card numbers

• Contents of email messages

1-10

Legal and Safety Information > Notice

Illegal Intrusion

A third party with malicious intent may gain unauthorized access to personal or company networks and conduct the

following illegal actions.

• Extracting personal and confidential information (information leak)

• Entering into communication while impersonating a specific person and distributing unauthorized information (spoofing)

• Modifying and retransmitting intercepted communications (falsification)

• Transmitting computer viruses and destroying data and systems (destruction)

Wireless LAN cards and wireless access points contain built-in security mechanisms to address these problems and to

reduce the possibility of these problems occurring by configuring the security settings of wireless LAN products when

the product is used.

We recommend that customers take responsibility and use their judgment when configuring the security settings and

that they ensure that they fully understand the problems that can occur when the product is used without configuring the

security settings.

Limited Use of This Product (If equipped)

• Radio waves transmitted from this product may affect medical equipment. When using this product in a medical

institution or in the vicinity of medical instruments, either use this product according to the instructions and

precautions provided by the administrator of the institution or those provided on the medical instruments.

• Radio waves transmitted from this product may affect automatic control equipment including automatic doors and fire

alarms. When using this product in the vicinity of the automatic control equipment, use this product according to the

instructions and precautions provided on the automatic control equipment.

• If this product is used in devices that are directly related to service including airplanes, trains, ships, and automobiles

or this product is used in applications requiring high reliability and safety to function and in devices requiring accuracy

including those used in disaster prevention and crime prevention and those used for various safety purposes, please

use this product after considering the safety design of the entire system including adoption of a failsafe design and

redundancy design for reliability and safety maintenance of the entire system. This product is not intended for use in

applications requiring high reliability and safety including aerospace instruments, trunk communication equipment,

nuclear power control equipment, and medical equipment; hence, the decision as to whether to use this product in

these applications needs to be fully considered and determined.

Sólo México (Mexico only)

Este equipo utiliza el módulo de interfaz de red inalámbrica modelo LBWA1ZZ1CA para conectarse a las redes

Inalámbricas.

1-11

Legal and Safety Information > Notice

Legal Information

Copying or other reproduction of all or part of this guide without the prior written consent of KYOCERA Document

Solutions Inc. is prohibited.

Regarding Trade Names

• PRESCRIBE and ECOSYS are registered trademark of Kyocera Corporation.

• KPDL is a trademark of Kyocera Corporation.

• Microsoft, Windows, Windows Server and Internet Explorer are registered trademarks or trademarks of

Microsoft Corporation in the U.S.A. and/or other countries.

• PCL is a trademark of Hewlett-Packard Company.

• Adobe Acrobat, Adobe Reader and PostScript are trademarks of Adobe Systems, Incorporated.

• Ethernet is a registered trademark of Xerox Corporation.

• IBM and IBM PC/AT are trademarks of International Business Machines Corporation.

• AppleTalk, Bonjour, Macintosh, and Mac OS are trademarks of Apple Inc., registered in the U.S. and other countries.

• All European language fonts installed in this machine are used under licensing agreement with Monotype Imaging

Inc.

• Helvetica, Palatino and Times are registered trademarks of Linotype GmbH.

• ITC Avant Garde Gothic, ITC Bookman, ITC ZapfChancery and ITC ZapfDingbats are registered trademarks of

International Typeface Corporation.

• ThinPrint is a trademark of Cortado AG in Germany and other countries.

• UFST™ MicroType® fonts by Monotype Imaging Inc. are installed in this machine.

• This machine contains the software having modules developed by Independent JPEG Group.

• iPad, iPhone and iPod touch are trademarks of Apple Inc., registered in the U.S. and other countries.

• AirPrint and the AirPrint logo are trademarks of Apple Inc.

• iOS is a trademark or registered trademark of Cisco in the U.S. and other countries and is used under license by

Apple Inc.

• Google and Google Cloud Print™ are trademarks and/or registered trademarks of Google Inc.

• Mopria™ is registered trademarks of Mopria™ Alliance.

• Wi-Fi and Wi-Fi Direct are trademarks and/or registered trademarks of Wi-Fi Alliance.

• Powered by ABBYY FineReader

ABBYY and FineReader are trademarks of ABBYY Software Ltd.

All other brands and product names are registered trademarks or trademarks of their respective companies. The

designations ™ and ® will not be used in this Operation Guide.

1-12

Legal and Safety Information > Notice

GPL/LGPL

This product contains GPL (http://www.gnu.org/licenses/gpl.html) and/or LGPL (http://www.gnu.org/licenses/lgpl.html)

software as part of its firmware. You can get the source code, and you are permitted to copy, redistribute and modify it

under the terms of GPL/LGPL. For further information including availability of the source code, visit

http://www.kyoceradocumentsolutions.com/gpl/.

OpenSSL License

Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, with or without modification, are permitted provided that the following

conditions are met:

1. Redistributions of source code must retain the above copyright notice, this list of conditions and the following

disclaimer.

2. Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright notice, this list of conditions and the following

disclaimer in the documentation and/or other materials provided with the distribution.

3. All advertising materials mentioning features or use of this software must display the following acknowledgment:

"This product includes software developed by the OpenSSL Project for use in the OpenSSL Toolkit.

(http://www.openssl.org/)"

4. The names "OpenSSL Toolkit" and "OpenSSL Project" must not be used to endorse or promote products derived

from this software without prior written permission.

For written permission, please contact openssl-core@openssl.org.

5. Products derived from this software may not be called "OpenSSL" nor may "OpenSSL" appear in their names without

prior written permission of the OpenSSL Project.

6. Redistributions of any form whatsoever must retain the following acknowledgment: "This product includes software

developed by the OpenSSL Project for use in the OpenSSL Toolkit (http://www.openssl.org/)"

THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE OpenSSL PROJECT "AS IS" AND ANY EXPRESSED OR IMPLIED

WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND

FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE OpenSSL PROJECT OR

ITS CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY, OR

CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES (INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR

SERVICES; LOSS OF USE, DATA, OR PROFITS; OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION) HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON

ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY, WHETHER IN CONTRACT, STRICT LIABILITY, OR TORT (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE

OR OTHERWISE) ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE, EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE

POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE.

Original SSLeay License

This package is an SSL implementation written by Eric Young (eay@cryptsoft.com). The implementation was written so

as to conform with Netscapes SSL.

This library is free for commercial and non-commercial use as long as the following conditions are adhered to. The

following conditions apply to all code found in this distribution, be it the RC4, RSA, lhash, DES, etc., code; not just the

SSL code. The SSL documentation included with this distribution is covered by the same copyright terms except that the

holder is Tim Hudson (tjh@cryptsoft.com).

If this package is used in a product, Eric Young should be given attribution as the author of the parts of the library used.

This can be in the form of a textual message at program startup or in documentation (online or textual) provided with the

package.

Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, with or without modification, are permitted provided that the following

conditions are met:

1-13

Legal and Safety Information > Notice

1. Redistributions of source code must retain the copyright notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer.

2. Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright notice, this list of conditions and the following

disclaimer in the documentation and/or other materials provided with the distribution.

3. All advertising materials mentioning features or use of this software must display the following acknowledgement:

"This product includes cryptographic software written by Eric Young (eay@cryptsoft.com)"

The word 'cryptographic' can be left out if the routines from the library being used are not cryptographic related :-).

4. If you include any Windows specific code (or a derivative thereof) from the apps directory (application code) you must

include an acknowledgement: "This product includes software written by Tim Hudson (tjh@cryptsoft.com)"

THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY ERIC YOUNG "AS IS" AND ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES,

INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A

PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE AUTHOR OR CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE

FOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY, OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES

(INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR SERVICES; LOSS OF USE,

DATA, OR PROFITS; OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION) HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY,

WHETHER IN CONTRACT, STRICT LIABILITY, OR TORT (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE) ARISING IN

ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE, EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE.

The licence and distribution terms for any publically available version or derivative of this code cannot be changed. i.e.

this code cannot simply be copied and put under another distribution licence [including the GNU Public Licence.]

Monotype Imaging License Agreement

1Software shall mean the digitally encoded, machine readable, scalable outline data as encoded in a special format as

well as the UFST Software.

2 You agree to accept a non-exclusive license to use the Software to reproduce and display weights, styles and

versions of letters, numerals, characters and symbols (Typefaces) solely for your own customary business or

personal purposes at the address stated on the registration card you return to Monotype Imaging. Under the terms of

this License Agreement, you have the right to use the Fonts on up to three printers. If you need to have access to the

fonts on more than three printers, you need to acquire a multiuser license agreement which can be obtained from

Monotype Imaging. Monotype Imaging retains all rights, title and interest to the Software and Typefaces and no rights

are granted to you other than a License to use the Software on the terms expressly set forth in this Agreement.

3 To protect proprietary rights of Monotype Imaging, you agree to maintain the Software and other proprietary

information concerning the Typefaces in strict confidence and to establish reasonable procedures regulating access

to and use of the Software and Typefaces.

4 You agree not to duplicate or copy the Software or Typefaces, except that you may make one backup copy. You

agree that any such copy shall contain the same proprietary notices as those appearing on the original.

5 This License shall continue until the last use of the Software and Typefaces, unless sooner terminated. This License

may be terminated by Monotype Imaging if you fail to comply with the terms of this License and such failure is not

remedied within thirty (30) days after notice from Monotype Imaging. When this License expires or is terminated, you

shall either return to Monotype Imaging or destroy all copies of the Software and Typefaces and documentation as

requested.

6 You agree that you will not modify, alter, disassemble, decrypt, reverse engineer or decompile the Software.

7 Monotype Imaging warrants that for ninety (90) days after delivery, the Software will perform in accordance with

Monotype Imaging-published specifications, and the diskette will be free from defects in material and workmanship.

Monotype Imaging does not warrant that the Software is free from all bugs, errors and omissions.

The parties agree that all other warranties, expressed or implied, including warranties of fitness for a particular

purpose and merchantability, are excluded.

8 Your exclusive remedy and the sole liability of Monotype Imaging in connection with the Software and Typefaces is

repair or replacement of defective parts, upon their return to Monotype Imaging.

In no event will Monotype Imaging be liable for lost profits, lost data, or any other incidental or consequential

damages, or any damages caused by abuse or misapplication of the Software and Typefaces.

9Massachusetts U.S.A. law governs this Agreement.

1-14

Legal and Safety Information > Notice

10 You shall not sublicense, sell, lease, or otherwise transfer the Software and/or Typefaces without the prior written

consent of Monotype Imaging.

11 Use, duplication or disclosure by the Government is subject to restrictions as set forth in the Rights in Technical Data

and Computer Software clause at FAR 252-227-7013, subdivision (b)(3)(ii) or subparagraph (c)(1)(ii), as appropriate.

Further use, duplication or disclosure is subject to restrictions applicable to restricted rights software as set forth in

FAR 52.227-19 (c)(2).

12 You acknowledge that you have read this Agreement, understand it, and agree to be bound by its terms and

conditions. Neither party shall be bound by any statement or representation not contained in this Agreement. No

change in this Agreement is effective unless written and signed by properly authorized representatives of each party.

By opening this diskette package, you agree to accept the terms and conditions of this Agreement.

Knopflerfish License

This product includes software developed by the Knopflerfish Project.

http://www.knopflerfish.org

Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, with or without modification, are permitted provided that the following

conditions are met:

- Redistributions of source code must retain the above copyright notice, this list of conditions and the following

disclaimer.

- Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright notice, this list of conditions and the following

disclaimer in the documentation and/or other materials provided with the distribution.

- Neither the name of the KNOPFLERFISH project nor the names of its contributors may be used to endorse or

promote products derived from this software without specific prior written permission.

THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE COPYRIGHT HOLDERS AND CONTRIBUTORS "AS IS" AND ANY

EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF

MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE

EXEMPLARY, OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES (INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, PROCUREMENT OF

SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR SERVICES; LOSS OF USE, DATA, OR PROFITS; OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION)

HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY, WHETHER IN CONTRACT, STRICT LIABILITY, OR

TORT (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE) ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE OF THIS

SOFTWARE, EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE.

Apache License (Version 2.0)

Apache License

Version 2.0, January 2004

http://www.apache.org/licenses/

TERMS AND CONDITIONS FOR USE, REPRODUCTION, AND DISTRIBUTION

1. Definitions.

"License" shall mean the terms and conditions for use, reproduction, and distribution as defined by Sections 1

through 9 of this document.

"Licensor" shall mean the copyright owner or entity authorized by the copyright owner that is granting the License.

"Legal Entity" shall mean the union of the acting entity and all other entities that control, are controlled by, or are

under common control with that entity. For the purposes of this definition, "control" means (i) the power, direct or

indirect, to cause the direction or management of such entity, whether by contract or otherwise, or (ii) ownership of

fifty percent (50%) or more of the outstanding shares, or (iii) beneficial ownership of such entity.

"You" (or "Your") shall mean an individual or Legal Entity exercising permissions granted by this License.

"Source" form shall mean the preferred form for making modifications, including but not limited to software source

code, documentation source, and configuration files.

1-15

Legal and Safety Information > Notice

"Object" form shall mean any form resulting from mechanical transformation or translation of a Source form, including

but not limited to compiled object code, generated documentation, and conversions to other media types.

"Work" shall mean the work of authorship, whether in Source or Object form, made available under the License, as

indicated by a copyright notice that is included in or attached to the work (an example is provided in the Appendix

below).

"Derivative Works" shall mean any work, whether in Source or Object form, that is based on (or derived from) the

Work and for which the editorial revisions, annotations, elaborations, or other modifications represent, as a whole, an

original work of authorship. For the purposes of this License, Derivative Works shall not include works that remain

separable from, or merely link (or bind by name) to the interfaces of, the Work and Derivative Works thereof.

"Contribution" shall mean any work of authorship, including the original version of the Work and any modifications or

additions to that Work or Derivative Works thereof, that is intentionally submitted to Licensor for inclusion in the Work

by the copyright owner or by an individual or Legal Entity authorized to submit on behalf of the copyright owner. For

the purposes of this definition, "submitted" means any form of electronic, verbal, or written communication sent to the

Licensor or its representatives, including but not limited to communication on electronic mailing lists, source code

control systems, and issue tracking systems that are managed by, or on behalf of, the Licensor for the purpose of

discussing and improving the Work, but excluding communication that is conspicuously marked or otherwise

designated in writing by the copyright owner as "Not a Contribution."

"Contributor" shall mean Licensor and any individual or Legal Entity on behalf of whom a Contribution has been

received by Licensor and subsequently incorporated within the Work.

2. Grant of Copyright License. Subject to the terms and conditions of this License, each Contributor hereby grants to

You a perpetual, worldwide, non-exclusive, no-charge, royalty-free, irrevocable copyright license to reproduce,

prepare Derivative Works of, publicly display, publicly perform, sublicense, and distribute the Work and such

Derivative Works in Source or Object form.

3. Grant of Patent License. Subject to the terms and conditions of this License, each Contributor hereby grants to You a

perpetual, worldwide, non-exclusive, no-charge, royalty-free, irrevocable (except as stated in this section) patent

license to make, have made, use, offer to sell, sell, import, and otherwise transfer the Work, where such license

applies only to those patent claims licensable by such Contributor that are necessarily infringed by their

Contribution(s) alone or by combination of their Contribution(s) with the Work to which such Contribution(s) was

submitted. If You institute patent litigation against any entity (including a cross-claim or counterclaim in a lawsuit)

alleging that the Work or a Contribution incorporated within the Work constitutes direct or contributory patent

infringement, then any patent licenses granted to You under this License for that Work shall terminate as of the date

such litigation is filed.

4. Redistribution. You may reproduce and distribute copies of the Work or Derivative Works thereof in any medium, with

or without modifications, and in Source or Object form, provided that You meet the following conditions:

(a)You must give any other recipients of the Work or Derivative Works a copy of this License; and

(b)You must cause any modified files to carry prominent notices stating that You changed the files; and

(c)You must retain, in the Source form of any Derivative Works that You distribute, all copyright, patent, trademark,

and attribution notices from the Source form of the Work, excluding those notices that do not pertain to any part of

the Derivative Works; and

(d)If the Work includes a "NOTICE" text file as part of its distribution, then any Derivative Works that You distribute

must include a readable copy of the attribution notices contained within such NOTICE file, excluding those notices

that do not pertain to any part of the Derivative Works, in at least one of the following places: within a NOTICE text

file distributed as part of the Derivative Works; within the Source form or documentation, if provided along with the

Derivative Works; or, within a display generated by the Derivative Works, if and wherever such third-party notices

normally appear. The contents of the NOTICE file are for informational purposes only and do not modify the

License. You may add Your own attribution notices within Derivative Works that You distribute, alongside or as an

addendum to the NOTICE text from the Work, provided that such additional attribution notices cannot be

construed as modifying the License.

You may add Your own copyright statement to Your modifications and may provide additional or different license

terms and conditions for use, reproduction, or distribution of Your modifications, or for any such Derivative Works as

a whole, provided Your use, reproduction, and distribution of the Work otherwise complies with the conditions stated

in this License.

1-16

Legal and Safety Information > Notice

5. Submission of Contributions. Unless You explicitly state otherwise, any Contribution intentionally submitted for

inclusion in the Work by You to the Licensor shall be under the terms and conditions of this License, without any

additional terms or conditions. Notwithstanding the above, nothing herein shall supersede or modify the terms of any

separate license agreement you may have executed with Licensor regarding such Contributions.

6. Trademarks. This License does not grant permission to use the trade names, trademarks, service marks, or product

names of the Licensor, except as required for reasonable and customary use in describing the origin of the Work and

reproducing the content of the NOTICE file.

7. Disclaimer of Warranty. Unless required by applicable law or agreed to in writing, Licensor provides the Work (and

each Contributor provides its Contributions) on an "AS IS" BASIS, WITHOUT WARRANTIES OR CONDITIONS OF

ANY KIND, either express or implied, including, without limitation, any warranties or conditions of TITLE, NON-

INFRINGEMENT, MERCHANTABILITY, or FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. You are solely responsible

for determining the appropriateness of using or redistributing the Work and assume any risks associated with Your

exercise of permissions under this License.

8. Limitation of Liability. In no event and under no legal theory, whether in tort (including negligence), contract, or

otherwise, unless required by applicable law (such as deliberate and grossly negligent acts) or agreed to in writing,

shall any Contributor be liable to You for damages, including any direct, indirect, special, incidental, or consequential

damages of any character arising as a result of this License or out of the use or inability to use the Work (including

but not limited to damages for loss of goodwill, work stoppage, computer failure or malfunction, or any and all other

commercial damages or losses), even if such Contributor has been advised of the possibility of such damages.

9. Accepting Warranty or Additional Liability. While redistributing the Work or Derivative Works thereof, You may choose

to offer, and charge a fee for, acceptance of support, warranty, indemnity, or other liability obligations and/or rights

consistent with this License. However, in accepting such obligations, You may act only on Your own behalf and on

Your sole responsibility, not on behalf of any other Contributor, and only if You agree to indemnify, defend, and hold

each Contributor harmless for any liability incurred by, or claims asserted against, such Contributor by reason of your

accepting any such warranty or additional liability.

END OF TERMS AND CONDITIONS

APPENDIX: How to apply the Apache License to your work.

To apply the Apache License to your work, attach the following boilerplate notice, with the fields enclosed by brackets

"[]" replaced with your own identifying information. (Don't include the brackets!) The text should be enclosed in the

appropriate comment syntax for the file format. We also recommend that a file or class name and description of

purpose be included on the same "printed page" as the copyright notice for easier identification within third-party

archives.

Licensed under the Apache License, Version 2.0 (the "License"); you may not use this file except in compliance with the

License. You may obtain a copy of the License at

http://www.apache.org/licenses/LICENSE-2.0

Unless required by applicable law or agreed to in writing, software distributed under the License is distributed on an "AS

IS" BASIS, WITHOUT WARRANTIES OR CONDITIONS OF ANY KIND, either express or implied. See the License for

the specific language governing permissions and limitations under the License.

1-17

Legal and Safety Information > Notice

Energy Saving Control Function

The device comes equipped with a Sleep where printer and fax functions remain in a waiting state but power

consumption is reduced to a minimum after a certain amount of time elapses since the device was last used.

Sleep

The device automatically enters Sleep when 1 minute has passed since the device was last used. The amount of time of

no activity that must pass before Sleep is activated may be lengthened.

Sleep and Auto Sleep (page 2-25)

Automatic 2-Sided Print Function

This device includes 2-sided printing as a standard function. For example, by printing two 1-sided originals onto a single

sheet of paper as a 2-sided print, it is possible to lower the amount of paper used.

Duplex (page 6-20)

Printing in duplex mode reduces paper consumption and contributes to the conservation of forest resources. Duplex

mode also reduces the amount of paper that must be purchased, and thereby reduces cost. It is recommended that

machines capable of duplex printing be set to use duplex mode by default.

Resource Saving - Paper

For the preservation and sustainable use of forest resources, it is recommended that recycled as well as virgin paper

certified under environmental stewardship initiatives or carrying recognised ecolabels, which meet EN 12281:2002* or

an equivalent quality standard, be used.

This machine also supports printing on 64 g/m2 paper. Using such paper containing less raw materials can lead to

further saving of forest resources.

* : EN12281:2002 "Printing and business paper - Requirements for copy paper for dry toner imaging processes"

Your sales or service representative can provide information about recommended paper types.

Environmental benefits of "Power Management"

To reduce power consumption when idle, this machine is equipped with a power management function that

automatically activates energy-saving mode when the machine is idle for a certain period of time.

Although it takes the machine a slight amount of time to return to READY mode when in energy-saving mode, a

significant reduction in energy consumption is possible. It is recommended that the machine be used with the activation

time for energy-saving mode set to the default setting.

1-18

Legal and Safety Information > Notice

Energy Star (ENERGY STAR®) Program

We have determined as a participating company in the International Energy Star Program that this

product is compliant with the standards laid out in the International Energy Star Program.

ENERGY STAR® is a voluntary energy efficiency program with the goal of developing and promoting the

use of products with high energy efficiency in order to help prevent global warming. By purchasing

ENERGY STAR® qualified products, customers can help reduce emissions of greenhouse gases during

product use and cut energy-related costs.

2-1

2 Installing and Setting

up the Machine

This chapter provides information for the administrator of this machine, such as part names, cable connection, and

software installation.

Part Names ................................................... 2-2

Machine Exterior ................................. 2-2

Connectors/Interior ............................. 2-4

With Optional Equipments Attached ... 2-6

Connecting the Machine and Other

Devices ......................................................... 2-7

Connecting Cables ........................................ 2-8

Connecting LAN Cable ....................... 2-8

Connecting USB Cable ....................... 2-9

Connecting the Power Cable .............. 2-9

Power On/Off .............................................. 2-10

Power On .......................................... 2-10

Power Off .......................................... 2-10

Using the Operation Panel ........................... 2-11

Operation Panel Keys ........................ 2-11

Operation Method ............................. 2-12

Display for Originals and Paper ........ 2-13

Help Screen ...................................... 2-13

Logout ............................................... 2-15

Default Settings of the Machine .................. 2-16

Setting Date and Time ...................... 2-16

Network Setup ............................................ 2-17

Configuring the Wired Network ......... 2-17

Configuring the Wireless Network .... 2-19

Setting Wi-Fi Direct ........................... 2-23

Energy Saver function ................................. 2-25

Low Power Mode .............................. 2-25

Sleep and Auto Sleep ....................... 2-25

Installing Software ....................................... 2-28

Software on DVD (Windows) ............ 2-28

Installing Software in Windows ......... 2-29

Uninstalling the Software .................. 2-35

Installing Software

in Mac Computer .............................. 2-36

Setting TWAIN Driver ........................ 2-38

Setting WIA Driver ............................ 2-40

Checking the Counter ................................. 2-41

Additional Preparations for

the Administrator ......................................... 2-42

Sending Documents to a PC ............. 2-42

Strengthening the Security ................ 2-42

Command Center RX .................................. 2-44

Accessing Command Center RX ...... 2-45

Changing Security Settings .............. 2-46

Changing Device Information ........... 2-48

E-mail Settings .................................. 2-50

Registering Destinations ................... 2-54

Creating a New Custom Box ............ 2-55

Printing a document stored in a Custom

Box .................................................... 2-56

Transferring Data from Our Other

Products ...................................................... 2-58

Migrating the Address Book .............. 2-58

2-2

Installing and Setting up the Machine > Part Names

Part Names

Machine Exterior

1 Document Processor

2 Original Width Guides

3 Original Table

4 Original Eject Table

5 Inner Tray

6 Paper Stopper

7 Front Cover

8 Cassette 1

9 Power Switch

10 Original Stopper

11 USB Memory Slot

12 Front Cover Open Button

13 Slit Glass

14 Original Size Indicator Plates

15 Platen

16 Operation Panel

17 Handles

1 2 3 4

13 14

712

2-3

Installing and Setting up the Machine > Part Names

18 Anti-theft Lock Slot

19 Rear Cover

2-4

Installing and Setting up the Machine > Part Names

Connectors/Interior

1 USB Interface Connector

2 Network Interface Connector

3 Option Interface Slot

4 TEL Connector

5 LINE Connector

6 Fuser Cover

7 Paper Width Guides

8 Tray Extension

9 Multi Purpose Tray

10 Paper Length Guide

11 Paper Width Guides

12 Bottom Plate

13 Size Dial

14 Duplex Cover

13 14

2-5

Installing and Setting up the Machine > Part Names

15 Toner Container

16 Toner Container Lock Lever

17 Registration Roller

18 Left Cover

19 Waste Toner Box

2-6

Installing and Setting up the Machine > Part Names

With Optional Equipments Attached

1 Cassette 2

2 Cassette 3

3 Cassette 4

4 Cassette 5

Optional Equipment (page 11-2)

2-7

Installing and Setting up the Machine > Connecting the Machine and Other Devices

Connecting the Machine and Other Devices

Prepare the cables necessary to suit the environment and purpose of the machine use.

When Connecting the Machine to the PC via USB

When Connecting the Machine to the PC or Tablet by network cable, Wi-Fi, or Wi-Fi direct

Cables that Can Be Used

NOTE

If you are using wireless LAN, refer to the following.

Configuring the Wireless Network (page 2-19)

Connection Environment Function Necessary Cable

Connect a LAN cable to the

machine.

Printer/Scanner/Network FAX LAN cable (10BASE-T, 100BASE-TX,

1000BASE-T)

Connect a USB cable to the

machine.

Printer/Scanner (TWAIN/WIA) USB 2.0 compatible cable (Hi-Speed USB

compliant, max. 5.0 m , shielded)

IMPORTANT

Using a cable other than a USB 2.0 compatible cable may cause failure.

USB

Tablet

Network cable

connection

Network

Wi-Fi access point

Wi-Fi

connection*1

Wi-Fi Direct

connection*1

*1 Only for models with the optional Wireless Network Interface Kit (IB-36).

2-8

Installing and Setting up the Machine > Connecting Cables

Connecting Cables

Connecting LAN Cable

1Connect the cable to the machine.

1Connect the LAN cable to the network interface connector.

2Connect the other end of the cable to the hub.

2Power on the machine and configure the network.

IMPORTANT

If the power is on, turn the power switch off.

Power Off (page 2-10)

Network Setup (page 2-17)

2-9

Installing and Setting up the Machine > Connecting Cables

Connecting USB Cable

1Connect the cable to the machine.

1Connect the USB cable to the USB interface connector located on the left side of the body.

2Connect the other end of the cable to the PC.

2Power on the machine.

Connecting the Power Cable

1Connect the cable to the machine.

Connect one end of the supplied power cable to the machine and the other end to a power

outlet.

IMPORTANT

If the power is on, turn the power switch off.

Power Off (page 2-10)

IMPORTANT

Only use the power cable that comes with the machine.

2-10

Installing and Setting up the Machine > Power On/Off

Power On/Off

Power On

1Turn the power switch on.

Power Off

1Turn the power switch off.

The confirmation message for power supply off is displayed.

It takes approximately 3 minutes for power off.

IMPORTANT

When turning off the power switch, do not turn on the power switch again

immediately. Wait more than 5 seconds, and then turn on the power switch.

Show PowerOffMsg (page 8-36)

CAUTION

If this machine will be left unused for an extended period (e.g. overnight), turn it off at the main power switch.

If the machine will not be used for an even longer period of time (e.g. vacation), remove the power plug from

the outlet as a safety precaution.

IMPORTANT

• If using the products equipped with the fax function, note that turning the machine off at the main power

switch disables fax transmission and reception.

• Remove paper from the cassettes and seal it in the paper storage bag to protect it from humidity.

2-11

Installing and Setting up the Machine > Using the Operation Panel

Using the Operation Panel

Operation Panel Keys

Processing: Blinks while printing or sending/

receiving.

Memory: Blinks while the machine is accessing

the machine memory, fax memory or USB

memory (general purpose item).

Attention: Lights or blinks when an error occurs

and a job is stopped.

Message display:

Displays the setting menu, machine

status, and error messages.

Select Key: Selects

the menu displayed

at the bottom of the

message display.

Displays the Status/Job

Cancel screen.

Displays the Document

Box/USB screen.

Displays the System

Menu/Counter screen.

Displays the Copy screen.

Displays the screen for

sending. You can change it

to display the Address

Book screen.

Displays the FAX screen.

(Only on products with the

fax function installed.)

Numeric keys.

Enter numbers and

symbols.

Clears entered numbers

and characters.

Returns settings to their

default states.

Cancels or pauses the job

in progress.

Starts copying and

scanning operations and

processing for setting

operations.

Used to register or

recall programs.

Puts the machine into Sleep

Mode. Recovers from Sleep if

in Sleep Mode.

Authenticates user switching,

and exits the operation for the

current user (i.e. log out).

Displays the Address Book

screen.

Calls the previous

destination. Also used to

enter a pause when

entering a FAX number.

Confirms the destination or

adds a destination.

Switches between on-hook

and off-hook when

manually sending a FAX.

Recalls the destination

registered for One Touch

Keys.

Displays the function menu screen.

Increments or decrements

numbers, or selects menu

in the message display. In

addition, moves the cursor

when entering the

characters.

Finalizes a function or

menu, and numbers that

have been entered.

Returns to the previous

display.

2-12

Installing and Setting up the Machine > Using the Operation Panel

Operation Method

This section explains how to operate the setting menus on the message display.

Displaying the Menus and Configuring Settings

Select the [System Menu/Counter] key or [Function Menu] key to display the setting menus. Select the [▲] key, [▼]

key, [◄] key, [►] key, [OK] key, or [Back] key to select a menu, and perform settings.

Sys. Menu/Count.:

User/Job Account

Exit

User Property

Common Settings

Language:

English

Deutsch

Francais

Language:

English

Deutsch

Francais

Common Settings:

Language

Exit

Default Screen

Sound

Sys. Menu/Count.:

System/Network

Exit

Counter

01 Report

Select the [System Menu/Counter] key or

[Function Menu] key to display the setting

menus.

The directions of usable arrow

keys are shown on the screen

displayed.

When the [▲] or [▼] key is

selected, the selection moves

line by line.

When the [◄] or [►] key is

selected, the selection moves in

units of one page.

When [OK] is displayed, select

the [OK] key to confirm the

selection.

Select the [OK] key to display

the selected menu.

The selected item is displayed with

[*] (asterisk) at the beginning.

Select the [OK] key to confirm

the selected setting.

When the [▲] or [▼] key is

selected, the selection moves

line by line.

Select the [Back] key to return to

the screen one level higher.

Setting menus

Normal screen

Exiting the menu operation

When [Exit] is displayed, select [Exit] to exit

the setting menu and return to the normal

screen.

Sys. Menu/Count.:

System/Network

Exit

Counter

01 Report

Ready to copy.

A4 A4

Quiet Paper

Copies:

Off

2-13

Installing and Setting up the Machine > Using the Operation Panel

Display for Originals and Paper

The copy screen displays the selected paper source.

Help Screen

If you have difficulty operating the machine, you can check how to operate it using the operation panel.

When [Help] is displayed on the message display, select [Help] to display the Help screen. The Help screen shows

machine operation.

Select the [▼] key to display the next step or select the [▲] key to display the previous step.

Select the [OK] key to exit the Help screen.

Ready to copy.

A4 A4

Quiet Paper

Copies:

Off

1Original size

2 Original orientation

3 Paper source

4 Paper size

5 Paper orientation

Paper

jammed in

cassette 1.

Help

JAM****

CorrectiveAction:

Open cassette 1 and

remove paper.

Set cassette 1.

2-14

Installing and Setting up the Machine > Login/Logout

If you are setting a function that requires administrator rights, or if user login administration is enabled, you must enter

your login user name and login password.

1Enter the login user name.

1If the login screen is displayed during operations, select "Login User Name" and select the

[OK] key.

2Enter the login user name using the numeric keys and select the [OK] key.

2Enter the login password.

1Select "Login Password" and select the [OK] key.

2Enter the login password and select the [OK] key.

3Select [Login].

NOTE

The factory default login user name and login password are set as shown below.

You will be unable to login if you forget your login user name or login password. In this event, login with administrator

privileges and change your login user name or login password.

NOTE

• If [Netwk Authentic.] is selected as the user authentication method, [Menu] is

displayed. Select [Menu] and select [Login Type] and then it is possible to select the

authentication destination as [Local Authentic.] or [Netwk Authentic.].

•Select [Menu] and select [Domain] and then it is possible to select from the domains

registered.

NOTE

If Login Operation is [Select Character], then the screen is displayed to enter details by

selecting from the characters on the message display.

Character Entry Method (page 11-9)

2-15

Installing and Setting up the Machine > Login/Logout

Logout

To logout from the machine, select the [Authentication/Logout] key to return to the login user

name/login password entry screen.

Users are automatically logged out in the following circumstances:

• When the machine enters the sleep state.

• When the auto panel reset function is activated.

2-16

Installing and Setting up the Machine > Default Settings of the Machine

Default Settings of the Machine

Before using this machine, configure such settings as date and time, network configuration, and energy saving functions

as needed.

Setting Date and Time

Follow the steps below to set the local date and time at the place of installation.

When you send an E-mail using the transmission function, the date and time as set here will be printed in the header of

the E-mail message. Set the date, time and time difference from GMT of the region where the machine is used.

1Display the screen.

[System Menu/Counter] key > [▲] [▼] key > [Common Settings] > [OK] key > [▲] [▼] key >

[Date Setting] > [OK] key

2Configure the settings.

[▲] [▼] key > [Time Zone] > [OK] key > Select the time zone > [OK] key > [▲] [▼] key >

[Date/Time] > [OK] key > Set the date/time > [OK] key > [▲] [▼] key > [Date Format] >

[OK] key > Select the Date Format > [OK] key

NOTE

The default settings of the machine can be changed in System Menu.

For settings that are configurable from System Menu, refer to the following:

Setup and Registration (System Menu) (page 8-1)

NOTE

• If user login administration is enabled, you can only change the settings by logging in with administrator privileges.

If user login administration is disabled, the user authentication screen appears. Enter a login user name and

password, and select [Login].

• The factory default login user name and login password are set as shown below.

• Be sure to set the time difference before setting the date and time.

• The correct time can be periodically set by obtaining the time from the network time server.

Command Center RX User Guide

Item Description

Time Zone Set the time difference from GMT. Choose the nearest listed location from

the list. If you select a region that utilizes summer time, configure settings

for summer time.

Date/Time Set the date and time for the location where you use the machine. If you

perform Send as E-mail, the date and time set here will be displayed on

the header.

Value: Year (2000 to 2037), Month (01 to 12), Day (01 to 31),

Hour (00 to 23), Min. (00 to 59), Second (00 to 59)

Date Format Select the display format of year, month, and date. The year is displayed

in Western notation.

Value: Month/Day/Year, Day/Month/Year, Year/Month/Day

NOTE

Select the [▲] or [▼] key to enter a number.

Select the [◄] or [►] key to move the position being entered, which is shown highlighted.

2-17

Installing and Setting up the Machine > Network Setup

Network Setup

Configuring the Wired Network

The machine is equipped with network interface, which is compatible with network protocols such as TCP/IP (IPv4),

TCP/IP (IPv6), NetBEUI, and IPSec. It enables network printing on the Windows, Macintosh, UNIX and other platforms.

Set up TCP/IP (IPv4) to connect to the Windows network.

The configuration methods are as follows

Be sure to connect the network cable before configuring the settings.

Connecting LAN Cable (page 2-8)

For other network settings, refer to the following:

Network Setting (page 8-7)

IPv4 setting

1Display the screen.

[System Menu/Counter] key > [▲] [] key > [System/Network] > [OK] key > [▲] [] key >

[Network Setting] > [OK] key > [▲] [] key > [Wired Netwk. Set] > [OK] key > [▲] [] key >

[TCP/IP Settings] > [OK] key > [▲] [] key > [IPv4 Setting] > [OK] key

2Configure the settings.

When setting the static IP address

1[▲] [] key > [DHCP] > [OK] key > [▲] [] key > [Off] > [OK] key

2[▲] [] key > [IP Address] > [OK] key

Configuration Method Description Reference Page

Configuring Connections on

the Web Page

For the equipped network interface, the connection can be set by

using Command Center RX. For the optional IB-50, the connection

can be set by using the dedicated Web page.

Command Center RX

User Guide

IB-50 Operation Guide

Setting the Connection by

Using the Setup Utility of

IB-50

This is the setup tool included in the CD of IB-50. You can use it on

Windows.

IB-50 Operation Guide

NOTE

If user login administration is enabled, you can only change the settings by logging in with administrator privileges.

If user login administration is disabled, the user authentication screen appears. Enter a login user name and

password, and select [Login].

The factory default login user name and login password are set as shown below.

2-18

Installing and Setting up the Machine > Network Setup

3Set the IP address.

4Select the [OK] key.

5[▲] [] key > [Subnet Mask] > [OK] key

6Set the subnet mask.

7Select the [OK] key.

8[▲] [] key > [Default Gateway] > [OK] key

9Set the default gateway.

10Select the [OK] key.

11[▲] [] key > [Auto-IP] > [OK] key

12[Off] > [OK] key

NOTE

You can set any value between 000 and 255.

Use the numeric keys or select the [▲] or [▼] key to enter a number.

Select the [◄] or [►] key to move the position being entered, which is shown highlighted.

NOTE

You can set any value between 000 and 255.

Use the numeric keys or select the [▲] or [▼] key to enter a number.

Select the [◄] or [►] key to move the position being entered, which is shown highlighted.

NOTE

You can set any value between 000 and 255.

Use the numeric keys or select the [▲] or [▼] key to enter a number.

Select the [◄] or [►] key to move the position being entered, which is shown highlighted.

IMPORTANT

After changing the setting, restart the network from System Menu, or turn the

machine OFF and then ON.

Restart Network (page 8-17)

NOTE

Ask your network administrator for the IP address in advance, and have it ready when you

configure this setting.

In the following cases, set the IP address of DNS server on the Command Center RX.

• When using the host name with "DHCP" setting set to "Off"

• When using the DNS server with IP address that is not assigned by DHCP automatically.

Setting the IP Address of the DNS Server, refer to the following:

Command Center RX User Guide

2-19

Installing and Setting up the Machine > Network Setup

Configuring the Wireless Network

When the Wireless Network Interface Kit (IB-36 and IB-51) is installed on the machine and the connection settings are

configured, it is possible to print or send in a wireless network (wireless LAN) environment. The configuration methods

are as follows:

Setting the Connection by Using the Wi-Fi Setup Tool

To send the Wi-Fi settings configured in the Wi-Fi Setup Tool to the machine, connect the computer or handheld device

with the machine locally. The connection methods are wired connection via LAN cable and wireless LAN connection

(Wi-Fi Direct).

Wired Connection by Using LAN Cable

1Connect the machine with a computer

1Connect the machine with a computer via LAN cable when the machine is powered on.

2Turn on the computer.

IP address (link local address) of the machine and computer is generated automatically.

Configuration Method Description Reference Page

Configuring the Connection

from the Operation Panel on

This Machine

Use Wi-Fi Settings to configure the network in details from

System menu.

Wi-Fi Settings (page 8-8)

Setting the Connection by

Using the Wi-Fi Setup Tool

This is the tool included in the Product Library. You can

configure the connection according to the instructions

provided by the wizard.

Setting the Connection by Using

the Wi-Fi Setup Tool (page 2-19)

Configuring Connections on

the Web Page

For the IB-36, the connection can be set from the

Command Center RX.

Command Center RX User

Guide

For the IB-51, the connection can be set on the dedicated

Web page.

IB-51 Operation Guide

Setting the Connection by

Using the Setup Utility of IB-51

This is the setup tool included in the CD of IB-51. You can

use it on both Windows and Mac OS.

IB-51 Operation Guide

NOTE

When you want to switch to the network interface other than Wired (default) after installing an optional Network

Interface Kit (IB-50) and a Wireless Network Interface Kit (IB-36 or IB-51), select the desired setting on "Primary

Network (Client)".

Primary Network (page 8-19)

NOTE

• Before using the Wi-Fi Setup Tool, connect your computer to this machine locally with wired LAN cable or Wi-Fi

Direct.

• To use Wi-Fi Direct, confirm that the Wi-Fi Direct is enabled (Wi-Fi Direct is set to [ON]) and Restart Network from

the operation panel, before your computer will be connected to this machine with Wi-Fi Direct.

• To use a wired LAN cable directly connected to the machine, the Auto-IP (Link-local) address will be assigned to the

machine and the computer. This machine applies Auto-IP as the default settings.

• Configure the settings on the operation panel if your computer supports WPS.

Wi-Fi Settings (page 8-8)

2-20

Installing and Setting up the Machine > Network Setup

2Insert the DVD.

3Display the screen.

4Select [Maintenance].

5[Wi-Fi Setup Tool] > [OK]

6Configure the settings.

1[Do not use automatic configuration] > [Next] > [Next]

2[Use LAN cable] > [Next] > [Next]

NOTE

• Installation on Windows must be done by a user logged on with administrator privileges.

• If the "Welcome to the Found New Hardware Wizard" dialog box displays, select

[Cancel].

• If the autorun screen is displayed, click [Run setup.exe].

• If the user account management window appears, click [Yes] ([Allow]).

1Click [View License Agreement]

and read the License Agreement.

2Click [Accept].

2-21

Installing and Setting up the Machine > Network Setup

3[Easy setup] > [Next]

The machine is detected.

4Select the machine > [Next]

5Select [Use the device settings.] on [Authentication mode], and enter the login user

name and password. Login user name and Password are both Admin.

6Configure the communication settings > [Next]

7Change the settings of access point as necessary > [Next]

The network is configured.

Wireless LAN Connection by Using Wi-Fi Direct

1Display the screen.

[System Menu/Counter] key > [▲] [] key > [System/Network] > [OK] key > [▲] [] key >

[Network Setting] > [OK] key > [▲] [] key > [Wi-Fi Direct Set] > [OK] key > [▲] [] key >

[Wi-Fi Direct] > [OK] key

2Configure the settings.

[▲] [] key > [On] > [OK] key

3Restart the network.

[System Menu/Counter] key > [▲] [] key > [System/Network] > [OK] key > [▲] [] key >

[Network Setting] > [OK] key > [▲] [] key > [Restart Network] > [OK] key > [Yes]

4Connect a computer or a handheld device with the machine.

5Insert the DVD.

NOTE

• Only one machine can be searched using Wi-Fi Setup Tool. It may take times to search

the machine.

• If the machine is not detected, select [Advanced setup] > [Next]. Select [Express] or

[Custom] as device discovery method and specify the IP address or host name to

search the machine.

Setting Wi-Fi Direct (page 2-23)

NOTE

• Installation on Windows must be done by a user logged on with administrator privileges.

• If the "Welcome to the Found New Hardware Wizard" dialog box displays, select

[Cancel].

• If the autorun screen is displayed, click [Run setup.exe].

• If the user account management window appears, click [Yes] ([Allow]).

2-22

Installing and Setting up the Machine > Network Setup

6Display the screen.

7Select [Maintenance].

8[Wi-Fi Setup Tool] > [OK]

9Configure the settings.

1[Do not use automatic configuration] > [Next] > [Next]

2[Wi-Fi Direct] > [Next] > [Next]

3[Advanced setup] > [Next]

Select [Express] or [Custom] as device discovery method and specify the IP address or

host name to search the machine.

4Select the machine > [Next]

5Select [Use the device settings.] on [Authentication mode], and enter the login user

name and password. Login user name and Password are both Admin.

6Configure the communication settings > [Next]

7Change the settings of access point as necessary > [Next]

The network is configured.

1Click [View License Agreement]

and read the License Agreement.

2Click [Accept].

2-23

Installing and Setting up the Machine > Network Setup

Setting Wi-Fi Direct

When the wireless network function is available on the machine, setting Wi-Fi Direct enables you to print from the Wi-Fi

Direct environment. The configuration methods are as follows:

Configuring the Connection from the Operation Panel on This Machine

Connecting to Computers or Handheld Devices that Support Wi-Fi Direct

1Display the screen.

[System Menu/Counter] key > [▲] [] key > [System/Network] > [OK] key > [▲] [] key >

[Network Setting] > [OK] key > [▲] [] key > [Wi-Fi Direct Set] > [OK] key > [▲] [] key >

[Wi-Fi Direct] > [OK] key

2Configure the settings.

[▲] [] key > [On] > [OK] key

3Restart the network.

[System Menu/Counter] key > [▲] [] key > [System/Network] > [OK] key > [▲] [] key >

[Network Setting] > [OK] key > [▲] [] key > [Restart Network] > [OK] key > [Yes]

4Specify the machine name from the computer or handheld

device.

If a confirmation message appears on the operation panel of the machine, select [Yes].

The network between this machine and the handheld device is configured.

Connecting to Computers or Handheld Devices Unsupported Wi-Fi Direct

Here, we'll explain the procedures for connecting to iOS handheld devices.

1Display the screen.

[System Menu/Counter] key > [▲] [] key > [System/Network] > [OK] key > [▲] [] key >

[Network Setting] > [OK] key > [▲] [] key > [Wi-Fi Direct Set] > [OK] key > [▲] [] key >

[Wi-Fi Direct] > [OK] key

2Configure the settings.

[▲] [] key > [On] > [OK] key

3Restart the network.

[System Menu/Counter] key > [▲] [] key > [System/Network] > [OK] key > [▲] [] key >

[Network Setting] > [OK] key > [▲] [] key > [Restart Network] > [OK] key > [Yes]

4[Status/Job Cancel] Key > [▲] [▼] key > [Wi-Fi Direct] >

[OK] key > [▲][▼] key > [Detail Info] > [OK] key

5Note the network name (SSID), IP address, and password.

6Configure the handheld device.

1[Settings] > [Wi-Fi]

2-24

Installing and Setting up the Machine > Network Setup

2Select the network name (SSID) appeared in step 5 from the list.

3Enter the password that was provided in step 5 > [Connect]

The network between this machine and the handheld device is configured.

Configuring the Connection by Using Push Button

When your computer or handheld device does not support Wi-Fi Direct but supports WPS, you can configure the

network using push button.

1Display the screen.

[System Menu/Counter] key > [▲] [] key > [System/Network] > [OK] key > [▲] [] key >

[Network Setting] > [OK] key > [▲] [] key > [Wi-Fi Direct Set] > [OK] key > [▲] [] key >

[Wi-Fi Direct] > [OK] key

2Configure the settings.

[▲] [] key > [On] > [OK] key

3Restart the network.

[System Menu/Counter] key > [▲] [] key > [System/Network] > [OK] key > [▲] [] key >

[Network Setting] > [OK] key > [▲] [] key > [Restart Network] > [OK] key > [Yes]

4[Status/Job Cancel] Key > [▲] [▼] key > [Wi-Fi Direct] >

[OK] key > [▲][▼] key > [PushButton Setup] > [OK] key

5Press the push button on the computer or handheld device and

select [Push Button] on the screen of operation panel

simultaneously > [Next].

The network between this machine and the computer or handheld device is configured.

IMPORTANT

You can connect up to three handheld devices at the same time using Wi-Fi Direct setting. When the devices

that support Wi-Fi Direct are connected, if you want to connect other device, disconnect the already-

connected devices from the network. The disconnection methods are as follows:

• Disconnect the network from the computer or handheld computer

• Disconnecting all devices from the network on the operation panel

[Status/Job Cancel] Key > [▲] [▼] key > [Wi-Fi Direct] > [OK] key > [▲] [▼] key > [ConnectionStatus] >

[OK] key > [Menu] > [▲] [▼] key > [Disconnect All] > [OK] key

• Configuring auto disconnecting time from the System menu

Wi-Fi Direct Set (page 8-7)

• Configuring auto disconnecting time from the Command Center RX

Command Center RX User Guide

2-25

Installing and Setting up the Machine > Energy Saver function

Energy Saver function

If a certain period of time elapses after the machine is last used, the machine automatically enters sleep mode, which

minimizes power consumption. If the machine is not used while in sleep mode, the power automatically turns off.

Low Power Mode

If the machine is not operated for a certain period of time, the energy saver indicator will light up and the screen will

become dark to reduce power consumption. This status is referred to as Low Power Mode.

"Low power." will be displayed on the screen.

The amount of time before entering Low Power Mode: 1 minutes (default setting).

If print data is received during Low Power Mode, the machine automatically wakes up and starts printing. Also when fax

data arrives while the machine is in Low Power Mode, the machine automatically wakes up and starts printing.

To resume, perform one of the following actions.

• Select any key on the operation panel.

• Touch the touch panel.

• Place originals in the document processor.

Recovery time from Low Power Mode is as follows.

• 10 seconds or less

Note that ambient environmental conditions, such as ventilation, may cause the machine to respond more slowly.

Sleep and Auto Sleep

NOTE

If the Low Power Timer is equal to the Sleep Timer, a Sleep mode is preceded.

NOTE

If user login administration is enabled, you can only change the settings by logging in with administrator privileges.

If user login administration is disabled, the user authentication screen appears. Enter a login user name and

password, and select [Login].

The factory default login user name and login password are set as shown below.

2-26

Installing and Setting up the Machine > Energy Saver function

Sleep

To enter Sleep, select the [Energy Saver] key. Message display and all indicators on the operation panel will go out to

save a maximum amount of power except the Energy Saver indicator. This status is referred to as Sleep.

If print data is received during Sleep, the machine automatically wakes up and starts printing.

Also when fax data arrives while the machine is in Sleep, the machine automatically wakes up and starts printing.

To resume, perform the following actions.

• Select any key on the operation panel.

The machine will be ready to operate within 16 seconds.

Note that ambient environmental conditions, such as ventilation, may cause the machine to respond more slowly.

Auto Sleep

Auto Sleep automatically switches the machine into Sleep if left idle for a preset time.

The default preset time is 1 minute.

To change the preset sleep time, refer to the following:

Sleep Timer (page 8-31)

Follow the steps below to set the sleep timer for the machine to go into sleep mode when not in use.

1Display the screen.

[System Menu/Counter] key > [▲] [] key > [Common Settings] > [OK] key > [▲] [] key >

[Timer Setting] > [OK] key > [▲] [] key > [Sleep Timer] > [OK] key

2Set the Sleep time.

1Enter the Sleep time.

2Select the [OK] key.

Sleep Rules (models for Europe)

You can set whether sleep mode operates for each function. When the machine enters sleep mode, the ID card cannot

be recognized.

For more information on Sleep Rules settings, refer to the following:

Sleep Rules (models for Europe) (page 8-31)

NOTE

Use the numeric keys or select the [▲] or [▼] key to enter a number.

Energy Saver indicator

2-27

Installing and Setting up the Machine > Energy Saver function

Sleep Level (Energy Saver and Quick Recovery) (models except for Europe)

For sleep level, you can toggle between the following two modes: Energy Saver mode and Quick Recovery mode. The

default setting is Energy Saver mode.

Energy Saver mode reduces power consumption even more than Quick Recovery mode, and allows Sleep Mode to be

set separately for each function. The ID card cannot be recognized.

To resume, select the [Energy Saver] key on the operation panel. If print data is received during Sleep, the machine

automatically wakes up and starts printing.

For more information on Sleep Level settings, refer to the following:

Sleep Level (models except for Europe) (page 8-31)

Follow the steps below to select the sleep level and use Energy Saver mode for each function.

1Display the screen.

[System Menu/Counter] key > [▲] [] key > [Common Settings] > [OK] key > [▲] [] key >

[Timer Setting] > [OK] key > [▲] [] key > [Sleep Level] > [OK] key

2Select the Sleep level.

[▲] [] key > [Quick Recovery] or [Energy Saver] > [OK] key

When [Energy Saver] is set, next go on to set whether or not to use Energy Saver mode for

each function.

3Set the Sleep rule.

1Select the function to be set, and select the [OK] key.

[Card Reader] is displayed when the optional Card Authentication Kit is activated.

[FAX] is displayed only on products with the fax function installed.

2[▲] [] key > [Off] or [On] > [OK] key

Repeat steps 3-1 to 3-2 to set for a different function.

NOTE

If the optional Network Interface Kit is installed, this function will not be displayed.

2-28

Installing and Setting up the Machine > Installing Software

Installing Software

Install appropriate software on your PC from the included DVD (Product Library) if you want to use the printer function of

this machine or perform TWAIN / WIA transmission or Network FAX transmission from your PC.

Software on DVD (Windows)

You can use either [

Express Install

] or [

Custom Install

] can be selected for the installation method. [

Express Install

] is

the standard installation method. To install components that cannot be installed by [

Express Install

], use [

Custom Install

For details on Custom Installation, refer to the following:

Custom Install (page 2-32)

Software Description Express

Install

KX DRIVER This driver enables files on a computer to be printed by the machine.

Multiple page description languages (PCL XL, KPDL, etc.) are supported by

a single driver. This printer driver allows you to take full advantage of the

features of the machine.

Use this driver to create PDF files.

KX XPS DRIVER This printer driver supports the XPS (XML Paper Specification) format

developed by Microsoft Corporation.

KPDL mini-driver/PCL mini-

driver

This is a Microsoft MiniDriver that supports PCL and KPDL. There are some

restrictions on the machine features and option features that can be used

with this driver.

FAX Driver This makes it possible to send a document created in a computer software

application as a fax via the machine.

Kyocera TWAIN Driver This driver enables scanning on the machine using a TWAIN-compliant

software application.

Kyocera WIA Driver WIA (Windows Imaging Acquisition) is a function of Windows that enables

reciprocal communication between an imaging device such as a scanner

and an image processing software application. An image can be acquired

using a WIA-compliant software application, which is convenient when a

TWAIN-compliant software application is not installed in the computer.

KYOCERA Net Viewer This is a utility that enables monitoring of the machine on the network. -

Status Monitor This is a utility that monitors the printer status and provides an ongoing

reporting function.

KYOCERA Net Direct Print This makes it possible to print a PDF file without starting Adobe Acrobat/

Reader.

FONTS These are display fonts that enable the machine's built-in fonts to be used in

a software application.

NOTE

• Installation on Windows must be done by a user logged on with administrator privileges.

• Fax functionality can only be used on products equipped with fax capability.

2-29

Installing and Setting up the Machine > Installing Software

Installing Software in Windows

Express Install

The following procedure is an example for installing the software in Windows 8.1 using [Express Install].

For details on Custom Installation, refer to the following:

Custom Install (page 2-32)

1Insert the DVD.

2Display the screen.

NOTE

• Installation on Windows must be done by a user logged on with administrator privileges.

• If the "Welcome to the Found New Hardware Wizard" dialog box displays, select

[Cancel].

• If the autorun screen is displayed, click [Run setup.exe].

• If the user account management window appears, click [Yes].

1Click [View License Agreement]

and read the License Agreement.

2Click [Accept].

2-30

Installing and Setting up the Machine > Installing Software

3Select [Express Install].

4Install the software.

You can also select [Use host name for port name] and set to use the host name of the

standard TCP/IP port. (A USB connection cannot be used.)

When you click [Install], a screen asking for your cooperation with data collection will be

displayed. Select one of the answer choices and click [OK].

IMPORTANT

If Wi-Fi or Wi-Fi Direct is enabled, be sure to specify the IP address for the port name.

Installation may fail if the host name is specified.

NOTE

• The machine cannot be detected unless it is on. If the computer fails to detect the

machine, verify that it is connected to the computer via a network or USB cable and that it

is turned on and click (Reload).

• If the Windows security window appears, click [Install this driver software anyway].

• To install Status Monitor on Windows versions preceding Windows 8, it is necessary to

install Microsoft .NET Framework 4.0 beforehand.

2-31

Installing and Setting up the Machine > Installing Software

5Finish the installation.

When "Your software is ready to use" appears, you can use the software. To print a test

page, click the "Print a test page" checkbox and select the machine.

Click [Finish] to exit the wizard.

If a system restart message appears, restart the computer by following the screen prompts.

This completes the printer driver installation procedure.

If you are installing the TWAIN driver, continue by configuring the following:

Setting TWAIN Driver (page 2-38)

2-32

Installing and Setting up the Machine > Installing Software

Custom Install

The following procedure is an example for installing the software in Windows 8.1 using [Custom Install].

1Insert the DVD.

2Display the screen.

3Select [Custom Install].

4Install the software.

1Select the device to be installed.

NOTE

• Installation on Windows must be done by a user logged on with administrator privileges.

• If the "Welcome to the Found New Hardware Wizard" dialog box displays, select

[Cancel].

• If the autorun screen is displayed, click [Run setup.exe].

• If the user account management window appears, click [Yes].

1 Click [View License Agreement]

and read the License Agreement.

2 Click [Accept].

2-33

Installing and Setting up the Machine > Installing Software

2Select the driver to be installed.

3Click [Utility] tab and select the utility to be installed.

IMPORTANT

If Wi-Fi or Wi-Fi Direct is enabled, be sure to specify the IP address for the port

name. Installation may fail if the host name is specified.

NOTE

• The machine cannot be detected unless it is on. If the computer fails to detect the

machine, verify that it is connected to the computer via a network or USB cable and

that it is turned on and click (Reload).

• If the desired device does not appear, select [Add custom device] to directly select

the device.

2-34

Installing and Setting up the Machine > Installing Software

4Click [Install].

When you click [Install], a screen asking for your cooperation with data collection will be displayed.

Select one of the answer choices and click [OK].

5Finish the installation.

When "Your software is ready to use" appears, you can use the software. To print a test

page, click the "Print a test page" checkbox and select the machine.

Click [Finish] to exit the wizard.

If a system restart message appears, restart the computer by following the screen prompts.

This completes the printer driver installation procedure.

If you are installing the TWAIN driver, continue by configuring the following:

NOTE

• To install Status Monitor on Windows versions preceding Windows 8, it is necessary to

install Microsoft .NET Framework 4.0 beforehand.

Setting TWAIN Driver (page 2-38)

2-35

Installing and Setting up the Machine > Installing Software

Uninstalling the Software

Perform the following procedure to delete the Software from your computer.

1Display the screen.

Click [Search] in charms, and enter "Uninstall Kyocera Product Library" in the search box.

Select [Uninstall Kyocera Product Library] in the search list.

2Uninstall the software.

Place a check in the check box of the software to be deleted.

3Finish uninstalling.

If a system restart message appears, restart the computer by following the screen prompts.

This completes the software uninstallation procedure.

NOTE

Uninstallation on Windows must be done by a user logged on with administrator privileges.

NOTE

In Windows 7, click [Start] button on the Windows and then select [All Programs],

[Kyocera], and [Uninstall Kyocera Product Library] to display the Uninstall Wizard.

NOTE

The software can also be uninstalled using the Product Library.

In the Product Library screen, click [Uninstall], and follow the on-screen instructions to

uninstall the software.

2-36

Installing and Setting up the Machine > Installing Software

Installing Software in Mac Computer

The machine's printer functionality can be used by a Mac computer.

1Insert the DVD.

Double-click the [Kyocera] icon.

2Display the screen.

Double-click [Kyocera OS X x.x] depending on your Mac OS version.

3Install the Printer Driver.

Install the printer driver as directed by the instructions in the installation software.

This completes the printer driver installation.

If a USB connection is used, the machine is automatically recognized and connected.

If an IP connection is used, the settings below are required.

NOTE

• Installation on MAC OS must be done by a user logged on with administrator privileges.

• When printing from a Macintosh computer, set the machine's emulation to [KPDL] or [KPDL(Auto)].

Printer (page 8-39)

• If connecting by Bonjour, enable Bonjour in the machine's network settings.

Bonjour (page 8-12)

• In the Authenticate screen, enter the name and password used to log in to the operating system.

• When printing via AirPrint, you do not have to install the software.

2-37

Installing and Setting up the Machine > Installing Software

4Configure the printer.

1Open System Preferences and add the printer.

2Select [Default] and click the item that appears in "Name" and then select the driver in

"Use".

3Select the options available for the machine.

4The selected machine is added.

NOTE

When using

an IP

connection,

click the IP icon for an IP connection and then enter the

host name or IP address.

The number entered in "Address" will automatically appear in

"Name". Change if needed.

2-38

Installing and Setting up the Machine > Installing Software

Setting TWAIN Driver

1Display the screen.

1Click [Search] in charms, and enter "TWAIN Driver Setting" in the search box. Select

[TWAIN Driver Setting] in the search list.

2Click [Add].

2Configure TWAIN Driver.

NOTE

In Windows 7, select [Start] button on the Windows, [All Programs], [Kyocera] and then

[TWAIN Driver Setting]. TWAIN Driver screen appears.

(Network)

1 Enter the machine name.

2 Select this machine from the list.

3 Enter the machine's IP address or host name.

4 Set units of measurement.

5 When using SSL, select the checkbox beside SSL.

6 Click [OK].

(USB)

1 Enter the machine name.

2 Select this machine from the list.

3 Set units of measurement.

4 Set the Compression Level.

5 Click [OK].

2-39

Installing and Setting up the Machine > Installing Software

3Finish registering.

NOTE

When the machine's IP address or host name is unknown, contact Administrator.

NOTE

Click [Delete] to delete the added machine. Click [Edit] to change names.

2-40

Installing and Setting up the Machine > Installing Software

Setting WIA Driver

1Display the screen.

1Click [Search] in charms, and enter "View scanners and cameras" in the search box.

Select [View scanners and cameras] in the search list then the Scanners and Cameras

screen appears.

2Select the same name as this machine from WIA Drivers, and click [Properties].

2Configure WIA Driver.

NOTE

In Windows 7, click [Start] button on the Windows and enter [Scanner] in [Program and

File Search]. Click [View scanners and cameras] in the search list then the Scanners

and Cameras screen appears.

(Network)

(USB)

1 Click the [Settings] tab.

2 Enter the machine IP addresses or host name.

3 When using SSL, select the checkbox beside

SSL.

4 Set units of measurement.

5 Click [OK].

1 Click the [Settings] tab.

2 Set the Compression Level.

3 Set units of measurement.

4 Click [OK].

2-41

Installing and Setting up the Machine > Checking the Counter

Checking the Counter

Check the number of sheets printed and scanned.

1Display the screen.

[System Menu/Counter] key > [▲] [] key > [Counter] > [OK] key

2Check the counter.

Select the item you want to check, and select the [OK] key.

2-42

Installing and Setting up the Machine > Additional Preparations for the Administrator

Additional Preparations for the Administrator

In addition to the information provided in this chapter, the administrator of this machine should check the following, and

configure the settings as needed.

Sending Documents to a PC

To Send to a Shared Folder (Send to Folder (SMB))

To send a document that has been loaded, you need to create a shared folder to receive the document on your computer.

Preparation for Sending a Document to a Shared Folder in a PC (page 3-15)

To E-mail Scanned Images (Send as E-mail)

You can send a scanned original image as an E-mail attachment.

E-mail Settings (page 2-50)

Strengthening the Security

This machine is shipped with two default users registered one with Machine Administrator rights, and another with

Administrator rights.Logging in as this user will allow you to configure all settings; therefore, please change the login

user name and password.

In addition, this machine is equipped with user authentication function, which can be configured to limit the access to this

machine to only those who have a registered login name and password.

User Authentication and Accounting (User Login, Job Accounting) (page 9-1)

I want to... Function Reference page

Restrict the users of the machine. User Login page 9-2

Auto Panel Reset page 8-31

ID Card Settings*1

*1 The optional Card Authentication Kit is required.

page 9-22

Restrict the basic functions that can be used. Local Authorization page 9-16

Group Authorization Set. page 9-17

Prevent another user from handling the

documents stored in the machine.

Custom Box*2

*2 The optional SSD is required.

page 5-33

Prevent the data stored in the machine from

being leaked.

Data Overwrite*3

*3 The optional Data Security Kit is required.

Refer to the Data

Security Kit (E)

Operation Guide.

Encryption*3

PDF Encryption Functions page 6-28

Completely delete the data on the machine

before disposing of the machine.

DataSanitization page 8-5

2-43

Installing and Setting up the Machine > Additional Preparations for the Administrator

I want to... Function Reference page

Protect the transmission from interception and

wiretapping.

IPP over SSL page 8-14

HTTPS page 8-14

LDAP Security Refer to the

Command Center

RX User Guide.

FTP Encrypted TX page 6-31

IPSec page 8-12

SNMPv3 page 8-12

2-44

Installing and Setting up the Machine > Command Center RX

Command Center RX

If the machine is connected to the network, you can configure various settings using Command Center RX.

This section explains how to access Command Center RX, and how to change security settings and the host name.

Command Center RX User Guide

Settings that the administrator and general users can configure in Command Center RX are as follows.

NOTE

To fully access the features of the Command Center RX pages, enter the User Name and Password and click [Login].

Entering the predefined administrator password allows the user to access all pages, including Document Box,

Address Book, and Settings on the navigation menu. The factory default setting for the default user with administrator

privileges is shown below. (Upper case and lower case letters are distinguished (case sensitive).)

Setting Description Administ-

rator

General

User

Device

Information

The machine's structure can be checked.

Job Status Displays all device information, including print and scan jobs, storing jobs,

scheduled jobs, and job log history.

Document Box Add or delete document boxes, or delete documents within a document box. *1

*1 The logged in user may not be able to configure some settings, depending on the permissions of the user.

Address Book Create, edit, or delete addresses and address groups. *1

Device Settings Configure the advanced settings of the machine. -

Function Settings Configure the advanced function settings. -

Network Settings Configure the network advanced settings. -

Security Settings Configure the security advanced settings. -

Management

Settings

Configure the advanced management settings. -

NOTE

• FAX functions are available only on products with the fax function installed.

• Here, information on the FAX settings has been omitted.

FAX Operation Guide

2-45

Installing and Setting up the Machine > Command Center RX

Accessing Command Center RX

1Display the screen.

1Launch your Web browser.

2In the address or location bar, enter the machine's IP address or the host name.

Click in the following order to check the machine's IP address and the host name.

[System Menu/Counter] key > [▲] [▼] key > [Report] > [OK] key > [▲] [▼] key > [Report Print] >

[OK] key > [▲] [▼] key > [Status Page] > [OK] key > [Yes]

Examples: https://192.168.48.21/ (for IP address)

https://MFP001 (if the host name is "MFP001")

The web page displays basic information about the machine and Command Center RX as well

as their current status.

2Configure the function.

Select a category from the navigation bar on the left of the screen.

NOTE

If the screen "There is a problem with this website's security certificate." is displayed,

configure the certificate.

Command Center RX User Guide

You can also continue the operation without configuring the certificate.

NOTE

To fully access the features of the Command Center RX pages, enter the User Name and

Password and click [Login]. Entering the predefined administrator password allows the user

to access all pages, including Document Box, Address Book, and Settings on the navigation

menu. The factory default setting for the default user with administrator privileges is shown

below. (Upper case and lower case letters are distinguished (case sensitive).)

2-46

Installing and Setting up the Machine > Command Center RX

Changing Security Settings

1Display the screen.

1Launch your Web browser.

2In the address or location bar, enter the machine's IP address or the host name.

Click in the following order to check the machine's IP address and the host name.

[System Menu/Counter] key > [▲] [▼] key > [Report] > [OK] key > [▲] [▼] key > [Report Print] >

[OK] key > [▲] [▼] key > [Status Page] > [OK] key > [Yes]

3Log in with administrator privileges.

The factory default setting for the default user with administrator privileges is shown below. (Upper

case and lower case letters are distinguished (case sensitive).)

4Click [Security Settings].

2-47

Installing and Setting up the Machine > Command Center RX

2Configure the Security Settings.

From the [Security Settings] menu, select the setting you want to configure.

NOTE

For details on settings related to certificates, refer to the following:

Command Center RX User Guide

2-48

Installing and Setting up the Machine > Command Center RX

Changing Device Information

1Display the screen.

1Launch your Web browser.

2In the address or location bar, enter the machine's IP address or the host name.

Click in the following order to check the machine's IP address and the host name.

[System Menu/Counter] key > [▲] [▼] key > [Report] > [OK] key > [▲] [▼] key > [Report Print] >

[OK] key > [▲] [▼] key > [Status Page] > [OK] key > [Yes]

3Log in with administrator privileges.

The factory default setting for the default user with administrator privileges is shown below. (Upper

case and lower case letters are distinguished (case sensitive).)

4From the [Device Settings] menu, click [System].

2-49

Installing and Setting up the Machine > Command Center RX

2Specify the host name.

Enter the device information, and then click [Submit].

IMPORTANT

After changing the setting, restart the network or turn the machine OFF and then ON.

To restart the network interface card, click [Reset] in the [Management Settings]

menu, and then click [Restart Network] in "Restart".

2-50

Installing and Setting up the Machine > Command Center RX

E-mail Settings

By configuring the SMTP settings, it is possible to send the images scanned by the machine as E-mail attachments and

to send E-mail notices when jobs have been completed.

To use this function, this machine must be connected to a mail server using the SMTP protocol.

In addition, configure the following.

•SMTP settings

Item: "SMTP Protocol" and "SMTP Server Name" in "SMTP"

• The sender address when the machine sends E-mails

Item: "Sender Address" in "E-mail Send Settings"

• The setting to limit the size of E-mails

Item: "E-mail Size Limit" in "E-mail Send Settings"

The procedure for specifying the SMTP settings is explained below.

1Display the screen.

Display the SMTP Protocol screen.

1Launch your Web browser.

2In the address or location bar, enter the machine's IP address or the host name.

Click in the following order to check the machine's IP address and the host name.

[System Menu/Counter] key > [▲] [▼] key > [Report] > [OK] key > [▲] [▼] key > [Report Print] >

[OK] key > [▲] [▼] key > [Status Page] > [OK] key > [Yes]

3Log in with administrator privileges.

The factory default setting for the default user with administrator privileges is shown below. (Upper

case and lower case letters are distinguished (case sensitive).)

2-51

Installing and Setting up the Machine > Command Center RX

4From the [Network Settings] menu, click [Protocol].

2Configure the settings.

Set "SMTP (E-mail TX)" to [On] in the "Send Protocols".

2-52

Installing and Setting up the Machine > Command Center RX

3Display the screen.

Display the E-mail Settings screen.

From the [Function Settings] menu, click [E-mail].

2-53

Installing and Setting up the Machine > Command Center RX

4Configure the settings.

Enter "SMTP" and "E-mail Send Settings" items.

5Click [Submit].

Setting Description

SMTP Set to send e-mail from the machine.

SMTP Protocol Displays the SMTP protocol settings. Check that "SMTP Protocol"

is set to [On]. If [Off] is set, click [Protocol] and set the SMTP

protocol to [On].

SMTP Server Name*1

*1 Be sure to enter the items.

Enter the host name or IP address of the SMTP server.

SMTP Port Number Specify the port number to be used for SMTP. The default port

number is 25.

SMTP Server Timeout Set the amount of time to wait before time-out in seconds.

Authentication Protocol To use SMTP authentication, enter the user information for

authentication.

Connection Test Tests to confirm that the E-mail function is operating under the

settings without sending a mail.

Domain Restriction To restrict the domains, click the [Domain List] and enter the

domain names of addresses to be allowed or rejected. Restriction

can also be specified by e-mail address.

POP3 POP3 Protocol You don't need to set the following items when you only enable the

function of sending e-mail from the machine. Set the following

items if you want to enable the function of receiving e-mail on the

machine.

Command Center RX User Guide

Check Interval

Run once now

Domain Restriction

POP3 User Settings

E-mail

Send

Settings

E-mail Size Limit Enter the maximum size of E-mail that can be sent in kilobytes.

When E-mail size is greater than this value, an error message

appears and E-mail sending is cancelled. Use this setting if you

have set E-mail Size Limit for SMTP server. If not, enter a value of

0 (zero) to enable E-mail sending regardless of the size limit.

Sender Address*1 Specify the sender address for when the machine sends E-mails,

such as the machine administrator, so that a reply or non-delivery

report will go to a person rather than to the machine. The sender

address must be entered correctly for SMTP authentication. The

maximum length of the sender address is 128 characters.

Signature Enter the signature. The signature is free form text that will appear

at the end of the E-mail body. It is often used for further

identification of the machine. The maximum length of the

signature is 512 characters.

Function Defaults Change the function default settings in [Common/Job Default

Settings] page.

2-54

Installing and Setting up the Machine > Command Center RX

Registering Destinations

1Display the screen.

1Launch your Web browser.

2In the address or location bar, enter the machine's IP address or the host name.

Click in the following order to check the machine's IP address and the host name.

[System Menu/Counter] key > [▲] [▼] key > [Report] > [OK] key > [▲] [▼] key > [Report Print] >

[OK] key > [▲] [▼] key > [Status Page] > [OK] key > [Yes]

3Log in with administrator privileges.

The factory default setting for the default user with administrator privileges is shown below. (Upper

case and lower case letters are distinguished (case sensitive).)

4From the [Address Book] menu, click [Machine Address Book].

5Click [Add].

2Populate the fields.

1Enter the destination information.

Enter the information for the destination you want to register. The fields to populate are the same as

when registering via operation panel.

2Click [Submit].

Registering Destinations in the Address Book (page 3-25)

2-55

Installing and Setting up the Machine > Command Center RX

Creating a New Custom Box

1Display the screen.

1Launch your Web browser.

2In the address or location bar, enter the machine's IP address or the host name.

Click in the following order to check the machine's IP address and the host name.

[System Menu/Counter] key > [▲] [▼] key > [Report] > [OK] key > [▲] [▼] key > [Report Print] >

[OK] key > [▲] [▼] key > [Status Page] > [OK] key > [Yes]

3From the [Document Box] menu, click [Custom Box].

4Click [Add].

2Configure the Custom Box.

1Enter the box details.

Enter the information for the custom box you want to register. For details on the fields to populate,

refer to the following:

2Click [Submit].

NOTE

To use Custom Box, an optional SSD must be installed in the machine.

Command Center RX User Guide

2-56

Installing and Setting up the Machine > Command Center RX

Printing a document stored in a Custom Box

1Display the screen.

1Launch your Web browser.

2In the address or location bar, enter the machine's IP address or the host name.

Click in the following order to check the machine's IP address and the host name.

[System Menu/Counter] key > [▲] [▼] key > [Report] > [OK] key > [▲] [▼] key > [Report Print] >

[OK] key > [▲] [▼] key > [Status Page] > [OK] key > [Yes]

3From the [Document Box] menu, click [Custom Box].

4Click the number or name of the Custom Box in which the document is stored.

2-57

Installing and Setting up the Machine > Command Center RX

2Print the document.

1Select the document you wish to print.

Select the checkbox of the document to be printed.

2Click [Print].

3Configure settings for printing, click [Print].

2-58

Installing and Setting up the Machine > Transferring Data from Our Other Products

Transferring Data from Our Other Products

By using the machine's utility, you can smoothly migrate address books when the machine is to be replaced.

This section explains how to transfer data between our products.

Migrating the Address Book

The Address Book registered on the machine can be backed up or migrated using the KYOCERA Net Viewer on the

included DVD.

For details on operating the KYOCERA Net Viewer, refer to the following:

KYOCERA Net Viewer User Guide

Backing Up Address Book Data to PC

1Launch the KYOCERA Net Viewer.

2Create a backup.

1Right-click on the model name from which you want to back up the Address Book, and

select [Advanced] - [Set multiple devices].

2Select [Custom Mode] and click [Next].

2-59

Installing and Setting up the Machine > Transferring Data from Our Other Products

3Select destination device group and click [Next].

4Select [Device Address Book] and click [Next].

5Select [Create from device] and remove the checkmark from [Overwrite settings on

target device], and then click [Next].

2-60

Installing and Setting up the Machine > Transferring Data from Our Other Products

6Select the model you want to back up, and click [Next].

7Click on [Save to file].

8Specify the location to save the file, enter the file name, and then click [Save].

For "Save as type", make sure to select "XML File".

NOTE

If the "Admin Login" screen appears, enter the "Admin Login" and "Login Password", and

then click [OK]. The default settings are as follows (Upper case and lower case letters

are distinguished (case sensitive)).

2-61

Installing and Setting up the Machine > Transferring Data from Our Other Products

9After saving the file, always click [Cancel] to close the screen.

Please note that selecting [Finish] will write the data to the machine's Address Book.

Writing Address Book Data to the Machine

1Launch the KYOCERA Net Viewer.

2Load the Address Book data.

1Right-click on the model name to which you want to transfer the Address Book, and select

[Advanced] - [Set multiple devices].

2Select [Custom Mode] and click [Next].

2-62

Installing and Setting up the Machine > Transferring Data from Our Other Products

3Select destination device group and click [Next].

4Select [Device Address Book] and click [Next].

5Select [Create from file] and remove the checkmark from [Overwrite settings on target

device], and then click [Next].

Selecting the [Overwrite settings on target device] checkbox will overwrite the machine's

Address Book from entry No.1.

2-63

Installing and Setting up the Machine > Transferring Data from Our Other Products

6Click [Browse] and select the backup Address Book file, and then click [Next].

7Click [Finish].

The write process of the Address Book data starts.

8Once the write process is complete, click [Close].

3-1

Preparation before Use

This chapter explains the following operations.

Loading Paper .................................................................................................................................................... 3-2

Precaution for Loading Paper .................................................................................................................. 3-3

Loading in the Cassettes ......................................................................................................................... 3-4

Loading Paper in the Multi Purpose Tray ................................................................................................. 3-8

Specifying Paper Size and Media Type ................................................................................................. 3-12

Paper Stopper .................................................................................................................................................. 3-14

Preparation for Sending a Document to a Shared Folder in a PC ................................................................... 3-15

Making a note of the computer name and full computer name .............................................................. 3-15

Making a note of the user name and domain name .............................................................................. 3-16

Creating a Shared Folder, Making a Note of a Shared Folder ............................................................... 3-17

Configuring Windows Firewall ............................................................................................................... 3-21

Registering Destinations in the Address Book ................................................................................................. 3-25

Adding a Destination (Address Book) .................................................................................................... 3-25

Adding a Destination on One Touch Key (One Touch Key) ................................................................... 3-31

3-2

Preparation before Use > Loading Paper

Loading Paper

Load paper in the cassettes and multipurpose tray.

For the paper load methods for each cassette, refer to the page below.

No. Name Page

1Multi Purpose Tray page 3-8

2Cassette 1 page 3-4

3Cassette 2 page 3-4

4Cassette 3 page 3-4

5Cassette 4 page 3-4

6Cassette 5 page 3-4

NOTE

• The number of sheets that can be held varies depending on your environment and paper type.

• You should not use inkjet printer paper or any paper with a special surface coating. (Such paper may cause paper

jams or other faults.)

3-3

Preparation before Use > Loading Paper

Precaution for Loading Paper

When you open a new package of paper, fan the sheets to separate them slightly prior to loading in the following steps.

Fan the paper, then tap it on a level surface.

In addition, note the following points.

• If the paper is curled or folded, straighten it before loading. Paper that is curled or folded

may cause a jam.

• Avoid exposing opened paper to high temperatures and high humidity as dampness can be

a cause of problems. Seal any remaining paper after loading in the multi purpose tray or

cassettes back in the paper storage bag.

• If the machine will not be used for a prolonged period, protect all paper from humidity by

removing it from the cassettes and sealing it in the paper storage bag.

IMPORTANT

If you copy onto used paper (paper already used for printing), do not use paper that is

stapled or clipped together. This may damage the machine or cause poor image

quality.

NOTE

If you use special paper such as letterhead, paper with holes or paper with pre-prints like

logo or company name, refer to the following:

Paper (page 11-14)

3-4

Preparation before Use > Loading Paper

Loading in the Cassettes

The cassettes can hold plain paper, recycled paper or color paper.

The number of sheets that can be loaded in each cassette is shown below.

For details of the supported paper sizes, refer to the following:

Choosing the Appropriate Paper (page 11-15)

For the paper type setting, refer to the following:

Media Type Setting (page 8-29)

1Pull the cassette completely out of the machine.

Cassette No. Sheets

Cassette 1 to 5 500 sheets (Plain paper: 80 g/m2)

NOTE

A6 paper cannot be loaded in cassettes 2 to 5.

IMPORTANT

• The cassettes can hold paper with weight between 60 - 120 g/m2.

• Do not load thick paper that is heavier than 120 g/m2 in the cassettes. Use the multi purpose tray for paper

that is heavier than 120 g/m2.

NOTE

When pulling the cassette out of the machine, ensure it is supported and does not fall out.

3-5

Preparation before Use > Loading Paper

2Adjust the cassette size.

1Adjust the position of the paper width guides located on the left and right sides of the

cassette. Press the paper width adjusting tab and slide the guides to the paper size

required.

Paper sizes are marked on the cassette.

2Adjust the paper length guide to the paper size required. Press the paper length adjusting

tab and slide the guides to the paper size required.

NOTE

If you are going to use paper that is longer than A4, pull out the paper length guide

backwards.

3-6

Preparation before Use > Loading Paper

3Turn the size dial so that the size of the paper you are going to use appears in the paper

size window.

3Press the bottom plate down until it locks.

4Load paper.

1Fan the paper, then tap it on a level surface to avoid paper jams or skewed printing.

2Load the paper in the cassette.

NOTE

When the size dial is set to "Other" the paper size must be set into the machine on the

operation panel.

Paper Size and Media Type for the Cassettes (page 3-12)

3-7

Preparation before Use > Loading Paper

5Gently push the cassette back in.

6Specify the type of paper loaded in the cassette using the

operation panel.

IMPORTANT

• Load the paper with the print side facing down.

• After removing new paper from its packaging, fan the paper before loading it in

the cassette.

Precaution for Loading Paper (page 3-3)

• Before loading the paper, be sure that it is not curled or folded. Paper that is

curled or folded may cause paper jams.

• Ensure that the loaded paper does not exceed the level indicator (see illustration

above).

• If paper is loaded without adjusting the paper length guide and paper width

guide, the paper may skew or become jammed.

Paper Size and Media Type for the Cassettes (page 3-12)

3-8

Preparation before Use > Loading Paper

Loading Paper in the Multi Purpose Tray

The multi purpose tray will hold up to 100 sheets of plain paper (80 g/m2).

For details of the supported paper sizes, refer to the following:

Choosing the Appropriate Paper (page 11-15)

For the paper type setting, refer to the following:

Media Type Setting (page 8-29)

Be sure to use the multi purpose tray when you print on any special paper.

The capacity of the multi purpose tray is as follows.

• Plain paper (80 g/m2), recycled paper or color paper: 100 sheets

• Thick paper (106 to 220 g/m2): 5 sheets

• Thick paper (104.7 g/m2): 100 sheets

• Hagaki (Cardstock): 1 sheets

• Envelope DL, Envelope C5, Envelope #10, Envelope #9, Envelope #6 3/4, Envelope Monarch, Youkei 4, Youkei 2:

5 sheets

• OHP film: 1 sheet

1Open the multi purpose tray.

IMPORTANT

• If you are using a paper weight of 106 g/m2 or more, set the media type to Thick and set the weight of the

paper you are using.

• Remove each transparency from the inner tray as it is printed. Leaving transparencies in the inner tray may

cause a paper jam.

NOTE

• When you load custom size paper, enter the paper size by referring to the following:

Paper Size and Media Type for the Multi Purpose Tray (MP Tray Setting) (page 3-13)

• When you use special paper such as transparencies or thick paper, select the media type by referring to the

following:

Paper Size and Media Type for the Multi Purpose Tray (MP Tray Setting) (page 3-13)

3-9

Preparation before Use > Loading Paper

2Pull out the support tray section of the MP tray.

3Adjust the multi purpose tray size.

Paper sizes are marked on the multi purpose tray.

4Load paper.

Insert the paper along the paper width guides into the tray until it stops.

After removing new paper from its packaging, fan the paper before loading it in the multi

purpose tray.

Precaution for Loading Paper (page 3-3)

3-10

Preparation before Use > Loading Paper

5Specify the type of paper loaded in the multi purpose tray using

the operation panel.

IMPORTANT

• When loading the paper, keep the print side facing up.

• Curled paper must be uncurled before use.

• When loading paper into the multi purpose tray, check that there is no paper left

over in the tray from a previous job before loading the paper. If there is just a small

amount of paper left over in the multi purpose tray and you want to add more, first

remove the left-over paper from the tray and include it with the new paper before

loading the paper back into the tray.

• If there is a gap between the paper and the paper width guides, readjust the guides

to fit the paper in order to prevent skewed feeding and paper jams.

• Ensure that the loaded paper does not exceed the level indicator (see illustration

above).

Paper Size and Media Type for the Multi Purpose Tray (MP Tray Setting) (page 3-13)

3-11

Preparation before Use > Loading Paper

When you load envelopes or cardstock in the multi purpose tray

Load the paper with the print side facing up. For the procedure for printing, refer to the following:

Printer Driver User Guide

Example: When printing the address.

IMPORTANT

• Use unfolded Oufuku hagaki (Return postcard).

• How to load envelopes (orientation and facing) will differ depending on the type of envelope. Be sure to

load it in correctly, otherwise printing may be done in the wrong direction or on the wrong face.

NOTE

When you load envelopes in the multi purpose tray, select the envelope type by referring to the following:

Paper Size and Media Type for the Multi Purpose Tray (MP Tray Setting) (page 3-13)

Close the flap.

Open the flap

Portrait form

envelopes

Landscape form

envelopes

Hagaki

(Cardstocks)

Oufuku hagaki

(Return postcard)

3-12

Preparation before Use > Loading Paper

Specifying Paper Size and Media Type

The default paper size setting for cassette 1, for the multi purpose tray and for the optional paper feeder (cassettes 2 to

5) is "A4" or "Letter", and the default media type setting is "Plain".

To change the type of paper to be used in cassettes, specify the paper size and media type setting.

Paper Size and Media Type for the Cassettes

Specify the paper size and media type of paper to be used in cassettes.

1Display the screen.

[System Menu/Counter] key > [▲] [] key > [Common Settings] > [OK] key > [▲] [] key >

[Orig./Paper Set.] > [OK] key > [▲] [] key > [Cassette 1 (to 5) Set.] > [OK] key

2Specify the paper size.

1[▲] [] key > [Cassette 1 (to 5) Size] > [OK] key

2Select the paper size, and select the [OK] key.

Item Description

Cassette 1 (to 5) Size*1

*1 Only set this when the size dial on the cassette is set to "Other".

Available options are as follows:

Value

Cassette 1: A4, A5, B5, Folio, 216 × 340 mm, Letter, Legal, Statement, Executive, Oficio II, 16K,

ISO B5, Envelope C5, Custom

Cassettes 2 to 5: A4, A5, B5, B6, Folio, 216 × 340 mm, Letter, Legal, Statement, Executive,

Oficio II, 16K, ISO B5, Envelope #10, Envelope #9, Envelope #6, Envelope Monarch,

Envelope DL, Envelope C5, Oufukuhagaki (Return postcard), Youkei 4, Youkei 2, Custom

Cassette 1 (to 5) Type*2

*2 To change to a media type other than Plain, refer to the following:

MP Tray Set. (MP Tray Settings) (page 8-28)

When a paper weight that cannot be loaded in the cassette is set for a media type, that media type does not appear.

Select the media type.

Value

Cassette 1: Plain (60 to 105 g/m2), Rough, Recycled, Preprinted*3, Bond, Color, Prepunched*3,

Letterhead*3, High Quality, Custom 1 - 8

Cassettes 2 to 5: Plain (60 to 105 g/m2), Rough, Recycled, Preprinted*3, Bond, Color,

Prepunched*3, Letterhead*3, Envelope, High Quality, Custom 1 - 8

*3 To print on preprinted or prepunched paper or on letterhead, refer to the following:

SpecialPaper Act. (page 8-27)

NOTE

• The available media types for printing received faxes are as shown below.

Plain, Labels, Recycled, Bond, Vellum, Color, Envelope, Thick, High Quality, Rough and Custom 1 to 8

• Set the paper size of the cassette used for fax reception as follows:

Inch models: Letter, Legal, Statement

Metric models: A4, B5, A5, Folio

If the above setting is changed, it will not be possible to print faxes.

NOTE

[Cassette 2] to [Cassette 4] are shown when the optional paper feeder is installed.

3-13

Preparation before Use > Loading Paper

3Specify the media type.

1[▲] [] key > [Cassette 1 (to 5) Type] > [OK] key

2Select the media type, and select the [OK] key.

Paper Size and Media Type for the Multi Purpose Tray (MP Tray Setting)

Specify the paper size and media type of paper to be used in the multi purpose tray.

1Display the screen.

[System Menu/Counter] > [▲] [] key > [Common Settings] > [OK] key > [▲] [] key >

[Orig./Paper Set.] > [OK] key > [▲] [] key > [MP Tray Set.] > [OK] key

2Specify the paper size.

1[▲] [] key > [MP Tray Size] > [OK] key

2Select the paper size, and select the [OK] key.

3Specify the media type.

1[▲] [] key > [MP Tray Type] > [OK] key

2Select the media type, and select the [OK] key.

Item Description

MP Tray Size Available options are as follows:

Value: A4, A5, A6, B5, B6, Folio, 216 × 340 mm, Letter, Legal, Statement, Executive, Oficio II,

16K, ISO B5, Envelope #10, Envelope #9, Envelope #6, Envelope Monarch, Envelope DL,

Envelope C5, Hagaki (Cardstock), Oufukuhagaki (Return postcard), Youkei 4, Youkei 2,

Custom*1

*1 For instructions on how to specify the custom paper size, refer to the following:

Custom PaperSize (page 8-26)

MP Tray Type*2

*2 To change to a media type other than "Plain", refer to the following:

MP Tray Set. (MP Tray Settings) (page 8-28)

Select the media type.

Values: Plain (60 to 105 g/m2), Transparency, Rough, Vellum, Labels, Recycled, Preprinted*3,

Bond, Cardstock, Color, Prepunched*3, Letterhead*3, Envelope, Thick (106 to 220 g/m2),

High Quality, Custom 1-8

*3 To print on preprinted or prepunched paper or on letterhead, refer to the following:

SpecialPaper Act. (page 8-27)

NOTE

• The available media types for printing received faxes are as shown below.

Plain, Label, Recycled, Bond, Vellum, Color, Envelope, Cardstock, Thick, High Quality, Rough and Custom 1 to 8

• Set the paper size of the multi purpose tray used for fax reception as follows:

Inch models: Letter, Legal, Statement

Metric models: A4, B5, A5, Folio

If the above setting is changed, it will not be possible to print faxes.

3-14

Preparation before Use > Paper Stopper

Paper Stopper

When using paper A4/Letter or larger, open the paper stopper shown in the figure.

3-15

Preparation before Use > Preparation for Sending a Document to a Shared Folder in a PC

Preparation for Sending a Document to a

Shared Folder in a PC

Check the information that needs to be set on the machine and create a folder to receive the document on your

computer. Screens of Windows 8.1 are used in the following explanation. The details of the screens will vary in other

versions of Windows.

Making a note of the computer name and full

computer name

Check the name of the computer name and full computer name.

1Display the screen.

In Windows 8.1, right-click [PC] in the Start screen and select [Properties]. Or, right-click the

Window icon and select [System].

In Windows 8, select the desktop in the Start screen, right-click [Computer] from [Libraries],

and then select [Properties].

2Check the computer name.

Check the computer name and full computer name.

Screen example:

Computer name: PC001

Full computer name: PC001.abcdnet.com

After checking the computer name, click the [Close] button to close the

"System Properties" screen.

NOTE

Log on to Windows with administrator privileges.

NOTE

In Windows 7, from [Start] button on the Windows, select [Computer] and then [System

Properties].

In Windows 10, right-click [Start] button on the Windows and select [System].

3-16

Preparation before Use > Preparation for Sending a Document to a Shared Folder in a PC

Making a note of the user name and domain name

Check the domain name and user name for logging onto Windows.

1Display the screen.

Click [Search] in charms, and enter "Command Prompt" in the search box. Select [Command

Prompt] in the search list.

In Windows 7, from [Start] button on the Windows, select [All Programs] (or [Programs]),

[Accessories] and then [Command Prompt].

In Windows 10, right-click [Start] button on the Windows and select [Command Prompt].

The Command Prompt window appears.

2Check the domain name and user name.

At the Command Prompt, enter "net config workstation" and then press [Enter].

Check the user name and domain name.

Screen example:

User Name: james.smith

Domain Name: ABCDNET

3-17

Preparation before Use > Preparation for Sending a Document to a Shared Folder in a PC

Creating a Shared Folder, Making a Note of a Shared Folder

Create a shared folder to receive the document in the destination computer.

1Create a folder.

1Create a folder on your computer.

For example, create a folder with the name "scannerdata" on the desktop.

NOTE

If there is a workgroup in System Properties, configure the settings below to limit folder access to a specific user or group.

1Select [Settings] in charms on Desktop, and select [Control Panel], [Appearance and

Personalization], and then [Folder Options].

In Windows 7, from [Start] button on the Windows, select [Control Panel], [Appearance

and Personalization], and then [Folder Options].

In Windows 10, open up a window in File Explorer and select [View], [Options], and then

[Folder Options].

Remove the checkmark from [Use Sharing Wizard (Recommended)] in "Advanced settings".

Make sure that the [View] tab is selected.

3-18

Preparation before Use > Preparation for Sending a Document to a Shared Folder in a PC

2Right-click the "scannerdata" folder, select [Property], and click [Sharing] and

[Advanced Sharing].

2Configure permission settings.

1Select the [Share this folder] checkbox and click the [Permissions] button.

2Make a note of the [Share name].

3Click the [Add] button.

4Specify the location.

3-19

Preparation before Use > Preparation for Sending a Document to a Shared Folder in a PC

5Set the access permission for the user selected.

6Click the [OK] button in the "Advanced Sharing" screen to close the screen.

7Check the details set in the [Security] tab.

1 If the computer name that you made a note of on page 3-15 is the same as the domain

name:

If the computer name is not shown in "From this location", click the [Locations] button,

select the computer name, and click the [OK] button.

Example: PC001

If the computer name that you made a note of on

page 3-15

is not the same as the

domain name:

If the text after the first dot (.) in the full computer name that you made a note of does

not appear in "From this location", click the [Locations] button, select the text after the

dot (.), and click the [OK] button.

Example: abcdnet.com

Making a note of the user name and domain name (page 3-16)

2 Enter the user name that you made a note of on page in the text box, and click the [OK]

button.

Also the user name can be made by clicking the [Advanced] button and selecting a

user.

NOTE

"Everyone" gives sharing permission to everyone on the network. To strengthen

security, it is recommended that you select "Everyone" and remove the "Read" [Allow]

checkmark.

1 Select the user you entered.

2 Select the [Allow] checkbox of the

"Change" and "Read" permissions

3 Press [OK].

3-20

Preparation before Use > Preparation for Sending a Document to a Shared Folder in a PC

1 Select the [Security] tab.

2 Select the user you entered.

If the user does not appear on "Group or

user names", click [Edit] button to add user

in a similar way of "configuration of

permission settings".

3 Make sure that checkmarks appear on

[Allow] checkbox for the "Modify" and

"Read & execute" permissions.

4 Click the [Close] button.

3-21

Preparation before Use > Preparation for Sending a Document to a Shared Folder in a PC

Configuring Windows Firewall

Permit sharing of files and printers and set the port used for SMB transmission.

1Check file and printer sharing.

1In charms on Desktop, click [Settings], [Control Panel], [System and Security], and then

[Windows Firewall].

2Select the [File and Printer Sharing] checkbox.

NOTE

Log on to Windows with administrator privileges.

NOTE

If the User Account Control dialog box appears, click the [Continue] button.

3-22

Preparation before Use > Preparation for Sending a Document to a Shared Folder in a PC

2Add a port.

1In charms on Desktop, click [Settings], [Control Panel], [System and Security], and

[Check firewall status].

2Select [Advanced settings].

3Select [Inbound Rules].

4Select [New Rules].

3-23

Preparation before Use > Preparation for Sending a Document to a Shared Folder in a PC

5Select [Port].

6Select [TCP] as the port to apply the rule to. Then select [Specific local ports] and enter

"445" then click [Next].

7Select [Allow the connection] and click the [Next] button.

3-24

Preparation before Use > Preparation for Sending a Document to a Shared Folder in a PC

8Make sure all checkboxes are selected and click the [Next] button.

9Enter "Scan to SMB" in "Name" and click [Finish].

In Windows 7

1In Windows 7, from [Start] button on the Windows, select [Control Panel], [System and

Security], and then [Allow a program through Windows Firewall].

If the User Account Control dialog box appears, click the [Continue] button.

2Configure the settings.

In Windows 10

1In Windows 10, right-click [Start] button on the Windows and select [Control Panel],

[System and Security], and then [Allow an app through Windows Firewall].

If the User Account Control dialog box appears, click the [Continue] button.

2Configure the settings.

Configuring Windows Firewall (page 3-21)

3-25

Preparation before Use > Registering Destinations in the Address Book

Registering Destinations in the Address Book

Save frequently used destinations to the Address Book or One Touch Keys. The saved destinations can be changed.

The destinations are available for Send as E-mail, Send to Folder, and Fax Transmission (Only on products with the fax

function installed).

Adding a Destination (Address Book)

Add a new destination to the Address Book. There are two registering methods, contacts and groups. When adding a

group, enter the group name and select group members from the Address Book.

Contact (Up to 200)

Each address can include the information such as destination name, E-mail address, FTP server folder path, computer

folder path, and FAX No. (Only on products with the fax function installed).

1Display the screen.

[System Menu/Counter] key > [▲] [] key > [Edit Destination] > [OK] key > [▲] [] key >

[Address Book] > [OK] key > [Menu] > [▲] [] key > [Add Address] > [OK] key >

[▲] [] key > [Contact] > [OK] key

2Add the name.

1[◄] [►] key > [Contact Name] > [Edit]

2Enter the destination name displayed on the Address Book and select the [OK] key.

3Add the address.

E-mail Address

1[◄] [►] key > [E-mailAddress] > [Edit]

2Enter the E-mail address > [OK] key

NOTE

Registering and editing of the Address Book can also be done in Command Center RX.

Registering Destinations (page 2-54)

NOTE

If user login administration is enabled, you can only edit destinations in the Address Book by logging in with

administrator privileges.

NOTE

Up to 32 characters can be entered.

Refer to the following for details on entering characters.

Character Entry Method (page 11-9)

NOTE

Up to 256 characters can be entered.

Refer to the following for details on entering characters.

Character Entry Method (page 11-9)

3-26

Preparation before Use > Registering Destinations in the Address Book

The Folder (SMB) Address

1[◄] [►] key > [Folder (SMB)] > [Edit]

2Enter the information for "Host Name (SMB)", "Path", "Login User Name" and "Login

Password" > [OK] key

The table below explains the items to be entered.

3The connection confirmation screen appears. Select [Yes] to check the connection and

[No] to not check it.

"Connected." appears when connection to the destination is correctly established. If "Cannot

connect." appears, review the entry.

NOTE

For the computer name, share name, domain name, and user name, enter the

information that you noted when you created the shared folder. For details on creating

shared folders, refer to the following:

Preparation for Sending a Document to a Shared Folder in a PC (page 3-15)

Item Description Max. No. of

Characters

Host Name (SMB)*1

*1 To specify a port number different from the default (445), enter using the format

"Host name: port number" (Example: SMBhostname:140).

To enter the IPv6 address, enclose the address in brackets [ ].

(Example: [3ae3:9a0:cd05:b1d2:28a:1fc0:a1:10ae]:140)

Computer name Up to

256 characters

Path Share name

For example:

scannerdata

If saving in a folder in the shared folder:

share name\folder name in shared folder

Up to

260 characters

User Name

For example: james.smith

If the computer name and domain name are different:

Domain name\User name

For example: abcdnet\james.smith

Up to

64 characters

(Case sensitive.)

Up to

64 characters

NOTE

Refer to the following for details on entering characters.

Character Entry Method (page 11-9)

3-27

Preparation before Use > Registering Destinations in the Address Book

The Folder (FTP) Address

1[◄] [►] key > [Folder (FTP)] > [Edit]

2Enter the information for "Host Name (FTP)", "Path", "Login User Name" and "Login

Password" > [OK] key

The table below explains the items to be entered.

3The connection confirmation screen appears. Select [Yes] to check the connection and

[No] to not check it.

"Connected." appears when connection to the destination is correctly established. If "Cannot

connect." appears, review the entry.

4Specify the address number.

1[◄] [►] key > [Address Number] > [Edit]

2Enter an address number.

3Select the [OK] key.

5Check if the destination entry is correct and select the [OK]

key.

The destination is added to the Address Book.

Item Descriptions Max. No. of

Characters

Host Name (FTP)*1

*1 If you specify a port number other than the default (21), use the "Host name: port number" (Example:

FTPhostname:140).

To enter the IPv6 address, enclose the address in brackets [ ].

(Example: [3ae3:9a0:cd05:b1d2:28a:1fc0:a1:10ae]:140)

Host name or IP address of FTP server Up to

64 characters

Path*2

*2 When the FTP server is based on Linux/UNIX, the path including the sub-folder is combined by the

slash "/" not using the back-slash.

Path for the file to be stored

For example: User\ScanData

If no path is entered, the file is stored in the home directory.

Up to

128 characters

64 characters

NOTE

Refer to the following for details on entering characters.

Character Entry Method (page 11-9)

NOTE

You can set any value between 1 and 250.

Use the numeric keys or select the [▲] or [▼] key to enter a number.

Address Number is an ID for a destination. You can select any available number.

If you specify an address number that is already in use, an error message appears when

you select the [OK] key and the number cannot be registered.

3-28

Preparation before Use > Registering Destinations in the Address Book

Group (Up to 50)

Compile two or more contacts into a group. Designations in the group can be added at the same time.

1Display the screen.

[System Menu/Counter] key > [▲] [] key > [Edit Destination] > [OK] key > [▲] [] key >

[Address Book] > [OK] key > [Menu] > [▲] [] key > [Add Address] > [OK] key >

[▲] [] key > [Group] > [OK] key

2Add the name.

1[◄] [►] key > [Group Name] > [Edit]

2Enter the group name displayed on the Address Book and select the [OK] key.

3 Select the members (destinations).

[◄] [►] key > [

Group Member

] > [

Edit

] > [

] > [▲] [



] key > [

Add Member

] > [

] key

2Select the member you want to add, and select the [OK] key.

3Select the destination to be registered in the group from the destinations registered in the

contact addresses and select the [OK] key.

The selected member is added to group member.

Members can be added by repeating steps 3-1 to 3-3.

4Select the [Back] key.

NOTE

To add a group, you need individually added destinations. Register one or more individual destinations as needed

before proceeding. Up to 100 individually registered destinations and a combined total of up to 5 SMB and FTP

destination folders can be registered in a single group.

NOTE

Up to 32 characters can be entered.

Refer to the following for details on entering characters.

Character Entry Method (page 11-9)

NOTE

Select [Menu] and select [Search(Name)] to search using a name.

3-29

Preparation before Use > Registering Destinations in the Address Book

4Specify the address number.

1[◄] [►] key > [Address Number] > [Edit]

2Enter an address number.

3Select the [OK] key.

5Select the [OK] key.

The group is added to the Address Book.

NOTE

• You can set any value between 1 and 250.

• Use the numeric keys or select the [▲] or [▼] key to enter a number.

• Address Number is an ID for a destination. A free number can be selected.

• If you specify an address number that is already in use, an error message appears

when you select the [OK] key and the number cannot be registered.

3-30

Preparation before Use > Registering Destinations in the Address Book

Editing and Deleting Address Book Entries

Edit and delete the destinations (contacts) you added to the Address Book.

1Display the screen.

[System Menu/Counter] key > [▲] [] key > [Edit Destination] > [OK] key > [▲] [] key >

[Address Book] > [OK] key

2Edit or delete the destination.

Editing a Contact

1Select the destination (contacts) to edit, and select the [OK] key.

2Change "Contact Name", destination type and address, and "Address Number".

3After you have completed the changes, [OK] key > [Yes]

Editing a Group

1Select the group to edit, and select the [OK] key.

2Change "Group Name" and "Address Number".

3[◄] [►] key > [Group Member] > [Edit]

4To delete the destination from the group, select the destination > [Menu] > [▲] [] key >

[Delete] > [OK] key

To add the destination, select [Add Member].

5Select [Yes].

6After you have completed the changes, [OK] key > [Yes]

Deleting a Contact or Group

Select the destination (contacts) or group to delete, [Menu] >

[▲] [



] key

> [Delete] >

[OK] key > [Yes]

NOTE

Select [Menu] and select [Search(Name)] to search using a name.

Contact (Up to 200) (page 3-25)

Group (Up to 50) (page 3-28)

NOTE

Select the destination and select the [OK] key to show the detailed information of the

destination.

Group (Up to 50) (page 3-28)

3-31

Preparation before Use > Registering Destinations in the Address Book

Adding a Destination on One Touch Key (One Touch

Key)

Assign a new destination (contact or group) to an one touch key. A maximum of 22 destinations can be registered.

1Select the One Touch Key to be registered.

1In the Send or FAX screen, press the One Touch Key that you want to register and hold it

(2 seconds or more).

2[▲] [] key > key number > [OK] key

Select a One Touch Key number with no registered destination.

2Select the destinations.

1Select the destination (contact or group) you want to register to the One touch key from the

Address Book.

2Select the destination to be registered to the One touch key from the destinations

registered in the addresses and select the [OK] key.

The destination will be added to the One Touch Key.

NOTE

• Numbers 1 to 11 are the One Touch Key numbers while the [Shift Lock] indicator is switched off. Numbers 12 to 22

are the One Touch Key numbers while the [Shift Lock] indicator is switched on by selecting the [Shift Lock] key.

• Refer to the following for use of One Touch Key.

Specifying Destination (page 5-14)

• You can add One Touch keys and change their settings on Command Center RX.

Registering Destinations (page 2-54)

NOTE

Select [Menu] and select [Search(Name)] to search using a name.

3-32

Preparation before Use > Registering Destinations in the Address Book

Editing and Deleting One Touch Key

Edit and delete the destinations you added to One Touch Key.

1Select the One Touch Key to edit or delete.

1Press the One Touch Key to edit or delete and hold it (2 seconds or more).

2[▲] [] key > key number > [OK] key

When an unregistered One Touch Key number is selected, the Address Book appears. The One

Touch Key can be registered by selecting the destination from the Address Book.

2Edit or delete the destination.

Changing the Registered Information

1[▲] [] key > [Edit] > [OK] key

2Select the new destination, and select the [OK] key > [Yes]

Deleting the Registered Information

[▲] [] key > [Delete] > [OK] key > [Yes]

Deletion of the data registered in the One Touch Key.

NOTE

Select [Detail] and select the [OK] key to show the detailed information of the

destination.

4-1

4 Printing from PC

This chapter explains the following topics:

Printing from PC ................................................................................................................................................. 4-2

Printing on Non-standard Sized Paper .................................................................................................... 4-4

Banner printing ........................................................................................................................................ 4-5

Printer Driver Print Settings Screen ......................................................................................................... 4-9

Printer Driver Help ................................................................................................................................. 4-10

Changing the Default Printer Driver Settings (Windows 8.1) ................................................................. 4-10

Canceling Printing from a Computer ...................................................................................................... 4-10

Printing by AirPrint ............................................................................................................................................ 4-11

Printing by Google Cloud Print .......................................................................................................................... 4-11

Printing by Mopria ............................................................................................................................................. 4-11

Printing with Wi-Fi Direct ................................................................................................................................... 4-11

Printing Data Saved on the Printer ................................................................................................................... 4-12

Specifying the Job Box from a Computer and Storing the Job .............................................................. 4-12

Printing Documents from Private Print Box ............................................................................................ 4-13

Printing Document from Stored Job Box ................................................................................................ 4-15

Printing Document from Quick Copy Box .............................................................................................. 4-17

Printing Document from Proof and Hold Box ......................................................................................... 4-19

Status Monitor .................................................................................................................................................. 4-21

Accessing the Status Monitor ................................................................................................................ 4-21

Exiting the Status Monitor ...................................................................................................................... 4-21

Status Monitor Display ........................................................................................................................... 4-21

4-2

Printing from PC > Printing from PC

Printing from PC

Follow the steps below to print documents from applications.

This section provides the printing method using the KX DRIVER.

1Display the screen.

Click [File] and select [Print] in the application.

2Configure the settings.

1Select the machine from the "Name" menu and click the [Properties] button.

NOTE

• To print the document from applications, install the printer driver on your computer from the supplied DVD

(Product Library).

• In some environments, the current settings are displayed at the bottom of the printer driver.

• When printing the cardstock or envelopes, load the cardstock or envelopes in the multi purpose tray before

performing the following procedure.

When you load envelopes or cardstock in the multi purpose tray (page 3-11)

4-3

Printing from PC > Printing from PC

2Select the [Basic] tab.

3Click "Print size" menu and select the paper size to use for printing.

To load the paper of size that is not included in print sizes of the machine such as cardstock or

envelopes, the paper size needs to be registered.

To print on the special paper such as thick paper or transparency, click "Media type" menu and select

the media type.

4Click [OK] button to return to the Print dialog box.

3Start printing.

Click the [OK] button.

Printing on Non-standard Sized Paper (page 4-4)

4-4

Printing from PC > Printing from PC

Printing on Non-standard Sized Paper

If you loaded a paper size that is not included in the print sizes of the machine, register the paper size in the [Basic] tab

of the print settings screen of the printer driver.

The registered size can be selected from the "Print size" menu.

1Display the print settings screen.

2Register the paper size.

NOTE

To execute printing at the machine, set the paper size and type in the following:

Paper Size and Media Type for the Multi Purpose Tray (MP Tray Setting) (page 3-13)

NOTE

If you loaded a postcard or envelope, select [Cardstock] or [Envelope] in the "Media type" menu.

1 Click the [Basic] tab.

2 Click the [Page Size...] button.

3 Click the [New] button.

4 Enter the paper size.

5 Enter the name of the paper.

6 Click the [Save] button.

7 Click the [OK] button.

8 In the "Print size" menu, select the paper size

(name) that you registered in steps 4 to 7.

9 Select the type of paper in the "Media type"

menu.

10 Click [MP tray] in the "Source" menu.

4-5

Printing from PC > Printing from PC

Banner printing

When a document length from 470.1 mm (18.52") to a maximum of 915.0 mm (36.03") is specified for printing, the print

job is treated as banner printing.

Follow the steps below to set banner paper in the printer driver.

1Display the screen.

Click [File] and select [Print] in the application.

2Configure the settings.

1Select the machine from the "Name" menu and click the [Properties] button.

2Select the [Basic] tab.

3Click the [Page Size...] button.

4-6

Printing from PC > Printing from PC

3Register the paper size.

1Click the [New] button.

2Enter the length (470.1 mm (18.52") or longer), and width of the custom paper size being

registered.

3Enter the name of the paper.

4Click the [Save] button.

5Click the [OK] button.

4Configure the print paper size.

1Click "Print size" menu and select the paper size registered in step 3.

2Click the [OK] button.

4-7

Printing from PC > Printing from PC

5Load paper.

1Open the multi purpose tray and extend the support tray section of the multi purpose tray.

2Load paper.

4-8

Printing from PC > Printing from PC

6Start printing.

Click the [OK] button.

When you execute printing in this case, a message appears on the machine's operation panel.

Place the paper in the Multi Purpose tray, continue to support it so that it does not fall, and

select [Continue]. To cancel printing, select [Cancel].

Set whether the confirmation screen appears before each sheet is printed when printing

multiple banner sheets.

IMPORTANT

After pressing [Continue], support the paper with both hands so that it feeds in

correctly.

After printing starts, catch the paper when it is output so that it does not fall. When

using the inner tray as the output location, do not stand up the stopper.

Msg Banner Print (page 8-37)

Use MP tray to print

on this paper.

Cancel Continue

Custom Plain

4-9

Printing from PC > Printing from PC

Printer Driver Print Settings Screen

The printer driver print settings screen allows you to configure a variety of print-related settings.

Printer Driver User Guide

No. Description

1 [Quick Print] tab

Provides icons that can be used to easily configure frequently used functions. Each time you click an icon, it

changes to an image resembling the print results and applies the settings.

[Basic] tab

This tab groups basic functions that are frequently used. You can use it to configure the paper size,

destination, and duplex printing.

[Layout] tab

This tab lets you configure settings for printing various layouts, including booklet printing, combine mode,

poster printing, and scaling.

[Imaging] tab

This tab lets you configure settings related to the quality of the print results.

[Publishing] tab

This tab lets you create covers and inserts for print jobs and put inserts between sheets of OHP film.

[Job] tab

This tab lets you configure settings for saving print data from the computer to the machine. Regularly used

documents and other data can be saved to the machine for easy printing later. Since saved documents can

be printed directly from the machine, this function is also convenient when you wish to print a document that

you don't want others to see.

[Advanced] tab

This tab lets you configure settings for adding text pages or watermarks to print data.

2 [Profiles]

Printer driver settings can be saved as a profile. Saved profiles can be recalled at any time, so it's a

convenient practice to save frequently used settings.

3[Reset]

Click to revert settings to their initial values.

4-10

Printing from PC > Printing from PC

Printer Driver Help

The printer driver includes Help. To learn about print settings, open the printer driver print settings screen and display

Help as explained below.

Changing the Default Printer Driver Settings (Windows 8.1)

The default printer driver settings can be changed. By selecting frequently used settings, you can omit steps when

printing. For the settings, refer to the following:

Printer Driver User Guide

1In charms on Desktop, click [Settings], [Control Panel], and then [Devices and Printers].

2Right-click the printer driver icon of the machine, and click the [Printer properties] menu of

the printer driver.

3Click the [Basic] button on the [General] tab.

4Select the default settings and click the [OK] button.

Canceling Printing from a Computer

To cancel a print job executed using the printer driver before the printer begins printing, do the following:

1Double-click the printer icon ( ) displayed on the taskbar at the bottom right of the

Windows desktop to display a dialog box for the printer.

2Click the file for which you wish to cancel printing and select [Cancel] from the "Document"

menu.

NOTE

When canceling printing from this machine, refer to the following:

Canceling Jobs (page 5-11)

1 Click the [?] button in the upper right corner of the

screen and then click the item you want to know

about.

2 Click the item you want to know about and press

the [F1] key on your keyboard.

4-11

Printing from PC > Printing by AirPrint

Printing by AirPrint

AirPrint is a printing function that is included standard in iOS 4.2 and later products, and Mac OS X 10.7 and later

products.

This function enables you to connect and print to any AirPrint compatible device without installing a printer driver.

To allow the machine to be found when printing by AirPrint, you can set machine location information in Command

Center RX.

Command Center RX User Guide

Printing by Google Cloud Print

Google Cloud Print is a printing service provided by Google and does not require a printer driver. This service enables a

user with a Google account to print from a machine connected to the Internet.

The machine can be configured in the Command Center RX.

Command Center RX User Guide

Printing by Mopria

Mopria is a standard on printing function included in Android 4.4 or later products. Mopria Print Service needs to be

installed and enabled in advance.

For details on how to use, refer to a Web site of Mopria Alliance.

Printing with Wi-Fi Direct

Wi-Fi Direct is a wireless LAN standard that Wi-Fi Alliance has been established. This is one of the functions of the

wireless LAN, without a wireless LAN access point or wireless LAN router, between devices can communicate directly

on a peer to peer basis.

The printing procedure by the Wi-Fi Direct is the same as that from the normal handheld devices.

When you use a printer name or Bonjour name on the port settings of the printer property, you can print the job by

specifying the name at Wi-Fi Direct connection.

When you use an IP address for the port, specify the IP address of this machine.

NOTE

A Google account is necessary to use Google Cloud Print. Obtain a Google account if you do not have one.

It is also necessary to register the machine with the Google Cloud Print service in advance. The machine can be

registered from a PC connected to the same network.

4-12

Printing from PC > Printing Data Saved on the Printer

Printing Data Saved on the Printer

If you configure settings in the [Job] tab of the printer driver and then print, the print job will be saved in the Job Box

(memory) and printing can be executed at the machine.

Follow the work flow below when using Job Box.

Specifying the Job Box from a computer and sending the print job. (page 4-12)

Using the operation panel to specify a file within a Box and printing it.

You can print the documents from the following boxes.

Printing Documents from Private Print Box (page 4-13)

Printing Document from Stored Job Box (page 4-15)

Printing Document from Quick Copy Box (page 4-17)

Printing Document from Proof and Hold Box (page 4-19)

Specifying the Job Box from a Computer and Storing

the Job

Use the procedure below to store data in a Job Box.

1Click [File] and select [Print] in the application. The Print dialog box displays.

2Select the machine from the "Name" menu.

3Click the [Properties] button. The Properties dialog box displays.

4Click the [Job] tab and select the [Job storage (e-MPS)] check box to set the function.

NOTE

• To use Stored Job Box and Quick Copy Box, an optional SSD must be installed in the

machine.

• For information on how to use the printer driver software, refer to the following:

Printer Driver User Guide

4-13

Printing from PC > Printing Data Saved on the Printer

Printing Documents from Private Print Box

In Private Printing, you can specify that a job is not to be printed until you operate the machine. When sending the job

from the application software, specify a 4-digit access code in the printer driver. The job is released for printing by

entering the access code on the operation panel, ensuring confidentiality of the print job. The data will be deleted upon

completion of the print job or after the power switch is turned off.

The following operations are possible:

Printing the Documents (page 4-13)

Deleting the Documents (page 4-14)

Printing the Documents

Print the documents stored in a Private Print box. The procedure is as follows.

1Display the screen.

1[Document Box/USB] key > [▲] [] key > [Job Box] > [OK] key > [▲] [] key >

[Private Print] > [OK] key

2Select the creator of the document, and select the [OK] key.

2Print the document.

1Select the document to print, and [Select] > [OK] key.

The file is selected. A checkmark will be placed on the right of the selected file.

Select the checkmarked file and select [Select] again to cancel the selection.

2[▲] [] key > [Print] > [OK] key

3Specify the number of copies to print as desired, and the [OK] key > [Yes].

Printing starts.

Upon completion of printing, the Private Print job is automatically deleted.

NOTE

Display [Private/Stored] when SD Card is mounted.

NOTE

Select [Menu] to perform the following operations.

• [Select All]: Select all files.

• [Clear All]: Cancel all the file selections.

• [Detail]: Display the details for the selected document.

NOTE

If the document is protected by an access code, the password entry screen will be

displayed. Enter the password using the numeric keys.

4-14

Printing from PC > Printing Data Saved on the Printer

Deleting the Documents

Delete the documents stored in a Private Print box. The procedure is as follows.

1Display the screen.

1[Document Box/USB] key > [▲] [] key > [Job Box] > [OK] key > [▲] [] key >

[Private Print] > [OK] key

2Select the creator of the document, and select the [OK] key.

2Delete the document.

1Select the document to delete, and [Select] > [OK] key.

The file is selected. A checkmark will be placed on the right of the selected file.

Select the checkmarked file and select [Select] again to cancel the selection.

2[▲] [] key > [Delete] > [OK] key > [Yes]

The document is deleted.

NOTE

Display [Private/Stored] when SD Card is mounted.

NOTE

Select [Menu] to perform the following operations.

• [Select All]: Select all files.

• [Clear All]: Cancel all the file selections.

• [Detail]: Display the details for the selected document.

NOTE

If the document is protected by an access code, the password entry screen will be

displayed. Enter the password using the numeric keys.

4-15

Printing from PC > Printing Data Saved on the Printer

Printing Document from Stored Job Box

In Stored Job, the print data sent from the application is saved to the machine. You can set up an access code as

necessary. If you set up an access code, enter the access code when printing. Print data will be stored in the Stored Job

Box after printing. This will allow printing of the same print data repeatedly.

The following operations are possible:

Printing the Documents (page 4-15)

Deleting the Documents (page 4-16)

Printing the Documents

Print the documents stored in a Stored Job box. The procedure is as follows.

1Display the screen.

1[Document Box/USB] key > [▲] [▼] key > [Job Box] > [OK] key > [▲] [▼] key >

[Private Print] > [OK] key

2Select the creator of the document, and select the [OK] key.

2Print the document.

1Select the document to print, and [Select] > [OK] key.

The file is selected. A checkmark will be placed on the right of the selected file.

Select the checkmarked file and select [Select] again to cancel the selection.

2[▲] [] key > [Print] > [OK] key

3Specify the number of copies to print as desired, and the [OK] key > [Yes].

Printing starts.

NOTE

Display [Private/Stored] when SD Card is mounted.

NOTE

Select [Menu] to perform the following operations.

• [Select All]: Select all files.

• [Clear All]: Cancel all the file selections.

• [Detail]: Display the details for the selected document.

NOTE

If the document is protected by an access code, the password entry screen will be

displayed. Enter the password using the numeric keys.

4-16

Printing from PC > Printing Data Saved on the Printer

Deleting the Documents

Delete the documents stored in a Stored Job box. The procedure is as follows.

1Display the screen.

1[Document Box/USB] key > [▲] [] key > [Job Box] > [OK] key > [▲] [] key >

[Private Print] > [OK] key

2Select the creator of the document, and select the [OK] key.

2Print and delete the document.

1Select the document to delete, and [Select] > [OK] key.

The file is selected. A checkmark will be placed on the right of the selected file.

Select the checkmarked file and select [Select] again to cancel the selection.

2[▲] [▼] key > [Delete] > [OK] key > [Yes]

The document is deleted.

NOTE

Display [Private/Stored] when SD Card is mounted.

NOTE

Select [Menu] to perform the following operations.

• [Select All]: Select all files.

• [Clear All]: Cancel all the file selections.

• [Detail]: Display the details for the selected document.

NOTE

If the document is protected by an access code, the password entry screen will be

displayed. Enter the password using the numeric keys.

4-17

Printing from PC > Printing Data Saved on the Printer

Printing Document from Quick Copy Box

Quick Copy feature facilitates additional prints of a document already printed. Activating Quick Copy and printing a

document using the printer driver allow the print data to be stored in the Quick Copy Job Box. When additional copies

are required, you can reprint the required number of copies from the operation panel. By default, up to 32 documents

can be stored. When power is turned off, all stored jobs will be deleted.

The following operations are possible:

Printing the Documents (page 4-17)

Deleting the Documents (page 4-18)

Printing the Documents

You can print the documents stored in the Quick Copy box. The procedure is as follows.

1Display the screen.

1[Document Box/USB] key > [▲] [] key > [Job Box] > [OK] key > [▲] [] key >

[Proof and Hold] > [OK] key

2Select the creator of the document, and select the [OK] key.

2Print the document.

1Select the document to print, and [Select] > [OK] key.

The file is selected. A checkmark will be placed on the right of the selected file.

Select the checkmarked file and select [Select] again to cancel the selection.

2[▲] [] key > [Print] > [OK] key

3Specify the number of copies to print as desired, and the [OK] key > [Yes].

Printing starts.

NOTE

• When the number of jobs reaches the limit, the oldest job will be overwritten by the new one.

• To maintain free space on the box, you can set the maximum number of stored jobs.

Quick Copy Jobs (page 8-42)

NOTE

Display [Quick/Proof] when SD Card is mounted.

NOTE

Select [Menu] to perform the following operations.

• [Select All]: Select all files.

• [Clear All]: Cancel all the file selections.

• [Detail]: Display the details for the selected document.

4-18

Printing from PC > Printing Data Saved on the Printer

Deleting the Documents

You can delete the documents stored in the Quick Copy box. The procedure is as follows.

1Display the screen.

1[Document Box/USB] key > [▲] [] key > [Job Box] > [OK] key > [▲] [] key >

[Proof and Hold] > [OK] key

2Select the creator of the document, and select the [OK] key.

2Delete the document.

1Select the document to delete, and [Select] > [OK] key.

The file is selected. A checkmark will be placed on the right of the selected file.

Select the checkmarked file and select [Select] again to cancel the selection.

2[▲] [] key > [Delete] > [OK] key > [Yes]

The document is deleted.

NOTE

Display [Quick/Proof] when SD Card is mounted.

NOTE

Select [Menu] to perform the following operations.

• [Select All]: Select all files.

• [Clear All]: Cancel all the file selections.

• [Detail]: Display the details for the selected document.

4-19

Printing from PC > Printing Data Saved on the Printer

Printing Document from Proof and Hold Box

The Proof and Hold feature produces only a single proof print of multiple-print job and holds printing of the remaining

copies. Printing a multiple-print job in Proof and Hold using the printer driver allows only a single copy to be printed while

maintaining the document data in the Job Box. To continue to print the remaining copies, use the operation panel. You

can change the number of copies to print.

The following operations are possible:

Printing the Documents (page 4-19)

Deleting the Documents (page 4-20)

Printing the Documents

You can print the documents stored in the Proof and Hold box. The procedure is as follows.

1Display the screen.

1[Document Box/USB] key > [▲] [] key > [Job Box] > [OK] key > [▲] [] key >

[Proof and Hold] > [OK] key

2Select the creator of the document, and select the [OK] key.

2Print the document.

1Select the document to print, and [Select] > [OK] key.

The file is selected. A checkmark will be placed on the right of the selected file.

Select the checkmarked file and select [Select] again to cancel the selection.

2[▲] [] key > [Print] > [OK] key

3Specify the number of copies to print as desired, and the [OK] key > [Yes].

Printing starts.

NOTE

Display [Quick/Proof] when SD Card is mounted.

NOTE

Select [Menu] to perform the following operations.

• [Select All]: Select all files.

• [Clear All]: Cancel all the file selections.

• [Detail]: Display the details for the selected document.

4-20

Printing from PC > Printing Data Saved on the Printer

Deleting the Documents

You can delete the documents stored in the Proof and Hold box. The procedure is as follows.

1Display the screen.

1[Document Box/USB] key > [▲] [] key > [Job Box] > [OK] key > [▲] [] key >

[Proof and Hold] > [OK] key

2Select the creator of the document, and select the [OK] key.

2Delete the document.

1Select the document to delete, and [Select] > [OK] key.

The file is selected. A checkmark will be placed on the right of the selected file.

Select the checkmarked file and select [Select] again to cancel the selection.

2[▲] [] key > [Delete] > [OK] key > [Yes]

The document is deleted.

NOTE

Display [Quick/Proof] when SD Card is mounted.

NOTE

Select [Menu] to perform the following operations.

• [Select All]: Select all files.

• [Clear All]: Cancel all the file selections.

• [Detail]: Display the details for the selected document.

4-21

Printing from PC > Status Monitor

Status Monitor

The Status Monitor monitors the printer status and provides an ongoing reporting function.

Accessing the Status Monitor

The Status Monitor also starts up when printing is started.

Exiting the Status Monitor

Use either of the methods listed below to exit the Status Monitor.

• Exit manually:

Click the settings icon and select Exit in the menu to exit the Status Monitor.

• Exit automatically:

The Status Monitor automatically shuts down after 7 minutes if it is not being used.

Status Monitor Display

The display of the Status Monitor is as follows.

Quick View State

The status of the printer is displayed using icons. Detailed information is displayed when the Expand button is clicked.

Detailed information is displayed by clicking on each icon tab.

NOTE

When you activate Status Monitor, check the status below.

• KX DRIVER is installed.

Expand button

Alert Tab

Toner Status Tab

Paper Tray Status Tab

Printing Progress Tab

Settings icon

4-22

Printing from PC > Status Monitor

Printing Progress Tab

The status of the print jobs is displayed.

Select a job on the job list and it can be canceled using the menu displayed with a right-click.

Paper Tray Status Tab

Information is displayed about the paper in the printer and about the amount of paper remaining.

Toner Status Tab

The amount of toner remaining is displayed.

Status icon

Job list

4-23

Printing from PC > Status Monitor

Alert Tab

If an error occurs, a notice is displayed using a 3D image and a message.

Status Monitor Context Menu

The following menu is displayed when the settings icon is clicked.

•Command Center RX

If the printer is connected to a TCP/IP network and has its own IP address, use a web browser to access the

Command Center RX to modify or confirm the network settings.This menu is not displayed when using USB

connection.

Command Center RX User Guide

•Notification…

This sets the display of the Status Monitor.

Status Monitor Notification Settings (page 4-24)

•www.kyoceradocumentsolutions.com

Open our website.

•Exit

Exits the Status Monitor.

4-24

Printing from PC > Status Monitor

Status Monitor Notification Settings

The Status Monitor settings and event list details are displayed.

Select whether notification is performed when an error in the event list occurs.

1Select Enable event notification.

If this setting is set to Off, then the Status Monitor will not start up even when printing is

executed.

2Select an event to use with the text to speech function in

Available events.

3Click Sound file / Text to Speech column.

Click the browse (...) button to notify the event by sound file.

When customizing the message texts to read on the screen aloud, enter the texts in the text

box.

NOTE

The available file format is WAV.

5-1

Operation on the Machine

This chapter explains the following topics:

Loading Originals ............................................................................................................................................... 5-2

Placing Originals on the Platen ................................................................................................................ 5-2

Loading Originals in the Document Processor ........................................................................................ 5-3

Program ............................................................................................................................................................. 5-5

Registering Programs .............................................................................................................................. 5-5

Confirming the Registered Program ........................................................................................................ 5-6

Recalling Program ................................................................................................................................... 5-6

Overwriting Program ................................................................................................................................ 5-7

Deleting Program ..................................................................................................................................... 5-7

Select Key Settings ............................................................................................................................................ 5-8

Copying .............................................................................................................................................................. 5-9

Basic Operation ....................................................................................................................................... 5-9

Canceling Jobs ....................................................................................................................................... 5-11

Sending ............................................................................................................................................................ 5-12

Basic Operation ..................................................................................................................................... 5-13

Specifying Destination ........................................................................................................................... 5-14

Checking and Editing Destinations ........................................................................................................ 5-20

Confirmation Screen of Destinations ..................................................................................................... 5-21

Recall ..................................................................................................................................................... 5-22

Send to Me (E-mail) ............................................................................................................................... 5-22

Sending to Different Types of Destinations (Multi Sending) ................................................................... 5-23

Canceling Sending Jobs ........................................................................................................................ 5-24

WSD Scan ............................................................................................................................................. 5-25

Using fax server to send a fax (fax server transmission) ....................................................................... 5-27

Scanning using TWAIN or WIA .............................................................................................................. 5-29

How to use the FAX Function .......................................................................................................................... 5-30

What is Document Box? .................................................................................................................................. 5-31

Using a Custom Box ........................................................................................................................................ 5-33

Creating a New Custom Box ................................................................................................................. 5-33

Editing and Deleting Custom Box .......................................................................................................... 5-35

Storing Documents ................................................................................................................................ 5-35

Printing Documents ................................................................................................................................ 5-36

Editing Documents ................................................................................................................................. 5-37

Deleting Documents ............................................................................................................................... 5-38

Printing Documents Stored in Removable USB Memory ................................................................................. 5-39

Saving Documents to USB Memory (Scan to USB) ......................................................................................... 5-41

Check the USB Memory Information ............................................................................................................... 5-42

Removing USB Memory .................................................................................................................................. 5-43

5-2

Operation on the Machine > Loading Originals

Loading Originals

Placing Originals on the Platen

You may place books or magazines on the platen in addition to ordinary sheet originals.

When you place envelopes or cardstock on the platen

NOTE

For details on Original Orientation, refer to the following:

Orig. Orientation (Original Orientation) (page 6-11)

NOTE

For the procedure for feeding envelopes or cardstock, refer to the following:

When you load envelopes or cardstock in the multi purpose tray (page 3-11)

CAUTION

Do not leave the document processor open as there is a danger of personal injury.

IMPORTANT

• Do not push the document processor forcefully when you close it. Excessive pressure may crack the platen

glass.

• When placing books or magazines on the machine, do so with the document processor in the open

position.

1 Put the scanning side facedown.

2 Align it flush against the original

size indicator plates with the back

left corner as the reference point.

1 Put the scanning side facedown.

2 Align it flush against the original

size indicator plates with the

back left corner as the reference

point.

5-3

Operation on the Machine > Loading Originals

Loading Originals in the Document Processor

The document processor automatically scans each sheet of multiple originals. Both sides of two-sided originals are

scanned.

Originals Supported by the Document Processor

The document processor supports the following types of originals.

Originals Not Supported by the Document Processor

Do not use the document processor for the following types of originals. Otherwise, the originals may be jammed or the

document processor may become dirty.

• Originals bound with clips or staples (Remove the clips or staples and straighten curls, wrinkles or creases before

loading. Failure to do so may cause the originals to jam.)

• Originals with adhesive tape or glue

• Originals with cut-out sections

• Curled original

• Originals with folds (Straighten the folds before loading. Failure to do so may cause the originals to jam.)

• Carbon paper

• Crumpled paper

How to Load Originals

1Adjust the original width guides.

Weight 50 to 120 g/m2

(duplex: 50 to 120 g/m2)

Sizes Maximum 216 x 355.6 mm (Long-sized 216 x 915 mm) to Minimum 105 x 148 mm

No. of sheets 75 sheets or less (50 to 80 g/m2)

IMPORTANT

• Before loading originals, be sure that there are no originals left on the original eject table. Originals left on

the original eject table may cause the new originals to jam.

• Do not make an impact on the document processor top cover, such as aligning the originals on the top

cover. It may cause an error in the document processor.

5-4

Operation on the Machine > Loading Originals

2Place the originals.

1Put the side to be scanned (or the first side of two-sided originals) face-up. Slide the

leading edge into the document processor as far as it will go.

2Open the original stopper to fit the size of the original set.

NOTE

For details on Original Orientation, refer to the following:

Orig. Orientation (Original Orientation) (page 6-11)

IMPORTANT

Confirm that the original width guides exactly fit the originals. If there is a gap,

readjust the original width guides. The gap may cause the originals to jam.

Ensure that loaded originals do not exceed the level indicator. Exceeding the

maximum level may cause the originals to jam.

Originals with punched holes or perforated lines should be placed in such a way

that the holes or perforations will be scanned last (not first).

A4, Letter, Legal B5 or less

5-5

Operation on the Machine > Program

Program

By registering sets of frequently used functions as a single program, you can simply select one of the [Program I] to

[Program IV] keys as needed to recall those functions.

The following functions are already registered in [Program I] key. This function allows you to copy the front and back

sides of ID card or other document that is smaller than Statement or A5 size onto a single page. Although the functions

are deleted by overwriting [Program I] key, you can register the same settings using the [Function Menu] key.

• Paper Selection: Cassette 1

• Zoom: Auto

• Combine: 2 in 1

• Original Size: Statement (Inch models)/A5 (Metric models)

• Continuous Scan: On

Registering Programs

Use the procedure below to register a program.

1Configure the settings of the functions.

Configure the settings of the functions you want to register in a program.

For the settings of functions, refer to the following:

NOTE

• It is possible to register the copy function, sending function and fax function in a program. (The fax function can be

registered or recalled only on products with the fax function installed).

• If user login administration is enabled, you can only register functions by logging in with administrator privileges.

Using Various Functions (page 6-1)

NOTE

In the case of the sending function and fax function, a destination is also registered in the

program.

5-6

Operation on the Machine > Program

2Register the program.

Press the one of the [Program I] to [Program IV] keys where you want to register the settings

and hold it (2 seconds or more).

The current settings are registered to the selected program key.

Confirming the Registered Program

The settings of the registered program can be confirmed by recalling the program.

Recalling Program (page 5-6)

Recalling Program

Select the one of the [Program I] to [Program IV] keys where the settings you want to recall are registered. The current

settings of various functions are replaced with the registered settings.

Place the originals and press the [Start] key.

5-7

Operation on the Machine > Program

Overwriting Program

You can change program. Use the procedure below to edit the program.

1Configure the settings of the functions.

Set the function to change.

For the settings of functions, refer to the following:

2Overwrite the program.

1Press the one of the [Program I] to [Program IV] keys to change and hold it (2 seconds or

more).

2[▲] [] key > [Overwrite] > [OK] key > [Yes]

Deleting Program

You can delete program.

1Display the screen.

Press the one of the [Program I] to [Program IV] keys to delete and hold it (2 seconds or

more).

2Delete the program.

[▲] [] key > [Delete] > [OK] key > [Yes]

Using Various Functions (page 6-1)

NOTE

In the case of the sending function and fax function, a destination is also registered in the

program.

5-8

Operation on the Machine > Select Key Settings

Select Key Settings

Commonly used functions can be registered to the Select key. Functions can be easily configured by selecting the

Select key.

Functions can be registered in Select keys from the system menu.

Copy (page 8-38)

Send (page 8-41)

Document Box (page 8-42)

5-9

Operation on the Machine > Copying

Copying

Basic Operation

Follow the steps as below for basic copying.

1Select the [Copy] key.

2Place the originals.

Place the originals.

Check the original size and the paper size.

Loading Originals (page 5-2)

NOTE

For selecting the original size, refer to the following:

Original Size (page 6-9)

For selecting the paper source, refer to the following:

Paper Selection (page 6-10)

A4 A4

Quiet Paper

Off

1 Original size

2 Paper size

5-10

Operation on the Machine > Copying

3Select the functions.

Select the [Function Menu] key to select the copier functions to use.

4Use the numeric keys to enter the copy quantity.

Specify the desired number up to 999.

5Press the [Start] key.

Copying begins.

Copy (page 6-3)

NOTE

This function allows you to reserve the next job during printing. Using this function, the

original will be scanned while the machine is printing. When the current print job ends, the

reserved copy job is printed. If "Reserve Priority" is set to [Off], [NextCopy] will appear.

Select [NextCopy] and configure the necessary settings for the copy job.

Reserve Priority (page 8-38)

Copying...

Cancel NextCopy

Job No.

Page(s)

Copies

9999

999

999/999

5-11

Operation on the Machine > Copying

Canceling Jobs

You can also cancel jobs by selecting the [Stop] key.

1Select the [Stop] key with the copy screen displayed.

2Cancel a job.

1[▲] [] key > [Cancel Print Job] > [OK] key

2Select the job to cancel, and [Menu].

3[▲] [] key > [Cancel Job] > [OK] key

4Select [Yes].

The job is canceled.

NOTE

Select [Detail] and the [OK] key to show the detailed information of the job.

NOTE

During scanning, the job can be canceled by selecting the [Stop] key or [Cancel].

5-12

Operation on the Machine > Sending

Sending

This machine can send a scanned image as an attachment of an E-mail message or to a PC linked to the network. In

order to do this, it is necessary to register the sender and destination (recipient) address on the network.

A network environment which enables the machine to connect to a mail server is required in order to send E-mail. It is

recommended that a Local Area Network (LAN) be used to assist with transmission speed and security issues.

Follow the steps below for basic sending. The following four options are available.

• Send as E-mail (E-mail Addr Entry): Sends a scanned original image as an E-mail attachment. (Refer to page 5-14

and page 5-16.)

• Send to Folder (SMB): Stores a scanned original image in a shared folder of any PC. (Refer to page 5-13.)

• Send to Folder (FTP): Stores a scanned original image in a folder of an FTP server. (Refer to page 5-13.)

• Image Data Scanning with TWAIN / WIA: Scan the document using a TWAIN or WIA compatible application program.

(Refer to page 5-29.)

NOTE

• Different sending options can be specified in combination.

Sending to Different Types of Destinations (Multi Sending) (page 5-23)

• The fax function can be used on products equipped with fax capability.

FAX Operation Guide

5-13

Operation on the Machine > Sending

Basic Operation

1Select the [Send] key.

2Place the originals.

Place the originals.

3Specify the destination.

Select the destination to which to send an image.

Choosing a Destination from the External Address Book

For details on the External Address Book, refer to the following:

Choosing a Destination from the FAX

For more information on using the FAX, refer to the following:

4Select the functions.

Select the [Function Menu] key to select the send functions to use.

5Press the [Start] key.

Sending starts.

Loading Originals (page 5-2)

Specifying Destination (page 5-14)

Command Center RX User Guide

FAX Operation Guide

Send (page 6-4)

5-14

Operation on the Machine > Sending

Specifying Destination

Select the destination using either of the following methods:

Choosing from the Address Book (page 5-14)

Choosing from the External Address Book

For details on the External Address Book, refer to the following:

Command Center RX User Guide

Choosing from the One Touch Key (page 5-16)

Entering an E-mail Address (page 5-16)

Specifying a New PC Folder (page 5-17)

Choosing from the FAX

FAX Operation Guide

Choosing from the Address Book

Select a destination registered in the Address Book.

For more information about how to register destinations in the Address Book, refer to the following:

Registering Destinations in the Address Book (page 3-25)

1In the basic screen for sending, select the [Address Book] key.

2Select the destinations.

1[▲] [] key > [Address Book] > [OK] key

2Select the destination.

NOTE

• You can set the machine up so that the address book screen appears when you select the [Send] key.

Default Screen (page 8-41)

• If you are using the products equipped with the fax function, you can specify the fax destination. Enter the other

party number using the numeric keypad.

NOTE

For details on the External Address Book, refer to the following:

Command Center RX User Guide

NOTE

When checking information of the destination, select [Menu] > [Details] > [OK] key

5-15

Operation on the Machine > Sending

Destination Search

The destination can be searched by name.

1[Menu] > [▲] [] key > [Search (Name)] > [OK] key

2Enter characters to search using the numeric keys.

3Select the [OK] key.

The searched destination is displayed.

3Select the [OK] key.

To send to multiple destinations, repeat steps 1 to 3. You can send to as many as 100

destinations at once.

Destinations can be changed later.

NOTE

For details on entering characters, refer to the following:

Character Entry Method (page 11-9)

Checking and Editing Destinations (page 5-20)

5-16

Operation on the Machine > Sending

Choosing from the One Touch Key

Select the destination using the One Touch Keys.

In the basic screen for sending, select the One Touch Keys where the destination is registered.

When selecting One Touch Key numbers 12 to 22, the One touch Key needs to be selected after switching on the [Shift

Lock] indicator by selecting the [Shift Lock] key.

Destinations can be changed later.

Checking and Editing Destinations (page 5-20)

Entering an E-mail Address

Enter the desired E-mail address.

1In the basic screen for sending, select [▲] [▼] key > [E-mail] >

[OK] key

2Enter destination E-mail address.

3Select the [OK] key.

To send to multiple destinations, select the [Confirm/Add Destination] key. You can send to

as many as 100 destinations at once.

Destinations can be changed later.

NOTE

This procedure assumes that One Touch Keys have already been registered.

For more information on adding One Touch keys, refer to the following:

Adding a Destination on One Touch Key (One Touch Key) (page 3-31)

NOTE

To send an E-mail, configure the environment settings necessary.

E-mail Settings (page 2-50)

NOTE

For details on entering characters, refer to the following:

Character Entry Method (page 11-9)

Checking and Editing Destinations (page 5-20)

5-17

Operation on the Machine > Sending

Specifying a New PC Folder

Specify either the desired shared folder on a computer or an FTP server as the destination.

1In the basic screen for sending, select [▲] [▼] key >

[Folder(SMB)] or [Folder(FTP)] > [OK] key

2Enter the destination information.

The table below explains the items to be entered. Enter the information for each item and

select the [OK] key.

NOTE

When selecting [On] for Entry Check for New Destination, the confirmation screen appears.

Check New Dest. (page 8-41)

Enter the same E-mail address again, and select the [OK] key.

NOTE

• For the method for setting a shared folder destination on a PC, refer to the following:

Preparation for Sending a Document to a Shared Folder in a PC (page 3-15)

• For details on how to share a folder, refer to the following:

Creating a Shared Folder, Making a Note of a Shared Folder (page 3-17)

• Be sure that SMB Protocol or FTP is On.

ProtocolSettings (page 8-12)

NOTE

• For the computer name, share name, domain name, and user name, enter the information

that you noted when you created the shared folder. For details on creating shared folders,

refer to the following:

Making a note of the computer name and full computer name (page 3-15)

• For details on entering characters, refer to the following:

Character Entry Method (page 11-9)

5-18

Operation on the Machine > Sending

For send to folder (SMB)

For send to folder (FTP)

Item Detail Max.

characters

Host Name (SMB)*1

*1 To specify a port number different from the default (445), enter using the format

"Host name: port number" (Example: SMBhostname:140).

To enter the IPv6 address, enclose the address in brackets [ ].

(Example: [3ae3:9a0:cd05:b1d2:28a:1fc0:a1:10ae]:140)

Computer name Up to

256 characters

Path Share name

For example:

scannerdata

If saving in a folder in the shared folder:

share name\folder name in shared folder

Up to

260 characters

User Name

For example: james.smith

If the computer name and domain name are different:

Domain name\User name

For example: abcdnet\james.smith

Up to

64 characters

(Case sensitive.)

Up to

64 characters

Item Data to be entered Max.

characters

Host Name (FTP)*1

*1 If you specify a port number other than the default (21), use the "Host name: port number" (Example:

FTPhostname:140).

To enter the IPv6 address, enclose the address in brackets [ ].

(Example: [3ae3:9a0:cd05:b1d2:28a:1fc0:a1:10ae]:140)

Host name or IP address of FTP server Up to

64 characters

Path*2

*2 When the FTP server is based on Linux/UNIX, the path including the sub-folder is combined by the

slash "/" not using the back-slash.

Path to the receiving folder

For example: User\ScanData

Otherwise the data will be saved in the home directory.

Up to

128 characters

64 characters

(Case sensitive.)

Up to

64 characters

5-19

Operation on the Machine > Sending

3Confirm the information.

The connection confirmation screen appears. Select [Yes] to check the connection and [No] to

not check it.

"Connected." appears when connection to the destination is correctly established. If "Cannot

connect." appears, review the entry.

To send to multiple destinations, repeat steps 1 to 3.

Destinations can be changed later.

Checking and Editing Destinations (page 5-20)

5-20

Operation on the Machine > Sending

Checking and Editing Destinations

Check and edit a selected destination.

1Display the screen.

Specify the destination.

2Check and edit the destination.

Select the [Confirm/Add Destination] key.

Add the destination

1Select [Add].

2Set the destinations to be added.

Edit the destination

1Select the destination you want to edit, and select the [OK] key.

2[▲] [▼] key > [Detail/Edit] > [OK] key

3Edit the destinations > [OK] key

Delete the destination

1Select the destination you want to delete, and select the [OK] key.

2[▲] [▼] key > [Delete] > [OK] key > [Yes]

3Select [Exit].

Specifying Destination (page 5-14)

NOTE

To edit a destination registered in the address book or a One Touch Key, refer to the

following:

Editing and Deleting Address Book Entries (page 3-30)

Editing and Deleting One Touch Key (page 3-32)

NOTE

When selecting [On] for Destination Check before Send, the confirmation screen appears

after pressing the [Start] key.

Check beforeSend (page 8-41)

Confirmation Screen of Destinations (page 5-21)

5-21

Operation on the Machine > Sending

Confirmation Screen of Destinations

When selecting [On] for Destination Check before Send, the confirmation screen of destinations appears after pressing

the [Start] key.

DestinationCheck (page 8-41)

Follow the steps below to confirm the destinations.

1Confirm all destination.

To show the detailed information of the destination, select the destination and [OK] key >

[▲] [▼] key > [Detail] > [OK] key

To delete the destination, select the destination you want to delete and [OK] key > [▲] [▼] key >

[Delete] > [OK] key > [Yes]

The destination is deleted.

2Select [Next].

NOTE

Be sure to confirm all destination by displaying them on the message display. You cannot

select [Next] unless you have confirmed all destination.

5-22

Operation on the Machine > Sending

Recall

Recall is a function allowing you to send the last entered destination once again. When you want to send the image to

the same destination, select the [Address Recall/Pause] key, and you can call the destination you sent on the

destination list.

1Select the [Address Recall/Pause] key.

The destination you sent is displayed on the destination list.

2Press the [Start] key.

Sending starts.

Send to Me (E-mail)

When user login is enabled, the document is sent to the E-mail address of the logged in user.

1In the basic screen for sending, select [▲] [▼] key >

[Me(E-mail)] > [OK] key

NOTE

When the last sending included FAX, computers and E-mail destinations, they are also

displayed. If necessary, add or delete the destination.

NOTE

• When [On] is selected in "Check beforeSend", a destination confirmation screen is

displayed when you press the [Start] key.

Confirmation Screen of Destinations (page 5-21)

• Recall information is canceled in the following conditions.

- When you turn the power off

- When you send a next image (new recall information is registered)

- When you log out

NOTE

An E-mail address must be set in user login for the user who logs in.

Adding a User (Local User List) (page 9-6)

5-23

Operation on the Machine > Sending

Sending to Different Types of Destinations (Multi

Sending)

You can specify destinations that combine E-mail addresses, folders (SMB or FTP) and fax numbers (Fax functionality

can only be used on products equipped with fax capability.). This is referred to as Multi Sending. This is useful for

sending to different types of destination (E-mail addresses, folders, etc.) in a single operation.

No. of broadcast items

E-mail: Up to 100

Folders (SMB, FTP): Total of 5 SMB and FTP

FAX: Up to 100

Procedures are the same as used in specifying the destinations of respective types. Continue to enter E-mail address or

folder path so that they appear in the destination list. Press the [Start] key to start transmission to all destinations at one

time.

NOTE

If the destinations include a fax, the images sent to all destinations will be black and white.

5-24

Operation on the Machine > Sending

Canceling Sending Jobs

You can also cancel jobs by selecting the [Stop] key.

1Select the [Stop] key with the send screen displayed.

The [Job Cancel List] menu appears.

2Cancel jobs.

1[▲] [▼] key > [Cancel Send Job] > [OK] key

2Select the job to cancel, and [Menu].

3[▲] [▼] key > [Cancel Job] > [OK] key

4Select [Yes].

The job is canceled.

NOTE

Selecting the [

Stop

] key will not temporarily stop a job that you have already started sending.

NOTE

Select [Detail] and the [OK] key to show the detailed information of the job.

NOTE

During scanning, the job can be canceled by selecting the [Stop] key or [Cancel].

5-25

Operation on the Machine > Sending

WSD Scan

WSD Scan saves images of originals scanned on this machine as files on a WSD-compatible computer.

Installing Driver Software (for Windows 7)

1Display [Network] in the Start menu.

Click [Start] button on the Windows and then select [Network].

2Install the driver.

Right-click the machine's icon and then click [Install].

During the installation, double-click the icon shown on the task bar to display the "Driver

Software Installation" screen. When "Your devices are ready to use" is displayed on the

[Driver Software Installation] screen, the installation is completed.

Installing Driver Software (for Windows 8 and Microsoft Windows Server 2012)

1Click [Search] in charms, [Control Panel], and then [View

devices and printers].

2Install the driver.

Click [Add a device]. Select the machine's icon and then click [Next].

When the machine's icon is displayed in "Printers" on the [Devices and Printers] screen, the

installation is completed.

NOTE

• To use WSD Scan, confirm that the computer used for WSD scanning and the machine is network-connected, and

"WSD-SCAN" is set to [On] in the network settings.

WSD-SCAN (page 8-15)

• For information on operating the computer, refer to the computer's help or the operation guide of your software.

NOTE

When [Network] does not appear in the Start menu, perform the following procedure.

1Right-click [Start] and click [Property] in the menu that appears.

2Select the [[Start] menu] tab in the "Task bar and [Start] menu properties" screen, and

click [Customize].

3When the "Customize [Start] menu" screen appears, select the "Network" check box

and click [OK].

NOTE

If the "User Account Control" window appears, click [Continue].

If the "Found New Hardware" window appears, click [Cancel].

5-26

Operation on the Machine > Sending

WSD scan

1Place the originals.

2Display the screen.

[Send] key > [▲] [▼] key > [WSD Scan] > [OK] key

3Scan the originals.

Procedure using this machine

1[▲] [▼] key > [From Oper. Panel] > [OK] key

2Select the destination computer, and select the [OK] key.

You can view information on the selected computer by selecting [Detail].

3Select the [Function Menu] key to set the type of original, file format, etc., as desired.

4Press the [Start] key.

Sending begins and the software installed on the computer is activated.

Procedure from Your Computer

1[▲] [▼] key > [From Computer] > [OK] key

2Use the software installed on the computer to send the images.

Loading Originals (page 5-2)

5-27

Operation on the Machine > Sending

Using fax server to send a fax

(fax server transmission)

You can send a scanned document through a fax server.

Configuring Settings before Sending

Before sending a fax, the following setting is required.

• Configure the fax server settings.

FAX Server Settings (page 8-23)

Command Center RX User Guide

Using fax server to send a fax

1Select the [Send] key.

2Place the originals.

Place the originals.

3[▲] [▼] key > [FAX Server] > [OK] key

4Specifying destination.

Entering the destination fax number with the numeric keys

1Select [Fax No. Entry].

2Enter the fax number.

3Select [OK] key.

Destinations can be changed later.

NOTE

To use this function, you must have a fax server. For information on your fax server, ask your administrator.

Loading Originals (page 5-2)

NOTE

Use the numeric keys to enter a number.

Checking and Editing Destinations (page 5-20)

5-28

Operation on the Machine > Sending

Choosing from the Address Book

1Select [Address Book].

2Select the destination.

3Select [OK] key.

Destinations can be changed later.

5Select the functions.

Select the [Function Menu] key to select the send functions to use.

6Press the [Start] key.

Sending starts.

NOTE

The address book set in [AddrBookDefaults] of "FAX Server Set." is displayed.

Choosing from the Address Book (page 5-14)

Checking and Editing Destinations (page 5-20)

Send (page 6-4)

5-29

Operation on the Machine > Sending

Scanning using TWAIN or WIA

This section explains how to scan an original using TWAIN. The WIA driver is used in the same way.

1Display the screen.

1Activate the TWAIN compatible application software.

2Select the machine using the application and display the dialog box.

2Configure the scan settings.

Select scanning settings in the dialog box that opens.

3Place the originals.

4Scan the originals.

Click the [Scan] button. The document data is scanned.

NOTE

For selecting the machine, see the Operation Guide or Help for each application

software.

NOTE

For the settings, refer to Help in the dialog box.

Loading Originals (page 5-2)

5-30

Operation on the Machine > How to use the FAX Function

How to use the FAX Function

On products with a FAX function, it is possible to use the FAX function.

FAX Operation Guide

5-31

Operation on the Machine > What is Document Box?

What is Document Box?

Document Box contains four types of component boxes which provide the following functions.

The following types of document boxes are available.

Custom Box (page 5-33)

Custom Box is a component box which you can create within the Document Box and store data for later retrieval. You

can create or delete a Custom Box, and manipulate data in various ways as described below:

Job Box

This is a box to save jobs executed from a PC.

Private Print/Stored Job Box (page 4-13, page 4-15)

In Private Printing, you can specify that a job is not to be printed until you operate the machine. When sending the job

from the application software, specify a 4-digit access code in the printer driver. The job is released for printing by

entering the access code on the operation panel, ensuring confidentiality of the print job. The data will be deleted upon

completion of the print job or after the power switch is turned off.

In Stored Job, the print data sent from the application is saved to the machine. You can set up an access code as

necessary. If you set up an access code, enter the access code when printing. Print data will be stored in the Job Box

after printing. This will allow printing of the same print data repeatedly.

Quick Copy/Proof and Hold Box (page 4-17, page 4-19)

Quick Copy feature facilitates additional prints of a document already printed. Activating Quick Copy and printing a

document using the printer driver allow the print data to be stored in the Job Box. When additional copies are required,

you can reprint the required number of copies from the operation panel. By default, up to 32 documents can be stored.

When power is turned off, all stored jobs will be deleted.

The Proof and Hold feature produces only a single proof print of multiple-print job and holds printing of the remaining

copies. Printing a multiple-print job in Proof and Hold using the printer driver allows only a single copy to be printed while

maintaining the document data in the Job Box. To continue to print the remaining copies, use the operation panel. You

can change the number of copies to print.

Creating a New Custom Box (page 5-33)

Storing Documents (page 5-35)

Printing Documents (page 5-36)

Editing Documents (page 5-37)

Deleting Documents (page 5-38)

NOTE

To use Custom Box, an optional SSD must be installed in the machine.

NOTE

• You can set up the machine so that temporary documents in job boxes are automatically deleted.

JobRet. Deletion (page 8-42)

• For details on operating the Job Box, refer to the following:

Printing Data Saved on the Printer (page 4-12)

NOTE

When you attempt to store documents in excess of the above maximum, the oldest document data will be overwritten

by the latest document data.

5-32

Operation on the Machine > What is Document Box?

Removable Memory Box (page 5-39)

A USB memory stick can be connected to the USB memory slot on the machine to print a saved file. You can print data

directly from the USB memory without a PC. Image files scanned using this machine can also be saved to USB memory

in the PDF, TIFF, JPEG, XPS, OpenXPS or high compression PDF format (Scan to USB).

Sub Address Box/Polling Box

Sub Address Box/Polling Box store the fax data.

FAX Operation Guide

5-33

Operation on the Machine > Using a Custom Box

Using a Custom Box

Custom Box is a component box which you can create within the Document Box and store data for later retrieval. You

can create or delete a Custom Box, and manipulate data in various ways as described below:

Creating a New Custom Box

1Display the screen.

[System Menu/Counter] key > [▲] [▼] key > [Document Box] > [OK] key > [▲] [▼] key >

[Custom Box] > [OK] key > [▲] [▼] key > [Detail/Edit] > [OK] key > [Menu]

2Create a custom box.

1[▲] [▼] key > [Add Box] > [OK] key

2Enter the box name and select the [OK] key.

Creating a New Custom Box (page 5-33)

Storing Documents (page 5-35)

Printing Documents (page 5-36)

Editing Documents (page 5-37)

Deleting Documents (page 5-38)

NOTE

The operation on Custom Box you perform from operation panel can also be made using Command Center RX.

Command Center RX User Guide

NOTE

• To use Custom Box, an optional SSD must be installed in the machine.

• If user login administration is enabled, you can only change the settings by logging in with administrator privileges.

The factory default login user name and login password are set as shown below.

• If user login administration is enabled, log in with administrator privileges to perform the following operations. They

cannot be performed with user privileges.

- Creating a box

- Deleting a box of which owner is another user.

NOTE

Up to 32 characters can be entered.

For details on entering characters, refer to the following:

Character Entry Method (page 11-9)

5-34

Operation on the Machine > Using a Custom Box

3Enter a box number and select the [OK] key.

4To complete the box registration, select [▲] [▼] key > [Exit] > [OK] key.

The Custom Box is created.

To register further Box information, select [▲] [▼] key > [Detail] > [OK] key.

Proceed to next step.

3Enter the box information.

Select [Edit] or [Change] on each item and enter the information then select the [OK] key.

Select the [►] key to view the next screen. Select the [◄] key to return to the previous screen.

The table below lists the items to be set.

NOTE

You can set any value between 0001 and 1000.

Use the [▲] or [▼] key or the numeric keys to enter a number.

If you specify a box number that is already in use, an error message appears when you

select the [OK] key and the number cannot be registered. If you enter 0000, the smallest

number available will be automatically assigned.

Item Description

Box Name Enter a box name consisting of up to 32 characters.

Character Entry Method (page 11-9)

Owner*1 *2

*1 Displayed when the user login administration is enabled.

*2 Displayed when the user has logged in as administrator.

Set the owner of the box. Select the owner from the user list that appears.

Permission*1 Select whether to share the box.

Box Password User access to the box can be restricted by specifying a password to

protect the box. Entering a password is not mandatory.

Enter a password of up to 16 characters and select the [OK] key. Reenter

the same password for confirmation and select the [OK] key.

This can be set if [Shared] is selected in "Permission".

Box Number Enter the box number by using the numeric keys or using the [▲] or [▼]

key. The box number can be from 0001 to 1000. A Custom Box should

have a unique number. If you enter 0000, the smallest number available

will be automatically assigned.

Usage Restrict. The usage for a box can be restricted. To enable a capacity restriction

enter a value for the storage capacity of the Custom Box in megabytes by

using the numeric keys or using the [▲] or [▼] key. You can enter a limit

between 1 and 30,000 (MB).

Auto File Del. Automatically deletes stored documents after a set period of time.

To enable automatic deletion, select [▲] [▼] key > [On] > [OK] key.

Use the numeric keys or use the [▲] or [▼] key to enter the number of

days for which documents are stored. You can enter any number

between 1 and 31 (day(s)).

To disable automatic file deletion, select [▲] [▼] key > [Off] > [OK] key.

Free Space Displays the free space on the box.

OverwriteSetting Specifies whether or not old stored documents are overwritten when new

documents are stored.

To overwrite old documents, select [▲] [▼] key > [Permit] > [OK] key.

To retain old documents, select [▲] [▼] key > [Prohibit] > [OK] key.

Del. afterPrint Automatically delete a document from the box once printing is complete.

To delete the document, select [▲] [▼] key > [On] > [OK] key.

To retain the document, select [▲] [▼] key > [Off] > [OK] key.

5-35

Operation on the Machine > Using a Custom Box

Editing and Deleting Custom Box

1Display the screen.

[System Menu/Counter] key > [▲] [▼] key > [Document Box] > [OK] key > [▲] [▼] key >

[Custom Box] > [OK] key > [▲] [▼] key > [Detail/Edit] > [OK] key

2Edit the custom box.

To edit

1Select the box you want edit and select the [OK] key.

2Change the box information.

To delete

1Select the box you want delete and [Menu].

2[▲] [▼] key > [Delete] > [OK] key > [Yes]

Storing Documents

Custom box stores the print data which is sent from a PC. For the operation of the printing from the PC, refer to the

following:

Printer Driver User Guide

NOTE

• When you have logged in as a user, you can only edit a box whose owner is set to that

user.

• When you have logged in as administrator, you can edit all boxes.

• If a custom box is protected by a password, enter the correct password.

Creating a New Custom Box (page 5-33)

NOTE

• When you have logged in as a user, you can only delete a box whose owner is set to

that user.

• When you have logged in as administrator, you can delete all boxes.

NOTE

If a custom box is protected by a password, enter the correct password.

5-36

Operation on the Machine > Using a Custom Box

Printing Documents

The procedure for printing documents in a custom box is explained below.

1Display the screen.

1[Document Box/USB] key > [▲] [▼] key > [Custom Box] > [OK] key

2Select the box containing the document you want to print, and select the [OK] key.

2Print the document.

1Select the document you want to print, and select [Select].

A checkmark will be placed on the right of the selected file.

Select the checkmarked file and select [Select] again to cancel the selection.

2Select the [OK] key.

To use the settings used at the time of printing (when the document was saved), select [▲] [▼] key >

[Print] > [OK] key.

To change the print settings, select [▲] [▼] key > [Print(ChangeSet)] > [OK] key.

If [Print] is selected, change the number of copies to print as necessary.

If [Print (ChangeSet)] is selected, change the print settings. For the features that can be selected,

refer to the following:

3Press the [Start] key.

Printing of the selected document begins.

NOTE

• If a custom box is protected by a password, enter the correct password.

•Select [Menu] to perform the following operations.

- [Open]: Open the selected box.

- [Detail]: Display the details for the selected box.

- [Sort(No.)], [Sort(Name)]: Sort the boxes.

- [Search(No.)], [Search(Name)]: Search using the box number or the box name.

NOTE

Select [Menu] to perform the following operations.

• [Select All]: Select all files.

• [Clear All]: Cancel all the file selections.

• [Search(Name)]: Search using a file name.

• [Detail]: Display the details for the selected file.

Custom Box (Printing) (page 6-6)

5-37

Operation on the Machine > Using a Custom Box

Editing Documents

This function allows you to move documents stored in custom boxes into other boxes. The procedure for moving

documents is explained below.

1Display the screen.

1[Document Box/USB] key > [▲] [▼] key > [Custom Box] > [OK] key

2Select the box containing the document you want to move, and select the [OK] key.

2Move the documents.

1Select the document you want to move, and select [Select].

A checkmark will be placed on the right of the selected file.

Select the checkmarked file and select [Select] again to cancel the selection.

2[OK] key > [▲] [▼] key > [Move] > [OK] key

3Select the destination box, and the [OK] key.

The selected document is moved.

NOTE

• If a custom box is protected by a password, enter the correct password.

•Select [Menu] to perform the following operations.

- [Open]: Open the selected box.

- [Detail]: Display the details for the selected box.

- [Sort(No.)], [Sort(Name)]: Sort the boxes.

- [Search(No.)], [Search(Name)]: Search using the box number or the box name.

NOTE

Select [Menu] to perform the following operations.

• [Select All]: Select all files.

• [Clear All]: Cancel all the file selections.

• [Search(Name)]: Search using a file name.

• [Detail]: Display the details for the selected file.

NOTE

If the box to which the document is to be moved is protected by a password, enter the

correct password.

5-38

Operation on the Machine > Using a Custom Box

Deleting Documents

The procedure for deleting documents in a custom box is explained below.

1Display the screen.

1[Document Box/USB] key > [▲] [▼] key > [Custom Box] > [OK] key

2Select the box containing the document you want to delete, and select the [OK] key.

2Delete the document.

1Select the document you want to delete, and select [Select].

A checkmark will be placed on the right of the selected file.

Select the checkmarked file and select [Select] again to cancel the selection.

2[OK] key > [▲] [▼] key > [Delete] > [OK] key > [Yes]

NOTE

• If a custom box is protected by a password, enter the correct password.

•Select [Menu] to perform the following operations.

- [Open]: Open the selected box.

- [Detail]: Display the details for the selected box.

- [Sort(No.)], [Sort(Name)]: Sort the boxes.

- [Search(No.)], [Search(Name)]: Search using the box number or the box name.

NOTE

Select [Menu] to perform the following operations.

• [Select All]: Select all files.

• [Clear All]: Cancel all the file selections.

• [Search(Name)]: Search using a file name.

• [Detail]: Display the details for the selected file.

5-39

Operation on the Machine > Printing Documents Stored in Removable USB Memory

Printing Documents Stored in Removable

USB Memory

Plugging USB memory directly into the machine enables you to quickly and easily print the files stored in the USB

memory without having to use a computer.

The following file types can be printed:

PDF file (Version 1.7 or older)

TIFF file (TIFF V6/TTN2 format)

JPEG file

XPS file

OpenXPS file

Encrypted PDF file

• PDF files you wish to print should have an extension (.pdf).

• Files to be printed should be saved no further down than the top 3 folder levels, including the root folder.

• Plug the USB memory directly into the USB Memory Slot.

1Plug the USB memory.

Plug the USB memory into the USB Memory Slot.

2Display the screen.

[Document Box/USB] key > [▲] [▼] key > [USB Memory] > [OK] key

3Print the document.

1Select the folder containing the file to be printed, and select the [OK] key.

The machine will display documents in the top 3 folder levels, including the root folder.

NOTE

• 1,000 documents can be displayed.

• To return to a higher level folder, select the [Back] key.

5-40

Operation on the Machine > Printing Documents Stored in Removable USB Memory

2Select the document you want to print, and [Select].

A checkmark will be placed on the right of the selected file.

Select the checkmarked file and select [Select] again to cancel the selection.

3[OK] key > [▲] [▼] key > [Print] > [OK] key

4Change the number of copies, duplex printing, etc. as desired.

For the features that can be selected, refer to the following:

5Press the [Start] key.

Printing of the selected file begins.

NOTE

Select [Menu] to perform the following operations.

• [Select All]: Select all files.

• [Clear All]: Cancel all the file selections.

• [Detail]: Display the details for the selected file.

• [Memory Detail]: Display the detail for the USB memory.

• [Remove Memory]: Remove the USB memory.

Removable Memory (Store File, Printing Documents) (page 6-7)

5-41

Operation on the Machine > Saving Documents to USB Memory (Scan to USB)

Saving Documents to USB Memory (Scan to USB)

This function allows you to store scanned image files in USB memory connected to the machine. You can store files in

PDF, TIFF, JPEG, XPS, OpenXPS or high-compression PDF format.

1Place the originals.

2Plug the USB memory.

Plug the USB memory into the USB Memory Slot.

3Display the screen.

[Document Box/USB] key > [▲] [▼] key > [USB Memory] > [OK] key

4Store the document.

1Select the folder where the file will be stored, and the [OK] key.

The machine will display the top 3 folder levels, including the root folder.

2[▲] [▼] key > [Store File] > [OK] key

3Set the type of original, file format, etc., as desired.

For the features that can be set, refer to the following:

4Press the [Start] key.

The original is scanned and the data is stored in the USB memory.

NOTE

The maximum number of the storable files is 1,000.

Loading Originals (page 5-2)

Removable Memory (Store File, Printing Documents) (page 6-7)

5-42

Operation on the Machine > Check the USB Memory Information

Check the USB Memory Information

You can check the USB memory information.

1Display the screen.

[Document Box/USB] key > [▲] [▼] key > [USB Memory] > [OK] key > [Menu] >

[▲] [▼] key > [Memory Detail] > [OK] key

2Check the information.

Select the [►] key to view the next screen. Select the [◄] key to return to the previous screen.

Once you confirm the information, select the [OK] key.

5-43

Operation on the Machine > Removing USB Memory

Removing USB Memory

Follow the steps below to remove the USB memory.

1Display the screen.

[Reset] key > [Document Box/USB] key > [▲] [▼] key > [USB Memory] > [OK] key

2Select [Remove Memory].

[Menu] > [▲] [▼] key > [Remove Memory] > [OK]

3Remove the USB memory.

When "USB memory can be safely removed." is displayed, select [OK] and then remove the

USB memory.

IMPORTANT

Be sure to follow the proper procedure to avoid damaging the data or USB memory.

NOTE

USB memory can also be removed after checking the status of the device.

Device/Communication (page 7-14)

6-1

Using Various Functions

This chapter explains the following topics:

Functions Available on the Machine .................................................................................................................. 6-2

Copy ........................................................................................................................................................ 6-3

Send ........................................................................................................................................................ 6-4

Custom Box (Printing) .............................................................................................................................. 6-6

Removable Memory (Store File, Printing Documents) ............................................................................. 6-7

Functions ........................................................................................................................................................... 6-9

ID Card Copy ........................................................................................................................................... 6-9

Original Size ............................................................................................................................................ 6-9

Paper Selection ..................................................................................................................................... 6-10

Orig. Orientation (Original Orientation) ................................................................................................... 6-11

Mixed Size Orig. (Mixed Size Originals) ................................................................................................ 6-12

Collate .................................................................................................................................................... 6-12

Density ................................................................................................................................................... 6-12

Original Image ....................................................................................................................................... 6-13

EcoPrint ................................................................................................................................................. 6-13

Color Selection ...................................................................................................................................... 6-14

Sharpness .............................................................................................................................................. 6-14

Contrast ................................................................................................................................................. 6-15

Background Density ............................................................................................................................... 6-15

Prevent Bleed-t (Prevent Bleed-thru) ..................................................................................................... 6-16

Zoom ...................................................................................................................................................... 6-16

Combine ................................................................................................................................................ 6-18

Duplex .................................................................................................................................................... 6-20

Continuous Scan ................................................................................................................................... 6-22

Job Finish Notice ................................................................................................................................... 6-22

File Name Entry ..................................................................................................................................... 6-22

Print Override ......................................................................................................................................... 6-23

Quiet Mode ............................................................................................................................................ 6-23

Skip Blank Page .................................................................................................................................... 6-23

Duplex (2-sided Original) ....................................................................................................................... 6-24

Sending Size .......................................................................................................................................... 6-25

File Format ............................................................................................................................................. 6-26

File Separation ....................................................................................................................................... 6-30

Scan Resolution ..................................................................................................................................... 6-30

Subject/Body .......................................................................................................................................... 6-30

FTP Encrypted TX ................................................................................................................................. 6-31

Del. after Print (Delete after Printed) ...................................................................................................... 6-31

Storing Size ............................................................................................................................................ 6-32

Long Original ......................................................................................................................................... 6-32

Encrypted PDF ...................................................................................................................................... 6-33

JPEG/TIFF Print .................................................................................................................................... 6-33

XPS FitTo Page ..................................................................................................................................... 6-33

6-2

Using Various Functions > Functions Available on the Machine

Functions Available on the Machine

To configure the settings for functions, select the [Function Menu] key.

1 Displays the function menu.

2 Selects the item displayed or

changes the numeric value.

3 Confirms the selected setting.

4 Cancels the current menu setting to

return to the menu one level higher.

Operation Method (page 2-12)

6-3

Using Various Functions > Functions Available on the Machine

Copy

For details on each function, see the table below.

Key Function Description Reference

page

Quiet Mode Lower print and scan speed for quiet processing. page 6-23

Paper Selection Select the cassette or multi-purpose tray that contains

the required paper size.

page 6-10

Collate Offsets the output by page or set. page 6-12

ID Card Copy Use this when you want to copy a driver's license or

an insurance card. When you scan the front and back

of the card, both sides will be combined and copied

onto a single sheet.

page 6-9

Duplex Produces two-sided copies. You can also create

single-sided copies from two-sided originals.

page 6-20

Zoom Adjust the zoom to reduce or enlarge the image. page 6-16

Combine Combines 2 or 4 original sheets into 1 printed page. page 6-18

Original Size Specify the original size to be scanned. page 6-9

Orig. Orientation Select the orientation of the original document top

edge to scan correct direction.

page 6-11

Mixed Size Orig.

(Mixed Size

Originals)

Scans all sheets in the document processor, even if

they are of different sizes.

page 6-12

Original Image Select original image type for best results. page 6-13

Density Adjust density. page 6-12

EcoPrint EcoPrint saves toner when printing. page 6-13

Continuous Scan Scans a large number of originals in separate batches

and then produce as one job.

page 6-22

File Name Entry Adds a file name. page 6-22

JobFinish Notice Sends E-mail notice when a job is complete. page 6-22

Print Override Suspends the current job and gives a new job top

priority.

page 6-23

Sharpness Adjusts the sharpness of image outlines. page 6-14

Contrast You can adjust the contrast between light and dark

areas of the image.

page 6-15

Backgrnd Density Removes dark background from originals, such as

newspapers.

page 6-15

Prevent Bleed-t Hides background colors and image bleed-through

when scanning thin original.

page 6-16

Skip Blank Page When there are blank pages in a scanned document,

this function skips the blank pages and prints only

pages that are not blank.

page 6-23

6-4

Using Various Functions > Functions Available on the Machine

Send

For details on each function, see the table below.

Key Function Description Reference

page

Quiet Mode Lower print and scan speed for quiet processing. page 6-23

Color Selection Select the color mode setting. page 6-14

Original Size Specify the original size to be scanned. page 6-9

Original Image Select original image type for best results. page 6-13

Scan Resolution Select fineness of scanning resolution. page 6-30

Sending Size Select size of image to be sent. page 6-25

Zoom Adjust the zoom to reduce or enlarge the image. page 6-16

Orig. Orientation Select the orientation of the original document top

edge to scan correct direction.

page 6-11

Mixed Size Orig.

(Mixed Size

Originals)

Scans all sheets in the document processor, even if

they are of different sizes.

page 6-12

Continuous Scan Scans a large number of originals in separate

batches and then produce as one job.

page 6-22

File Format Specify the image file format. Image quality level

can also be adjusted.

page 6-26

File Name Entry Adds a file name. page 6-22

Subject/Body Adds subject and body when sending a document. page 6-30

JobFinish Notice Sends E-mail notice when a job is complete. page 6-22

FAX Resolution Select fineness of images when sending FAX. Refer to the

FAX

Operation

Guide.

FAX Delayed TX Set a send time.

FAX Direct TX Sends FAX directly without reading original data

into memory.

FAX RX Polling Automatically makes a machine with a stored

document send the document to your machine.

FAX TX Report Prints a report when transmission of a document is

successful, or when an error occurs and

transmission fails.

Density Adjust density. page 6-12

Duplex Select the type and orientation of the binding based

on the original.

page 6-24

FTP Encrypted TX Encrypts images when sending via FTP. page 6-31

File Separation Creates several files by dividing scanned original

data page by page, and sends the files.

page 6-30

Sharpness Adjusts the sharpness of image outlines. page 6-14

Contrast You can adjust the contrast between light and dark

areas of the image.

page 6-15

Backgrnd Density Removes dark background from originals, such as

newspapers.

page 6-15

6-5

Using Various Functions > Functions Available on the Machine

Prevent Bleed-t Hides background colors and image bleed-through

when scanning thin original.

page 6-16

Skip Blank Page When there are blank pages in a scanned

document, this function skips the blank pages and

prints only pages that are not blank.

page 6-23

Key Function Description Reference

page

6-6

Using Various Functions > Functions Available on the Machine

Custom Box (Printing)

For details on each function, see the table below.

Key Function Description Reference

page

Quiet Mode Lower print and scan speed for quiet processing. page 6-23

Collate Offsets the output by page or set. page 6-12

Paper Selection Select the cassette or multi-purpose tray that

contains the required paper size.

page 6-10

Duplex Print a document on both sides of the paper. page 6-21

EcoPrint EcoPrint saves toner when printing. page 6-13

File Name Entry Adds a file name. page 6-22

JobFinish Notice Sends E-mail notice when a job is complete. page 6-22

Print Override Suspends the current job and gives a new job top

priority.

page 6-23

Del. after Print Automatically deletes a document from the box

once printing is complete.

page 6-31

6-7

Using Various Functions > Functions Available on the Machine

Removable Memory (Store File, Printing Documents)

For details on each function, see the table below.

Store File

Key Function Description Reference

page

Quiet Mode Lower print and scan speed for quiet processing. page 6-23

Color Selection Select the color mode setting. page 6-14

Original Size Specify the original size to be scanned. page 6-9

Original Image Select original image type for best results. page 6-13

Scan Resolution Select fineness of scanning resolution. page 6-30

Storing Size Select size of image to be stored. page 6-32

Zoom Adjust the zoom to reduce or enlarge the image. page 6-16

Orig. Orientation Select the orientation of the original document top

edge to scan correct direction.

page 6-11

Mixed Size Orig.

(Mixed Size

Originals)

Scans all sheets in the document processor, even if

they are of different sizes.

page 6-12

Continuous Scan Scans a large number of originals in separate

batches and then produce as one job.

page 6-22

File Format Specify the image file format. Image quality level

can also be adjusted.

page 6-26

File Separation Creates several files by dividing scanned original

data page by page, and sends the files.

page 6-30

File Name Entry Adds a file name. page 6-22

JobFinish Notice Sends E-mail notice when a job is complete. page 6-22

Density Adjust density. page 6-12

Duplex Select the type and orientation of the binding based

on the original.

page 6-24

Contrast You can adjust the contrast between light and dark

areas of the image.

page 6-15

Sharpness Adjusts the sharpness of image outlines. page 6-14

Backgrnd Density Removes dark background from originals, such as

newspapers.

page 6-15

Prevent Bleed-t Hides background colors and image bleed-through

when scanning thin original.

page 6-16

Skip Blank Page When there are blank pages in a scanned

document, this function skips the blank pages and

prints only pages that are not blank.

page 6-23

6-8

Using Various Functions > Functions Available on the Machine

Printing Documents

Key Function Description Reference

page

Quiet Mode Lower print and scan speed for quiet processing. page 6-23

Collate Offsets the output by page or set. page 6-12

Paper Selection Select the cassette or multi-purpose tray that

contains the required paper size.

page 6-10

Duplex Print a document on both sides of the paper. page 6-21

EcoPrint EcoPrint saves toner when printing. page 6-13

File Name Entry Adds a file name. page 6-22

JobFinish Notice Sends E-mail notice when a job is complete. page 6-22

Print Override Suspends the current job and gives a new job top

priority.

page 6-23

Encrypted PDF Enter the preassigned password to print the PDF

data.

page 6-33

JPEG/TIFF Print Select the image size when printing JPEG or TIFF

files.

page 6-33

XPS FitTo Page Reduces or enlarges the image size to fit to the

selected paper size when printing XPS file.

page 6-33

6-9

Using Various Functions > Functions

Functions

On pages that explain a convenient function, the modes in which that function can be used are indicated by icons.

Printing:

Sending:

Storing:

ID Card Copy

Use this when you want to copy a driver's license or an insurance card. When you scan the front and back of the card,

both sides will be combined and copied onto a single sheet.

(Value: [Off] / [On])

Original Size

Specify the original size to be scanned.

Item Description

Auto(DP)*1, A4, A5, A6, B5, B6, Folio, 216 × 340 mm, Letter,

Legal, Statement, Executive, Oficio II, 16K, ISO B5,

Envelope #10, Envelope #9, Envelope #6,

Envelope Monarch, Envelope DL, Envelope C5, Hagaki

(Cardstock), Oufuku Hagaki (Return postcard), Youkei 4,

Youkei 2, Custom*2

*1 This function is displayed when [Auto Detect] in [Detect Orig.(DP)] is set to [On].

Detect Orig.(DP) (page 8-25)

*2 For instructions on how to specify the custom original size, refer to the following:

Custom Orig. Size (page 8-25)

Select from standard sizes and custom size.

NOTE

Be sure to always specify the original size when using custom size original.

Copy

Print from

Box

Print from

USB

Send

Scan to

USB

Copy

Send

Scan to

USB

6-10

Using Various Functions > Functions

Paper Selection

Select the cassette or multi-purpose tray that contains the required paper size.

Select from [1] (Cassette 1) to [5] (Cassette 5) to use the paper contained in that cassette.

If [Auto] is selected, the paper matching the size of the original is selected automatically.

Before selecting [MP Tray], you need to select [MP Tray Set.] and specify the paper size and media type. The available

paper sizes and media types are shown in the table below.

NOTE

• Specify in advance the size and type of the paper loaded in the cassette.

Cassette 1 (to 5) Set. (Cassette 1 (to 5) Settings) (page 8-28)

MP Tray Set. (MP Tray Settings) (page 8-28)

• Cassettes 2 to 5 are displayed when the optional paper feeder is installed.

Item Value Description

Auto The paper matching the size of the

original is selected automatically.

Cassette 1 (to 5) *1

*1 Cassette 2 to Cassette 5 are displayed when the optional paper feeder is installed.

Feed paper from cassette 1 (to 5).

MP Tray Feed paper from the multi purpose tray.

MP Tray Set. Before selecting [MP Tray], you need to

select [MP Tray Set.] and specify the

paper size and media type.

Standard Size A4, A5, A6, B5, B6, Folio, 216 × 340 mm, Letter,

Legal, Statement, Executive, Oficio II, 16K, ISO B5,

Envelope #10, Envelope #9, Envelope #6,

Envelope Monarch, Envelope DL, Envelope C5,

Hagaki (Cardstock), Oufuku Hagaki (Return postcard),

Youkei 4, Youkei 2, Custom*2

*2 For instructions on how to specify the custom paper sizes, refer to the following:

Custom PaperSize (page 8-26)

Select from the standard sizes and

custom size.

Size Entry

Set the sizes of [

] (vertical).

Metric: 148 to 356 mm (in 1 mm increments)

Inch: 5.83 to 14.02" (in 0.01" increments)

Enter the size not included in the

standard size.*3

When you have selected [Size Entry],

use [▲]/[▼] or the numeric keys to set

the sizes of "X" (horizontal) and "Y"

(vertical).

*3 The input units can be changed in System Menu.

Measurement (page 8-29)

Set the sizes of [

] (horizontal).

Metric: 70 to 216 mm (in 1 mm increments)

Inch: 2.76 to 8.50" (in 0.01" increments)

Media Type Plain (60 to 105 g/m2), Transparency, Rough, Vellum,

Labels, Recycled, Preprinted*4, Bond, Cardstock,

Color, Prepunched*4, Letterhead*4, Envelope,

Thick (106 to 220 g/m2), High Quality, Custom 1 to 8*4

*4 For instructions on how to specify the custom paper types 1 to 8, refer to the following:

Media Type Setting (page 8-29)

To print on preprinted or prepunched paper or on letterhead, refer to the following:

SpecialPaper Act. (page 8-27)

Select the media type.

Displayed after [Standard Size] or [Size

Entry] is set in [MP Tray Set.].

Copy

Print from

Box

Print from

USB

6-11

Using Various Functions > Functions

Orig. Orientation (Original Orientation)

Select the orientation of the original document top edge to scan correct direction.

To use any of the following functions, the document's original orientation must be set.

•Duplex

• Combine

• Duplex (2-sided Original)

Select original orientation from [Top Edge on Top] or [Top Edge on Left].

NOTE

• You can conveniently select in advance the size and type of paper that will be used often and set them as default.

MP Tray Set. (MP Tray Settings) (page 8-28)

• If the specified size of paper is not loaded in the paper source cassette or multi purpose tray, a confirmation screen

appears. Load the required paper in the multi purpose tray and select [

] to start copying.

Item Image

Top Edge on Top

Top Edge on Left

NOTE

The default setting for Original Orientation can be changed.

Orig.Orientation (page 8-33)

Copy

Send

Scan to

USB

Original Original orientation

6-12

Using Various Functions > Functions

Mixed Size Orig. (Mixed Size Originals)

Scans all sheets in the document processor, even if they are of different sizes.

(Value: [Off] / [On])

Supported Combinations of Originals

Legal and Letter (Folio and A4)

Collate

Offsets the output by page or set.

(Value: [Off] / [On])

Density

Adjust density.

Adjust density selecting [-4] (Lighter) to [+4] (Darker).

Copy

Send

Scan to

USB

Copy

Print from

Box

Print from

USB

Copy

Send

Scan to

USB

6-13

Using Various Functions > Functions

Original Image

Select original image type for best results.

Copying

In each setting, if you want to bring out text or lines marked with a highlighter pen, select [Hilight] and then [On]. The

color of the highlighter pen will be reproduced as much as possible.

Sending/Storing

EcoPrint

EcoPrint saves toner when printing.

Use this function for test prints or any other occasion when high quality print is not required.

(Value: [Off] / [On])

Item Description

Text+Photo*1

*1 If gray text is not printed completely using [Text + Photo], selecting [Text] may improve the result.

Best for mixed text and photo documents.

Photo Best for photos taken with a camera.

Text Best for documents that are mostly text.

Graphic/Map Best for graphics and maps.

Item Description

Text+Photo Best for mixed text and photo documents.

Photo Best for photos taken with a camera.

Text Best for documents that are mostly text.

For OCR*1

*1 This function is only available when "Color Selection" is set to [Black & White]. For details, refer to the following:

Color Selection (page 6-14)

Scanning produces an image that is suitable for OCR.

Light Text/Line Clearly reproduces faint characters written in pencil, etc., and thin lines on map originals or diagrams.

Copy

Send

Scan to

USB

Copy

Print from

Box

Print from

USB

6-14

Using Various Functions > Functions

Color Selection

Select the color mode setting.

Sharpness

Adjusts the sharpness of image outlines.

When copying penciled originals with rough or broken lines, clear copies can be taken by adjusting sharpness toward

"Sharpen". When copying images made up of patterned dots such as magazine photos, in which moire*1 patterns

appear, edge softening and weakening of the moire effect can be obtained by setting the sharpness toward "Blur".

Item Description

Auto (Color/Gray) Automatically recognizes whether the document is color or black and white, and

scan color documents in Full Color and black and white documents in Grayscale.

Auto (Color/B&W) Automatically recognizes whether the document is color or black and white, and

scan color documents in Full Color and black and white documents in Black and

White.

Full Color Scans the document in full color.

Grayscale Scans the document in grayscale. Produces a smooth, detailed image.

Black & White Scans the document in black and white.

Item Description

1 to 3 (Sharpen) Emphasizes the image outline.

-1 to -3 (Unsharpen) Blurs the image outline. Can weaken a Moire*1 effect.

*1 Patterns that are created by irregular distribution of halftone dots.

Send

Scan to

USB

Copy

Send

Scan to

USB

Original More SharpLess Sharp

6-15

Using Various Functions > Functions

Contrast

You can adjust the contrast between light and dark areas of the image.

Background Density

Removes dark background from originals, such as newspapers.

If the ground color is obtrusive, select [Auto]. If [Auto] does not remove the ground color, select [Manual] and adjust the

density of the ground color.

Item Description

1 to 4 (Higher) Increases the sharpness of colors.

-1 to -4 (Lower) Creates smoother colors.

Item Description

Off Does not adjust the ground color.

Auto Automatically adjusts the background density based on the original.

Manual Select [1] to [5] (Lighter - Darker) to adjust the background density manually.

Copy

Send

Scan to

USB

Original HigherLower

Copy

Send

Scan to

USB

6-16

Using Various Functions > Functions

Prevent Bleed-t (Prevent Bleed-thru)

Hides background colors and image bleed-through when scanning thin original.

(Value: [Off] / [On])

Zoom

Adjust the zoom to reduce or enlarge the image.

Copying

The following zoom options are available.

Auto

Adjusts the image to match the paper size.

Standard Zoom

Reduces or enlarges at preset magnifications.

Others

Reduces or enlarges at magnifications other than the Standard Zoom.

Model Zoom Level (Original Copy) Model Zoom Level (Original Copy)

Metric Models 400%

200%

141% A5 >> A4

115% B5 >> A4

100%

90% FOL >> A4

86% A4 >> B5

70% A4 >> A5

50%

25%

Inch Models 400%

200%

129% STMT >> LTR

100%

78% LGL >> LTR

64% LTR >> STMT

50%

25%

Model Zoom Level (Original Copy) Model Zoom Level (Original Copy)

Metric Models 129% STMT >> LTR

78% LGL >> LTR

64% LTR >> STMT

Inch Models 141% A5 >> A4

115% B5 >> A4

90% FOL >> A4

86% A4 >> B5

70% A4 >> A5

Copy

Send

Scan to

USB

Copy

Send

Scan to

USB

A4: 141%

A6: 70%

6-17

Using Various Functions > Functions

Zoom Entry

Manually reduces or enlarges the original image in 1% increments between 25% and 400%. Use the numeric keys or

select [▲] or [▼] to enter the any magnification.

Sending/Storing

Item Description

100% Reproduces the original size.

Auto Reduces or enlarges original to sending/storing size.

NOTE

To reduce or enlarge the image, select the paper size, sending size, or storing size.

Paper Selection (page 6-10)

Sending Size (page 6-25)

Storing Size (page 6-32)

6-18

Using Various Functions > Functions

Combine

Combines 2 or 4 original sheets into 1 printed page.

You can select the page layout and the type of boundary lines around the pages.

The following types of the boundary lines are available.

Select [2 in 1] or [4 in 1], select [Detail], and configure the function.

Item Value Description

Off ―Disables the function.

2 in 1 ―Select the [OK] key to copy the original with the default setting. For the default

settings, refer to the following:

Function Defaults (page 8-33)

2 in 1 Layout L to R T to B,

R to L B to T

Select the page layout of scanned originals, and select the [OK] key.

Border Line None,

Solid Line,

Dotted Line,

Positioning Mark

Select the page boundary line, and select the [OK] key.

Orig. Orientation Top Edge on Top,

Top Edge on Left

Select the orientation of the original document top edge to scan correct direction.

Choose orientation of the originals, either [Top Edge on Top] or [Top Edge on

Left]. Then select the [OK] key.

4 in 1 ―Select the [OK] key to copy the original with the default setting. For the default

settings, refer to the following:

Function Defaults (page 8-33)

4 in 1 Layout Right then Down,

Down then Right,

Left then Down,

Down then Left

Select the page layout of scanned originals, and select the [OK] key.

Border Line None,

Solid Line,

Dotted Line,

Positioning Mark

Select the page boundary line, and select the [OK] key.

Orig. Orientation Top Edge on Top,

Top Edge on Left

Select the orientation of the original document top edge to scan correct direction.

Choose orientation of the originals, either [Top Edge on Top] or [Top Edge on

Left]. Then select the [OK] key.

Copy

None Dotted LineSolid Line Positioning Mark

6-19

Using Various Functions > Functions

Layout image

Item Image

2 in 1 L to R/T to B

R to L/B to T

4 in 1 Right then Down

Left then Down

Down then Right

Down then Left

NOTE

• The paper sizes supported in Combine mode are A4, A5, B5, Folio, 216 × 340 mm, Letter, Legal, Statement,

Oficio II, and 16K.

• When placing the original on the platen, be sure to copy the originals in page order.

6-20

Using Various Functions > Functions

Duplex

Produces two-sided copies. You can also create single-sided copies from two-sided originals.

The following modes are available.

One-sided to Two-sided

Two-sided to One-sided

Two-sided to Two-sided

Produces two-sided copies from one-sided originals. In case of an odd

number of originals, the back side of the last copy will be blank.

The following binding options are available.

A Original Left/Right to Binding Left/Right: Images on the second sides

are not rotated.

B Original Left/Right to Binding Top: Images on the second sides are

rotated 180 degrees. Copies can be bound on the top edge, facing

the same orientation when turning the pages.

Copies each side of a two-sided original onto two individual sheets.

The following binding options are available.

• Binding Left/Right: Images on the second sides are not rotated.

• Binding Top: Images on the second sides are rotated 180 degrees.

Produces two-sided copies from two-sided originals.

Copy

Print from

Box

Print from

USB

Original Copy

ghi

def

abc

ghi

abc

def

ghi

abc

def

Original Copy

NOTE

The paper sizes supported in Two-sided to Two-sided mode are A4,

B5, A5, Legal, Letter, Executive, Statement, Oficio II, 216 × 340 mm,

Folio, ISO B5, and 16K.

6-21

Using Various Functions > Functions

Copying

Prints 1-sided originals to 2-sided, or 2-sided originals to 1-sided. Select the binding orientation for original and finished

documents.

When placing the original on the platen, consecutively replace each original and press the [Start] key.

After scanning all originals, select [Finish Scan] to start copying.

Printing

Print a document on both sides of the paper.

Item Value Description

1-sided>>1-sided ―Disables the function.

1-sided>>2-sided ―Select the [OK] key to copy the original with the default setting.

For the default settings, refer to the following:

Function Defaults (page 8-33)

Finish. Binding Left/Right, Top Select [Detail] to display the [Finish. Binding] screen.

Select the binding orientation of copies, and select the [OK] key.

Orig. Orientation Top Edge on Top,

Top Edge on Left

Select the orientation of the original document top edge to scan correct direction.

Choose orientation of the originals, either [Top Edge on Top] or [Top Edge on

Left]. Then select the [OK] key.

2-sided>>1-sided ―Select the [OK] key to copy the original with the default setting.

For the default settings, refer to the following:

Function Defaults (page 8-33)

Orig. Binding Left/Right, Top Select [Detail] to display the [Orig. Binding] screen.

Select the binding orientation of originals, and select the [OK] key.

Orig. Orientation Top Edge on Top,

Top Edge on Left

Select the orientation of the original document top edge to scan correct direction.

Choose orientation of the originals, either [Top Edge on Top] or [Top Edge on

Left]. Then select the [OK] key.

2-sided>>2-sided ―Select the [OK] key to copy the original with the default setting.

For the default settings, refer to the following:

Function Defaults (page 8-33)

Orig. Binding Left/Right, Top Select [Detail] to display the [Orig. Binding] screen.

Select the binding direction of originals, and select the [OK] key.

Finish. Binding Left/Right, Top Select the binding orientation of copies, and select the [OK] key.

Orig. Orientation Top Edge on Top,

Top Edge on Left

Select the orientation of the original document top edge to scan correct direction.

Choose orientation of the originals, either [Top Edge on Top] or [Top Edge on

Left]. Then select the [OK] key.

Item Value Description

1-sided ―Disables the function.

2-sided ―Select the [OK] key to print a 2-sided document with the default setting.

For the default settings, refer to the following:

Function Defaults (page 8-33)

Finish. Binding Left/Right, Top Select [Detail] to display the [Finish. Binding] screen.

Select the binding orientation of copies, and select the [OK] key.

6-22

Using Various Functions > Functions

Continuous Scan

Scans a large number of originals in separate batches and then produce as one job.

Originals will be scanned continuously until you select [End Scan].

(Value: [Off] / [On])

Job Finish Notice

Sends E-mail notice when a job is complete.

Users can be notified of the completion of a job while working at a remote desk, saving the time spent waiting beside the

machine to finish.

File Name Entry

Adds a file name.

Additional information such as job number and date and time can also be set. You can check a job history or job status

using the file name, date and time, or job number specified here.

Enter the file name (up to 32 characters), and select the [OK] key.

To add date and time, select [Date] and the [OK] key. To add job number, select [Job No.] and the [OK] key. To add

both, select [Job No. + Date] or [Date + Job No.] and the [OK] key.

NOTE

PC should be configured in advance so that E-mail can be used.

Command Center RX (page 2-44)

E-mail can be sent to a single destination.

Item Description

Off Disables the function.

JobFinished Only Enter E-mail address directly. Enter the address (up to 128 characters) and select the [OK] key.

Fin.+Interrupted

Copy

Send

Scan to

USB

1~10

1~30

11~20

21~30

Copy

Print from

Box

Print from

USB

Send

Scan to

USB

Copy

Print from

Box

Print from

USB

Send

Scan to

USB

6-23

Using Various Functions > Functions

Print Override

Suspends the current job and gives a new job top priority.

The suspended job resumes after the other job is finished.

(Value: [Off] / [On])

Quiet Mode

Lower print and scan speed for quiet processing.

Select this mode when the running noise is uncomfortable.

It is possible to set the use of Quiet Mode for each function, such as copying and sending.

(Value: [Off] / [On])

Skip Blank Page

When there are blank pages in a scanned document, this function skips the blank pages and prints only pages that are

not blank.

Blank pages can be set as pages that include ruled lines and a small number of characters.

The machine detects blank pages, saving unnecessary printing without the need to check for blank pages in the document.

NOTE

• This function is not available if current job was an override.

• Print override may not be available depending on the status of the current print job and memory usage.

NOTE

• The processing speed will be slower than normal when in Quiet Mode.

• This cannot be used when [Prohibit] is set for "Each Job".

Each Job (page 8-44)

Item Description

Off Everything, including blank pages, is scanned.

On Blank+Ruled Line Blank pages and pages that include ruled lines are judged to be blank pages.

Blank Pages Only Blank pages only are judged to be blank pages.

Blank+Some Text

Blank pages and pages that include a small amount of text are judged to be blank pages.

NOTE

The originals with punched holes or originals printed on a colored substrate may not be recognized as blank pages.

Copy

Print from

Box

Print from

USB

Copy

Print from

Box

Print from

USB

Send

Scan to

USB

Copy

Send

Scan to

USB

6-24

Using Various Functions > Functions

Duplex (2-sided Original)

Select the type and orientation of the binding based on the original.

Sample image

Item Value Description

1-sided ―Disables the function.

2-sided ―Select the [OK] key to scan the original with the default setting.

For the default settings, refer to the following:

Function Defaults (page 8-33)

Orig. Binding Left/Right, Top Select [Detail] to display the [Orig. Binding] screen.

Select the binding direction of originals, and select the [OK]

key.

Orig. Orientation Top Edge on Top,

Top Edge on Left

Select the orientation of the original document top edge to

scan correct direction, and select the [OK] key.

Value Image

2-sided Binding Left/

Right

Binding Top

Send

Scan to

USB

6-25

Using Various Functions > Functions

Sending Size

Select size of image to be sent.

Relationship between Original Size, Sending Size, and Zoom

Original Size (page 6-9), Sending Size, and Zoom (page 6-16) are related to each other. For details, see the table below.

Item Description

Same as OrigSize Send an image the same size as the original.

A4, A5, A6, B5, B6, Folio, 216 × 340 mm, Letter, Legal, Statement,

Executive, Oficio II, 16K, ISO B5, Envelope #10, Envelope #9,

Envelope #6, Envelope Monarch, Envelope DL, Envelope C5,

Hagaki (Cardstock), Oufuku Hagaki (Return postcard), Youkei 4, Youkei 2

Select from standard sizes.

Original size and sending size are the same different

Original Size (page 6-9) Specify as necessary. Specify as necessary.

Sending Size Select [Same as Original Size]. Select the desired size.

Zoom (page 6-16) Select [100%] (or [Auto]). Select [Auto].

NOTE

When you specify the sending size that is different from the original size, and select the zoom of [100%], you can send

the image as the actual size (No Zoom).

Send

6-26

Using Various Functions > Functions

File Format

Specify the image file format. Image quality level can also be adjusted.

Select the file format from [PDF], [TIFF], [XPS], [OpenXPS], [JPEG] and [High Comp. PDF].

When the color mode in scanning has been selected for Grayscale or Full Color, set the image quality.

If you selected [PDF] or [High Comp. PDF], you can specify encryption or PDF/A settings.

Item Value Description

PDF ―Select the [OK] key to save or send a PDF file. The image quality and

PDF/A settings will be the default settings.

For the default settings, refer to the following:

Function Defaults (page 8-33)

Image Quality 1 Low(High Comp) to

5 High(Low Comp)

Select [Detail] to display the [Image Quality] screen.

Select the image quality and select the [OK] key.

PDF/A Off, PDF/A-1a, PDF/A-1b,

PDF/A-2a, PDF/A-2b,

PDF/A-2u

Select PDF/A format type and select the [OK] key.

Encryption Off, On Set the PDF encryption and then select the [OK] key.

If [On] is selected, refer to the following:

PDF Encryption Functions (page 6-28)

TIFF ―Select the [OK] key to save or send a TIFF file. The Image Quality

settings will be the default values.

For the default settings, refer to the following:

Function Defaults (page 8-33)

Image Quality 1 Low(High Comp) to

5 High(Low Comp)

Select [Detail] to display the [Image Quality] screen.

Select the image quality and select the [OK] key.

XPS ―Select the [OK] key to save or send a XPS file. The Image Quality

settings will be the default values.

For the default settings, refer to the following:

Function Defaults (page 8-33)

Image Quality 1 Low(High Comp) to

5 High(Low Comp)

Select [Detail] to display the [Image Quality] screen.

Select the image quality and select the [OK] key.

OpenXPS ―Select the [OK] key to save or send a OpenXPS file. The Image Quality

settings will be the default values.

For the default settings, refer to the following:

Function Defaults (page 8-33)

Image Quality 1 Low(High Comp) to

5 High(Low Comp)

Select [Detail] to display the [Image Quality] screen.

Select the image quality and select the [OK] key.

Send

Scan to

USB

6-27

Using Various Functions > Functions

JPEG ―Select the [OK] key to save or send a JPEG file. The Image Quality

settings will be the default values.

For the default settings, refer to the following:

Function Defaults (page 8-33)

Image Quality 1 Low(High Comp) to

5 High(Low Comp)

Select [Detail] to display the [Image Quality] screen.

Select the image quality and select the [OK] key.

High Comp. PDF ―Select the [OK] key to save or send a High Comp. PDF file. The image

quality and PDF/A settings will be the default settings.

For the default settings, refer to the following:

Function Defaults (page 8-33)

Image Quality Comp. Priority, Standard,

Quality Priority

Select [Detail] to display the [Image Quality] screen.

Select the image quality and select the [OK] key.

PDF/A Off, PDF/A-1a, PDF/A-1b,

PDF/A-2a, PDF/A-2b,

PDF/A-2u

Select PDF/A format type and select the [OK] key.

Encryption Off, On Set the PDF encryption and then select the [OK] key.

If [On] is selected, refer to to the following:

PDF Encryption Functions (page 6-28)

NOTE

• You can use PDF encryption functions.

PDF Encryption Functions (page 6-28)

• If encryption is enabled, PDF/A settings cannot be specified.

Item Value Description

6-28

Using Various Functions > Functions

PDF Encryption Functions

If you have selected PDF or High Comp. PDF for file format, you can restrict the access level for displaying, printing, and

editing PDF's by assigning a secure password.

Items that can be set vary depending on the setting selected in [Compatibility].

When [Acrobat3.0&Later] is selected in "Compatibility"

Item Value Description

Password Open Document Off, On Enter the password to open the PDF file.

Select [On] and select the [OK] key.

Enter a password (up to 256 characters) and then select the [OK] key.

Enter the password again for confirmation, and select the [OK] key.

Edit/Print Doc. Off, On Enter the password to edit the PDF file.

Select [On] and select the [OK] key.

Enter a password (up to 256 characters) and then select the [OK] key.

Enter the password again for confirmation, and select the [OK] key.

Printing

Allowed

Not Allowed,

Allowed

Restricts printing of the PDF file. Then select the [OK] key.

Changes

Allowed

Not Allowed,

Commenting,

Page Layout,

Any Changes

Restricts editing of the PDF file. Select from the following restrictions

then select the [OK] key.

Not Allowed: Disables the change to the PDF file.

Commenting: Can only add commenting.

Page Layout: Can change the page layout except extracting the

pages of the PDF file.

Any Changes: Can conduct all operations except extracting the pages

of the PDF file.

Copying

Contents

Disable, Enable Restricts the copying of text and objects on the PDF file.

Then select the [OK] key.

6-29

Using Various Functions > Functions

When [Acrobat5.0&Later] is selected in "Compatibility"

Item Value Description

Password Open Document Off, On Enter the password to open the PDF file.

Select [On] and select the [OK] key.

Enter a password (up to 256 characters) and then select the [OK] key.

Enter the password again for confirmation, and select the [OK] key.

Edit/Print Doc. Off, On Enter the password to edit the PDF file.

Select [On] and select the [OK] key.

Enter a password (up to 256 characters) and then select the [OK] key.

Enter the password again for confirmation, and select the [OK] key.

Printing

Allowed

Not Allowed,

Allowed (Low

Res.), Allowed

Restricts printing of the PDF file. Select from the following restrictions

then select the [OK] key.

Not Allowed: Disables the printing of PDF file.

Allowed (Low Res.): Can print the PDF file only in low resolution.

Allowed: Can print the PDF file in original resolution.

Changes

Allowed

Not Allowed,

Ins./Del./Rotat.,

Commenting,

Any Changes

Specifically limit the operation. Select from the following restrictions

then select the [OK] key.

Not Allowed: Disables the change to the PDF file.

Ins./Del./Rotat.: Can only insert, delete, and rotate the pages of the

PDF file.

Commenting: Can only add commenting.

Any Changes: Can conduct all operations except extracting the pages

of the PDF file.

Copying

Contents

Disable, Enable Restricts the copying of text and objects on the PDF file. Then select

the [OK] key.

6-30

Using Various Functions > Functions

File Separation

Creates several files by dividing scanned original data page by page, and sends the files.

(Value: [Off] / [Each Page])

Select [Each Page] to set File Separation.

Scan Resolution

Select fineness of scanning resolution.

(Value: [200 × 100dpi Norm.] / [200 × 200dpi Fine] / [200 × 400dpi S.Fin] / [300 × 300dpi] / [400 × 400dpi U.Fin] /

[600 × 600dpi])

Subject/Body

Adds subject and body when sending a document.

Select [Subject] / [Body] to enter the E-mail subject/body.

NOTE

A three-digit serial number such as "abc_001.pdf, abc_002.pdf..." is attached to the end of the file name.

NOTE

The larger the number, the better the image resolution. However, better resolution also means larger file sizes and

longer send times.

NOTE

The subject can include up to 256 characters, and the body can include up to 500 characters.

Send

Scan to

USB

Send

Scan to

USB

Send

6-31

Using Various Functions > Functions

FTP Encrypted TX

Encrypts images when sending via FTP.

Encryption secures the document transmission.

(Value: [Off] / [On])

Del. after Print (Delete after Printed)

Automatically deletes a document from the box once printing is complete.

(Value: [Off] / [On])

NOTE

Click [Security Settings], and then [Network Security] in the Command Center RX. Be sure that "SSL" of Secure

Protocol Settings is "On" and one or more effective encryption are selected in Client side settings.

Command Center RX User Guide

Send

Print from

Box

6-32

Using Various Functions > Functions

Storing Size

Select size of image to be stored.

Relationship between Original Size, Storing Size, and Zoom

Original Size (page 6-9), Storing Size, and Zoom (page 6-16) are related to each other. For details, see the table below.

Long Original

Reads long-sized original documents using a document processor.

(Value: [Off] / [On])

Item Description

Same as OrigSize Store an image the same size as the original.

A4, A5, A6, B5, B6, Folio, 216 × 340 mm, Letter, Legal, Statement,

Executive, Oficio II, 16K, ISO B5, Envelope #10, Envelope #9,

Envelope #6, Envelope Monarch, Envelope DL, Envelope C5,

Hagaki (Cardstock), Oufuku Hagaki (Return postcard), Youkei 4, Youkei 2

Select from standard sizes.

Original Size and the size you wish to

store as are the same different

Original Size (page 6-9) Specify as necessary. Specify as necessary.

Storing Size Select [Same as OrigSize]. Select the desired size.

Zoom (page 6-16) Select [100%] (or [Auto]). Select [Auto].

NOTE

When you select Storing Size that is different from Original Size, and select the Zoom [100%], you can store the image

as the actual size (No Zoom).

NOTE

• Long originals are sent in black and white or Grayscale.

• Only a single side of a long original cannot Originals of up to 915 mm / 36-1/32" long can be scanned.

• You can select resolution 300×300 dpi or less.

Scan to

USB

Send

Scan to

USB

6-33

Using Various Functions > Functions

Encrypted PDF

Enter the preassigned password to print the PDF data.

Enter the Password, and select [OK].

JPEG/TIFF Print

Select the image size when printing JPEG or TIFF files.

(Value: [Paper Size] / [Image Resolution] / [Print Resolution])

XPS FitTo Page

Reduces or enlarges the image size to fit to the selected paper size when printing XPS file.

(Value: [Off] / [On])

NOTE

For details on entering the password, refer to the following:

Character Entry Method (page 11-9)

Item Description

Paper Size Fits the image size to the selected paper size.

Image Resolution Prints at resolution of the actual image.

Print Resolution Fits the image size to the print resolution.

Print from

USB

Print from

USB

Print from

USB

7-1

7 Status/Job Cancel

This chapter explains the following topics:

Checking Job Status .......................................................................................................................................... 7-2

Checking Job History ......................................................................................................................................... 7-8

Sending the Log History ........................................................................................................................ 7-12

Job Operation .................................................................................................................................................. 7-13

Pause and Resumption of Jobs ............................................................................................................. 7-13

Canceling of Jobs .................................................................................................................................. 7-13

Device/Communication .................................................................................................................................... 7-14

Checking the Remaining Amount of Toner and Paper (Paper/Supplies) ......................................................... 7-16

7-2

Status/Job Cancel > Checking Job Status

Checking Job Status

Check the status of jobs being processed or waiting to be printed.

Available Status Screens

The processing and waiting statuses of jobs are displayed as a list on the message display in four different screens -

Printing Jobs, Sending Jobs, Storing Jobs, and Scheduled Jobs.

The following job statuses are available.

Displaying Status Screens

1Display the screen.

[Status/Job Cancel] key > [▲] [▼] key > [Print Job Status], [Send Job Status],

[Store Job Status] or [Scheduled Job] > [OK] key

2Select the job you want to check.

1Select the job you want to check, and [Menu].

Status Display Job status to be displayed

Print Job Status • Copy

• Printer

• FAX reception

• E-mail reception

• Printing from Document Box

• Printing data from removable memory

• Job Report/List

Send Job Status • FAX transmission

• E-mail

• Folder transmission

• Application

• Multiple destination

Store Job Status • Scan

•FAX

• Printer

Scheduled Job • Sending Job FAX using Delayed transmission

NOTE

You can show the job statuses of all users, or only the statuses of your own jobs.

Disp. Status/Log (page 8-36)

This setting can also be changed from Command Center RX.

Command Center RX User Guide

7-3

Status/Job Cancel > Checking Job Status

2[▲] [▼] key > [Detail] > [OK] key

Jobs Detail Status is displayed.

3Check the status.

Select the [►] key to view the next screen. Select the [◄] key to return to the previous screen.

NOTE

• If a FAX job is selected in [Send Job Status] then [PriorityOverride] is displayed.

Select [PriorityOverride] and select the [OK] key to suspend the current job and gives

the selected job top priority.

•For [Scheduled Job], [Start Now] is displayed. Select [Start Now] and select the [OK]

key to send the selected job immediately.

Print Job Status (page 7-4)

Send Job Status (page 7-5)

Store Job Status (page 7-6)

Scheduled Job Status (page 7-7)

7-4

Status/Job Cancel > Checking Job Status

Print Job Status

Item Description

Status Status of job

[Processing]:The status before starting to print.

[Pause]: Pausing print job or error

[Canceling]: Canceling the job

[-----]: The job is finished.

Accepted Time Accepted Time of job

Job Name When the job name in Job Name is displayed in a short form, select

[Detail] to see the complete job name. Select the [OK] key to return to the

previous screen.

Job Type [Copy]: Copy job

[FAX]*1: FAX reception

[Box]: Job from Document Box

[Printer]: Printer job

[Report]: Report/List

[E-mail]: E-mail reception

[USB]: Data from removable memory

*1 Displayed only on products with the fax function installed.

User Name User Name for the executed job

If user login administration is disabled, [----] appears.

Page and Copy • Number of pages printed

• Number of copies printed / Total number of copies to be printed

Original Pages Number of original pages

Sender Info. The sender information is displayed.

When receiving a FAX

If the name of the sender is provided when receiving a FAX, the name is

displayed. If only the number of the sender is provided, the number is

displayed.

If there is no information about the sender or if a FAX is not received, [----]

appears.

For E-mails

The E-mail address is displayed.

In other cases, [----] is displayed.

NOTE

When the sender information is displayed in a short form, select [Detail]

to see the complete sender Information. Select the [OK] key to return to

the previous screen.

7-5

Status/Job Cancel > Checking Job Status

Send Job Status

Item Description

Status Status of job

[Processing]:The status before starting sending such as during scanning

originals

[Pause]: Pausing the job

[Canceling]: Canceling the job

Accepted Time Accepted Time of job

Job Name When the job name in Job Name is displayed in a short form, select

[Detail] to see the complete job name. Select the [OK] key to return to the

previous screen.

Job Type [FAX]*1: Sending Job FAX

[E-mail]: Sending Job E-mail

[Folder]: Sending Job Folder (SMB/FTP)

[Application]:Sending Job Application

[Multi]: Multi Sending

*1 Displayed only on products with the fax function installed.

User Name User Name for the executed job

If user login administration is disabled, [----] appears.

Original Pages Number of original pages

Color/B & W Color mode

[Color/B & W]

[Full Color]

[Black & White]

[Grayscale]

[Mixed]

[Auto (Color/Gray)]

[Auto (Color/B & W)]

Destination The destination is displayed.

If there is one destination:

Destination (Either destination name, FAX number, E-mail address, or

server name)

NOTE

When the destination is displayed in a short form, select [Detail] to see

the complete destination. Select the [OK] key to return to the previous

screen.

If there are multiple destinations:

[Broadcast] is displayed.

When [List] is selected, all destinations are displayed.

Select [Exit] to return to the original screen.

NOTE

When the destination in a short form, select the destination and then

select the [OK] key to see the complete destination. Select the [OK] key

to return to the previous screen.

7-6

Status/Job Cancel > Checking Job Status

Store Job Status

Item Description

Status Status of job

[Processing]:The status before starting sending such as during scanning

originals

[Canceling]: Canceling the job

Accepted Time Accepted Time of job

Job Name When the job name in Job Name is displayed in a short form, select

[Detail] to see the complete job name. Select the [OK] key to return to the

previous screen.

Job Type [FAX]*1: Storing Job FAX

[SCAN]: Storing Job Scan

[Printer]: Storing Job Printer

*1 Displayed only on products with the fax function installed.

User Name User Name for the executed job

If user login administration is disabled, [----] appears.

Original Pages Number of original pages

Color/B & W Color mode

[Color/B & W]

[Full Color]

[Black & White]

[Grayscale]

[Mixed]

[Auto (Color/Gray)]

[Auto (Color/B & W)]

Sender Info. The sender information is displayed.

When receiving a FAX

If the name of the sender is provided when receiving a FAX, the name is

displayed. If only the number of the sender is provided, the number is

displayed.

If there is no information about the sender or if a FAX is not received, [----]

appears.

In other cases, [----] is displayed.

NOTE

When the sender Information is displayed in a short form, select [Detail]

to see the complete sender Information. Select the [OK] key to return to

the previous screen.

7-7

Status/Job Cancel > Checking Job Status

Scheduled Job Status

Item Description

Status Status of job

[Waiting]: Waiting Sending

Start Time Time to start the scheduled job

Job Name When the job name in Job Name is displayed in a short form, select

[Detail] to see the complete job name. Select the [OK] key to return to the

previous screen.

Job Type [FAX] is displayed.

User Name User Name for the executed job

If user login administration is disabled, [----] appears.

Original Pages Number of original pages

Color/B & W Color mode

[Black & White]

Destination The destination is displayed.

Destination (page 7-5)

7-8

Status/Job Cancel > Checking Job History

Checking Job History

Check the history of completed jobs.

Available Job History Screens

The job histories are displayed separately in four screens - Printing Jobs, Sending Jobs, Storing Jobs, and FAX Jobs.

The following job histories are available.

NOTE

Job history is also available by Command Center RX or KYOCERA Net Viewer from the computer.

Command Center RX User Guide

KYOCERA Net Viewer User Guide

Screen Job histories to be displayed

Print Job Log • Copy

• Printer

• FAX reception

• E-mail reception

• Printing from Document Box

• Job Report/List

• Printing data from removable memory

• Application

Send Job Log • FAX

• E-mail

• Folder

• Application

• Multiple destination

Store Job Log • Scan

•FAX

• Printer

FAX Job Log FAX Operation Guide

7-9

Status/Job Cancel > Checking Job History

Displaying Job History Screen

1Display the screen.

[Status/Job Cancel] key > [▲] [▼] key > [Print Job Log], [Send Job Log], [Store Job Log]

or [FAX Job Log] > [OK] key

2Select the job you want to check.

Select the job you want to check, and [Detail].

A job result icon is displayed on the extreme right of each job.

• : The job has been completed.

• : An error has occurred.

• : The job has been canceled.

3Check the job history.

Select the [►] key to view the next screen. Select the [◄] key to return to the previous screen.

NOTE

For [FAX Job Log], refer to the following:

FAX Operation Guide

NOTE

You can show the job log of all users, or only your own job log.

Disp. Status/Log (page 8-36)

This setting can also be changed from Command Center RX.

Command Center RX User Guide

Print Job Log (page 7-10)

Send Job Log (page 7-11)

Store Job Log (page 7-12)

7-10

Status/Job Cancel > Checking Job History

Print Job Log

Item Description

Result Result of job

[OK]: The job has been completed.

[Error]: An error has occurred.

[Cancel]: The job has been canceled.

Accepted Time Accepted time of job

End Time Completed time of job

Job Name When the job name in Job Name is displayed in a short form, select

[Detail] to see the complete job name. Select the [OK] key to return to the

previous screen.

Job Type [Copy]: Copy job

[FAX]*1: FAX reception

[Box]: Job from Document Box

[Printer]: Printer job

[Report]: Report/List

[E-mail]: E-mail reception

[USB]: Data from removable memory

*1 Displayed only on products with the fax function installed.

User Name User Name for the executed job

If user login administration is disabled, [----] appears.

Page and Copy • Number of pages printed

• Number of copies printed / Total number of copies to be printed

Original Pages Number of original pages

Sender Info. The sender information is displayed.

Sender Info. (page 7-4)

7-11

Status/Job Cancel > Checking Job History

Send Job Log

Item Description

Result Result of job

[OK]: The job has been completed.

[Error]: An error has occurred.

[Cancel]: The job has been canceled.

Accepted Time Accepted Time of job

End Time Completed time of job

Job Name When the job name in Job Name is displayed in a short form, select

[Detail] to see the complete job name. select the [OK] key to return to the

previous screen.

Job Type [E-mail]: Sending Job E-mail

[Folder]: Sending Job Folder (SMB/FTP)

[FAX]*1: Sending Job FAX

[Application]: Sending Job Application

[FAX Server]: FAX Server transmission

[Multi]: Multi Sending

*1 Displayed only on products with the fax function installed.

User Name User Name for the executed job

If user login administration is disabled, [----] appears.

Original Pages Number of original pages

Color/B & W Color mode

[Color/B & W]

[Full Color]

[Black & White]

[Grayscale]

[Mixed]

Destination The destination is displayed.

Destination (page 7-5)

NOTE

If the login user name entry screen appears during operations, log in by referring to the

following:

The factory default login user name and login password are set as shown below.

7-12

Status/Job Cancel > Checking Job History

Store Job Log

Sending the Log History

You can send the log history by E-mail. You can either send it manually as needed or have it sent automatically

whenever a set number of jobs is reached.

Send History (page 8-6)

Item Description

Result Result of job

[OK]: The job has been completed.

[Error]: An error has occurred.

[Cancel]: The job has been canceled.

Accepted Time Accepted Time of job

End Time Completed time of job

Job Name When the job name in Job Name is displayed in a short form, select

[Detail] to see the complete job name. Select the [OK] key to return to the

previous screen.

Job Type [FAX]*1: Storing Job FAX

[SCAN]: Storing Job Scan

[Printer]: Storing Job Printer

*1 Displayed only on products with the fax function installed.

User Name User Name for the executed job

If user login administration is disabled, [----] appears.

Original Pages Number of original pages

Color/B & W Color mode

[Color/B & W]

[Full Color]

[Black & White]

[Grayscale]

[Mixed]

Sender Info. The sender information is displayed.

Sender Info. (page 7-6)

7-13

Status/Job Cancel > Job Operation

Job Operation

Pause and Resumption of Jobs

Pause/resume all printing jobs in printing/waiting.

1Display the screen.

Select the [Status/Job Cancel] key.

2Select [Pause].

Printing is paused.

When resuming the printing of jobs that have been paused, select [Resume].

Canceling of Jobs

A job in printing/waiting status can be canceled.

1Display the screen.

[Status/Job Cancel] key > [▲] [▼] key > [Print Job Status], [Send Job Status],

[Store Job Status] or [Scheduled Job] > [OK] key

2Cancel a job.

Print Job Status

1Select the job to be canceled, and [Menu].

2[▲] [▼] key > [Cancel Job] > [OK] key > [Yes]

Send Job Status, Store Job Status or Scheduled Job Status

1Select the job to be canceled, and [Cancel].

2Select [Yes].

NOTE

If the [Back] key or other function key, such as the [Copy] key, is selected during Pause,

"Resume paused jobs. Are you sure?" appears. If [Yes] is selected and then the [OK] key is

selected, the job is resumed and the following screen appears. If [No] is selected and then

the [OK] key is selected, the following screen appears while the job is paused.

NOTE

When FAX reception job is selected, [Cannot cancel FAX reception jobs.] is displayed

and the job cannot be canceled.

NOTE

A job can be canceled by selecting [Menu], selecting [Cancel Job] and then selecting

the [OK] key.

7-14

Status/Job Cancel > Device/Communication

Device/Communication

Configure the devices/lines installed or connected to this machine or check their status.

1Display the screen.

Select the [Status/Job Cancel] key.

2Check the status.

Select the items you want to check. Then, select the [OK] key to show the status of the

selected device.

The items you can check are described below.

"Scanner"

The status of an original scanning or the error information (paper jam, opened cover, etc.) is

displayed.

"Printer"

Error information such as paper jam, out of toner, or out of paper, and status such as waiting or

printing are displayed.

"FAX"

• The information such as sending/receiving and dialing is displayed.

•Select [Line Off] to cancel a fax in sending/receiving.

"USB Memory"

• The usage, capacity and free space of the external media connected to this machine are

displayed.

•Select [Remove] to safely remove the external media.

"SSD"

The status of the optional SSD is displayed.

"USB Keyboard"

The status of the optional USB Keyboard is displayed.

"Keyboard"

The status of the optional Bluetooth Keyboard is displayed.

"Network"

The network connection status appears.

"Wi-Fi"

The Wi-Fi connection status and network name (SSID) of the machine appear.

This function is displayed when the wireless network function is available on the machine.

FAX Operation Guide

7-15

Status/Job Cancel > Device/Communication

"Wi-Fi Direct"

This function is displayed when the wireless network function is available on the machine.

•Select [▲] [▼] key > [PushButton Setup] > [OK] key, and execute the push button of the

device you want to connect to start the connection to the machine.

•Select [▲] [▼] key > [Detail Info] > [OK] key, information on the device that is connected

by Wi-Fi Direct appears.

•Select [▲] [▼] key > [ConnectionStatus] > [OK] key > [▲] [▼] key >

[ConnectedDevices] > [OK] key to display the list of connected devices.

•Select [▲] [▼] key > [ConnectionStatus] > [OK] key > [▲] [▼] key > [DisconnectAll] >

[OK] key to disconnect all devices.

"Option Network"

The connection status of the optional Network Interface Kit is displayed.

7-16

Status/Job Cancel > Checking the Remaining Amount of Toner and Paper (Paper/Supplies)

Checking the Remaining Amount of Toner

and Paper (Paper/Supplies)

Check the remaining amount of toner, and paper on the message display.

1Display the screen.

Select the [Status/Job Cancel] key.

2Check the status.

[▲] [▼] key > [Toner Status] or [Paper Status] > [OK] key

The items you can check are described below.

"Toner Status"

The amount of toner remaining is shown in levels.

"Paper Status"

The status of the source is displayed. Select the [►] key to view the next source. Select the

[◄] key to return to the previous screen.

8-1

Setup and Registration

(System Menu)

This chapter explains the following topics:

System Menu ..................................................................................................................................................... 8-2

System Menu Settings ............................................................................................................................. 8-3

Report ...................................................................................................................................................... 8-5

System/Network ....................................................................................................................................... 8-7

User/Job Account .................................................................................................................................. 8-23

User Property ......................................................................................................................................... 8-23

Common Settings .................................................................................................................................. 8-24

Copy ...................................................................................................................................................... 8-38

Printer .................................................................................................................................................... 8-39

Send ...................................................................................................................................................... 8-41

FAX ........................................................................................................................................................ 8-41

Document Box ....................................................................................................................................... 8-42

Edit Destination ...................................................................................................................................... 8-43

Adjust/Maint. .......................................................................................................................................... 8-44

8-2

Setup and Registration (System Menu) > System Menu

System Menu

Configure settings related to overall machine operation.

Select the [System Menu/Counter] key to show the settings on the message display. Then, select from the settings

displayed.

Refer to System Menu Settings on the following page and configure as needed.

Operation Method (page 2-12)

NOTE

• In order to change settings that require administer privileges, you must log in with administrator privileges.

The factory default login user name and login password are set as shown below.

• If function default settings have been changed, the [Reset] key can be selected in each function screen to

immediately change the settings.

1 Displays the System Menu items.

2 Selects the item displayed or changes

the numeric value.

3 Confirms the selected setting.

4 Cancels the current menu setting to

return to the menu one level higher.

8-3

Setup and Registration (System Menu) > System Menu

System Menu Settings

This section explains the functions that can be configured in System Menu. To configure the settings, select the item in

System Menu and select the setting item. For details on each function, see the table below.

Item Description Reference Page

Print Report Configure settings for printing reports and histories. page 8-5

Admin Rpt Set. Refer to the FAX

Operation Guide.

Result Rpt Set. page 8-6

Job Log History page 8-6

Counter This counts the number of pages printed or scanned. page 2-41

Network Setting Configures network settings. page 8-7

Optional Network Configure settings for the optional Network Interface Kit. page 8-17

Wireless Network Configure settings for the optional Wireless Network Interface Kit. page 8-18

Primary Network Specify the network interface card to be used for the send function, the

network authentication and connecting to external address book.

page 8-19

I/F Block Set. This allows you to protect this machine by blocking the interface with

external devices such as USB hosts or optional interfaces.

page 8-20

Bluetooth Set. Set the Bluetooth keyboard. page 8-20

Security Level The Security Level setting is primarily a menu option used by service

personnel for maintenance work. There is no need for customers to use

this menu.

—

Data Security Configure settings for data stored in the optional SSD and machine's

memory.

page 8-21

Restart Restart the CPU without turning the power switch off. Use this to deal with

any unstable operation by the machine. (Same as the computer restart.)

page 8-22

Op Functions You can use the optional applications installed on this machine. page 8-22

Software Version Check the machine's system and engine software versions. page 8-22

FAX Server Settings Configure settings for FAX Server. page 8-23

User/Job Account Configures settings related to machine management.

User Login:

Overview of User Login Administration (page 9-2)

Job Accounting:

Overview of Job Accounting (page 9-25)

—

User Property Allows you to view information about logged in users and edit some of

that information.

page 8-23

Language Select the language displayed on the message display. page 8-24

Default Screen Select the screen appearing right after start-up (default screen). page 8-24

Sound Set options for buzzer sound during the machine operations. page 8-24

Display Bright. Set the brightness of the message display. page 8-24

Cassette 1 (to 5) Set. (Cassette

1 (to 5) Settings)

Select type of paper in Cassette 1 (to 5). page 8-28

MP Tray Set. (MP Tray Settings)

Select type of paper in multi purpose tray. page 8-28

8-4

Setup and Registration (System Menu) > System Menu

Orig./Paper Set. Configure settings for originals. page 8-25

Preset Limit Restrict the number of copies that can be made at one time. page 8-29

Measurement Select inch or metric for the unit for paper dimensions. page 8-29

Error Handling Select whether to cancel or continue the job when error has occurred. page 8-30

Date Setting Configure settings related to the date and time. page 8-30

Timer Setting Configure settings related to the time. page 8-31

Function Defaults Defaults are the values automatically set after the warm-up is completed

or the [Reset] key is selected.

Set the defaults for available settings such as copying and sending. Setting

the frequently-used values as defaults makes subsequent jobs easier.

page 8-33

logging in.

page 8-35

RAM Disk Mode A RAM disk can be created and its size can be set. page 8-35

Optional Memory When optional memory is installed, select the memory allocation scheme

based on the application in which you are using the equipment.

page 8-35

Disp. Status/Log Set the display method of the Status/Log. page 8-36

Keyboard Type Select the type of keyboard that you want to use. page 8-36

Low Toner Alert Set the amount of remaining toner to notify the administrator when to

order a toner when the toner is running low.

page 8-36

Show PowerOffMsg Set the mode whether display a confirmation message in power supply

off.

page 8-36

EnergySaver Set. Select the method of recovery from energy saver. page 8-37

Msg Banner Print Set whether the confirmation screen appears before each sheet is printed

when printing multiple banner sheets.

page 8-37

Copy Configures settings for copying functions. page 8-38

Printer Printing from computers, settings are generally made on the application

software screen. However, the following settings are available for

configuring the defaults to customize the machine.

page 8-39

Send Configures settings for sending functions. page 8-41

FAX Configures settings for fax functions.

FAX Operation Guide

—

Document Box Configures settings related to the Custom Box, Job Box, Sub Address

Box and Polling Box.

FAX Operation Guide

page 8-42

Edit Destination Configures Address Book and One Touch Key settings.

Address Book:

Adding a Destination (Address Book) (page 3-25)

One Touch Key:

Adding a Destination on One Touch Key (One Touch Key) (page 3-

31)

page 8-43

Adjust/Maint. Adjust printing quality and conduct machine maintenance. page 8-44

Item Description Reference Page

8-5

Setup and Registration (System Menu) > System Menu

Report

Print reports to check the machine settings and status.

Default settings for printing the result reports can also be configured.

Report Print

[System Menu/Counter] key > [▲] [▼] key > [Report] > [OK] key > [▲] [▼] key > [Report Print] > [OK] key

Item Description

Menu Map Prints Menu Map to check the settings of the machine.

Status Page Prints the status page, allowing you to check the information including current settings,

available memory space, and optional equipment installed.

Font List Prints the font list, allowing you to check the font samples installed in the machine.

Opt NW Status Prints the optional network status, allowing you to check the information including optional

network interface firmware version, network address and protocol.

NOTE

This function is displayed when the optional Network Interface Kit or Wireless Network

Interface Kit is installed.

DataSanitization Prints the data sanitization report.

Menu Map

Status Page

8-6

Setup and Registration (System Menu) > System Menu

Admin Rpt Set.

[System Menu/Counter] key > [▲] [▼] key > [Report] > [OK] key > [▲] [▼] key > [Admin Rpt Set.] > [OK] key

Configure settings for fax functions.

FAX Operation Guide

Result Rpt Set.

[System Menu/Counter] key > [▲] [▼] key > [Report] > [OK] key > [▲] [▼] key > [Result Rpt Set.] > [OK] key

Job Log History

[System Menu/Counter] key > [▲] [▼] key > [Report] > [OK] key > [▲] [▼] key > [Job Log History] > [OK] key

Item Description

Send Result Automatically print a report of transmission result when a transmission is complete.

E-mail/Folder Automatically print a report of transmission result when E-mail or SMB/FTP transmission is

complete.

Value: Off, On, Error Only

FAX*1

*1 Only on products with the fax function installed.

FAX Operation Guide

Attached NW FAX FAX Operation Guide

CancelBeforeSend*2

*2 When "E-mail/Folder" and "FAX" are set to [Off], this function will not be displayed.

Print a send result report if the job is canceled before being sent.

Value: Off, On

Dest. Info.*2 Select the Recipient Format for the send result report.

Value: Dest. or Name, Dest. and Name

FAX RX Result*1 FAX Operation Guide

JobFinish Notice Attaches sent images to job finish notices.

Value: Do Not Attach Image, Attach SendImage

Item Description

Auto Sending

This function automatically sends the log history to the specified destinations whenever a set

number of jobs has been logged.

Value: Off, On

NOTE

If [On] is selected, specify the number of job histories. The setting range is 1 to 16.

Send History You can also send the log history to the specified destinations manually.

Destination Set the destination to which log histories are sent. Only E-mail address can be set.

Subject Set the subject automatically entered when sending log histories by E-mail.

Value: Up to 60 characters

SSFC Log Subject Enter the subject of the printed job history with IC card authentication.

Value: Up to 60 characters

Personal Info. Select whether to include personal information in the job log.

Value: Include, Exclude

8-7

Setup and Registration (System Menu) > System Menu

System/Network

Configures machine system settings.

Network Setting

[

System Menu/Counter

] key > [

▲

] [

▼

] key > [

System/Network

] > [

] key > [

▲

] [

▼

] key > [

Network Setting

] > [

] key

Configures network settings.

Host Name

Wi-Fi Direct Set

Set Wi-Fi Direct.

Item Description

Host Name

Check the host name of the machine. Host name can be changed from Command Center RX.

Changing Device Information (page 2-48)

NOTE

This function is displayed when the wireless network function is available on the machine.

Item Description

Wi-Fi Direct Select whether to use Wi-Fi Direct.

Value: Off, On

Device Name Specify the device name.

NOTE

• Up to 32 characters can be entered.

• This function is displayed when [Wi-Fi Direct] is set to [On].

IP Address Check the IP address of the machine.

TCP/IP Settings (page 8-10)

NOTE

This function is displayed when [Wi-Fi Direct] is set to [On].

Auto Disconnect Automatically disconnect devices connected through Wi-Fi Direct.

Value: Off, On

NOTE

This function is displayed when [Wi-Fi Direct] is set to [On].

Disconnect Timer If you select [On] to Auto Disconnect, set the waiting time for automatic disconnection.

Value: Day (00 to 99), Hour (00 to 23), Minute (00 to 59)

8-8

Setup and Registration (System Menu) > System Menu

Wi-Fi Settings

Set Wi-Fi.

NOTE

This function is displayed when the wireless network function is available on the machine.

Item Description

Wi-Fi Select whether to use Wi-Fi.

Value:

Off, On

Setup -

ConnectionStatus Check the wireless LAN status.

Quick Setup If the machine will connect to an access point that supports the automatic wireless network

setup, connection settings can be configured by Quick Setup.

NOTE

If you are connecting to an access point that has WEP enabled, select [Menu] and set [WEP

Key Index].

AvailableNetwork Displays access points to which the machine can connect.

NOTE

• When [Reload] is selected, the list is reloaded.

• If the access point's security setting uses WEP, select [Menu] and set [WEP Key Index].

WEP Key Index Select the key index of the access point.

Value:

0 to 3

Push Button If the access point supports the push button method, wireless settings can be configured using

the push button. This setting executes push button, and the connection is started by pressing

the push button on the access point.

NOTE

The push button method supports only the WPS.

PIN (Device) Starts connection using the machine's PIN code. Enter the PIN code into the access point. The

PIN code of the machine is automatically generated.

8-9

Setup and Registration (System Menu) > System Menu

Custom Setup The detailed settings for wireless LAN can be changed.

Network Name (SSID) Set the SSID (Service Set Identifier) of the wireless LAN to which the machine connects.

NOTE

Up to 32 characters can be entered.

Netwk Authentic. Select network authentication type.

Value: Open, WPA2/WPA-PSK, WPA2-PSK, WPA2/WPA-EAP, WPA2-EAP

Encryption Select encryption method. The setting values vary depending on the Network Authentication

setting.

Item Description

Network

Authentication

Encryption

Open Disable ―

WEP WEP Key: Up to 26 characters

WEP Key Index: 0 to 3

WPA2/WPA-PSK Data Encryption: AES, Auto

Preshared Key: Up to 64 characters

WPA2-PSK Data Encryption: AES, Auto

Preshared Key: Up to 64 characters

WPA2/WPA-EAP Data Encryption: AES, Auto

WPA2-EAP Data Encryption: AES, Auto

8-10

Setup and Registration (System Menu) > System Menu

Item Description

TCP/IP Settings -

TCP/IP Select whether to use TCP/IP Protocol.

Value: Off, On

IPv4 Setting Set up TCP/IP (IPv4) to connect to the network. This setting is available when [TCP/IP] is set to

[On].

DHCP Select whether to use the DHCP (IPv4) server.

Value: Off, On

Auto-IP Select whether to use Auto-IP.

Value: Off, On

IP Address Set the IP address.

Value: ###.###.###.###

NOTE

When DHCP is set to [On], this item is displayed only and cannot be entered.

Subnet Mask Set the IP subnet mask.

Value: ###.###.###.###

NOTE

When DHCP is set to [On], this item is displayed only and cannot be entered.

Default Gateway Set the IP gateway address.

Value: ###.###.###.###

NOTE

When DHCP is set to [On], this item is displayed only and cannot be entered.

IMPORTANT

• When setting the Auto-IP, enter "0.0.0.0" in [IP Address].

• After changing the setting, restart the network or turn the machine OFF and then ON.

8-11

Setup and Registration (System Menu) > System Menu

Wired Netwk. Set

Configure wired network settings.

Item Description

IPv6 Setting Set up TCP/IP (IPv6) to connect to the network. This setting is available when [TCP/IP] is [On].

IPv6 Setting Select whether to use IPv6.

Value: Off, On

NOTE

Selecting [On] displays IP address in [Link Local] after restarting the network.

Manual Settings Manually specify the IP address, prefix length, and gateway address of TCP/IP (IPv6).

Value

IP Address: 128-bits address is expressed in eight groups consisting of four-digit

hexadecimal digits. The groups are separated by colon (:).

Prefix Length: 0 to 128

Default Gateway: 128-bits address is expressed in eight groups consisting of four-digit

hexadecimal digits. The groups are separated by colon (:).

NOTE

This function is displayed when [IPv6 Setting] is set to [On].

To enter "Default Gateway", set [RA (Stateless)] to [Off].

RA(Stateless) Select whether to use RA (Stateless).

Value: Off, On

NOTE

This function is displayed when [IPv6 Setting] is set to [On].

Selecting [On] displays IP address in [IP Address 1 (to 5)] after restarting the network.

DHCPv6 Settings Select whether to use the DHCP (IPv6) server.

Value: Off, On

NOTE

This function is displayed when [IPv6 Setting] is set to [On].

Selecting [On] displays IP address in [IP Address] after restarting the network.

Restart Network Restarts the network.

IMPORTANT

After changing the setting, restart the network or turn the machine OFF and then ON.

Item Description

TCP/IP Settings For details on setting value.

TCP/IP Settings (page 8-10)

LAN Interface Specify the settings for the LAN interface to be used.

Value: Auto, 10Base-Half, 10Base-Full, 100Base-Half, 100Base-Full, 1000Base-T

IMPORTANT

After changing the setting, restart the network or turn the machine OFF and then ON.

8-12

Setup and Registration (System Menu) > System Menu

Bonjour

IP Filter (IPv4)

IP Filter (IPv6)

IPSec

ProtocolSettings

Configure protocol settings.

Item Description

Available Net. Select whether to use Bonjour.

Value: Off, On

Wi-Fi Direct*1

*1 Displayed only when the wireless network function is available on the machine.

Set whether to enable this function for each network.

Value: Disable, Enable

Wi-Fi*1

Wired Network

Item Description

IP Filter (IPv4) Make this setting when you use IP Filter (IPv4).

Value: Off, On

Item Description

IP Filter (IPv6) Make this setting when you use IP Filter (IPv6).

Value: Off, On

Item Description

IPSec Make this setting when you use IPSec.

Value: Off, On

Item Description

NetBEUI Selects whether to receive documents using NetBEUI.*1

Value: Off, On

Wi-Fi Direct*2 Set whether to enable this function for each network.

Value: Disable, Enable

NOTE

This function is displayed when [NetBEUI] is set to [On].

Wi-Fi*2

Wired Network

SNMPv3 Select whether to communicate using SNMPv3.*1

Value: Off, On

Wi-Fi Direct*2 Set whether to enable this function for each network.

Value: Disable, Enable

NOTE

This function is displayed when [SNMPv3] is set to [On].

Wi-Fi*2

Wired Network

8-13

Setup and Registration (System Menu) > System Menu

FTP (Server) Select whether to receive documents using FTP.*1

Value: Off, On

Wi-Fi Direct*2 Set whether to enable this function for each network.

Value: Disable, Enable

NOTE

This function is displayed when [FTP (Server)] is set to [On].

Wi-Fi*2

Wired Network

FTP (Client) Select whether to send documents using FTP. When selecting [On], set the FTP Port Number.

The default port number is 21.

Value: Off, On (Port Number: 1 to 65535)

SMB Select whether to send documents using SMB. When selecting [On], set the SMB default Port

Number. The default port number is 445.

Value: Off, On (Port Number: 1 to 65535)

SNMP Select whether to communicate using SNMP.*1

Value: Off, On

Wi-Fi Direct*2 Set whether to enable this function for each network.

Value: Disable, Enable

NOTE

This function is displayed when [SNMP] is set to [On].

Wi-Fi*2

Wired Network

SMTP Select whether to send E-mail using SMTP.

Value: Off, On

POP3 Select whether to receive E-mail using POP3.

Value: Off, On

RAW Port Select whether to receive documents using Raw Port.*1

Value: Off, On

Wi-Fi Direct*2 Set whether to enable this function for each network.

Value: Disable, Enable

NOTE

This function is displayed when [RAW Port] is set to [On].

Wi-Fi*2

Wired Network

LPD Selects whether to receive documents using LPD.*1

Value: Off, On

Wi-Fi Direct*2 Set whether to enable this function for each network.

Value: Disable, Enable

NOTE

This function is displayed when [LPD] is set to [On].

Wi-Fi*2

Wired Network

IPP Selects whether to receive documents using IPP. To use the IPP protocol, select [Not Secure

(IPP&IPPS)] on IPP Security under Security Settings from the Command Center RX. The

default port number is 631.*1

Value: Off, On (Port Number: 1 to 32767)

Wi-Fi Direct*2 Set whether to enable this function for each network.

Value: Disable, Enable

NOTE

This function is displayed when [IPP] is set to [On].

Wi-Fi*2

Wired Network

Item Description

8-14

Setup and Registration (System Menu) > System Menu

IPP Over SSL Select whether or not to use IPP over SSL.*1, *3

Value: Off, On (Port Number: 1 to 32767)

NOTE

When selecting [On], it also requires a certificate for SSL. the default certificate is the self-

certificate of the machine.

Command Center RX User Guide

Wi-Fi Direct*2 Set whether to enable this function for each network.

Value: Disable, Enable

NOTE

This function is displayed when [IPP Over SSL] is set to [On].

Wi-Fi*2

Wired Network

HTTP Select whether to communicate using HTTP.*1

Value: Off, On

Wi-Fi Direct*2 Set whether to enable this function for each network.

Value: Disable, Enable

NOTE

This function is displayed when [HTTP] is set to [On].

Wi-Fi*2

Wired Network

HTTPS Select whether to communicate using HTTPS.*1, *3

Value: Off, On

Wi-Fi Direct*2 Set whether to enable this function for each network.

Value: Disable, Enable

NOTE

This function is displayed when [HTTPS] is set to [On].

Wi-Fi*2

Wired Network

LDAP Select whether to use LDAP.

Value: Off, On

ThinPrint Select whether to use ThinPrint. To use the Thin Print protocol, set the protocol to [On]. The

default port number is 4000.*1, *3

Value: Off, On (Port Number: 1 to 32767)

NOTE

This function is displayed only when the optional ThinPrint Option is activated.

Thin Print over SSL To use the Thin Print over SSL protocol, set [Thin Print Over SSL] to [On].*1, *3

Value: Off, On

NOTE

• This function is displayed when [ThinPrint] is set to [On].

• When selecting [On], it also requires a certificate for SSL. The default certificate is the self-

certificate of the machine.

Command Center RX User Guide

Wi-Fi Direct*2 Set whether to enable this function for each network.

Value: Disable, Enable

NOTE

This function is displayed when [ThinPrint] is set to [On].

Wi-Fi*2

Wired Network

Item Description

8-15

Setup and Registration (System Menu) > System Menu

WSD-SCAN Select whether to use WSD Scan.*1

Value: Off, On

Wi-Fi Direct*2 Set whether to enable this function for each network.

Value: Disable, Enable

NOTE

This function is displayed when [WSD-SCAN] is set to [On].

Wi-Fi*2

Wired Network

WSD-PRINT Set whether to use our proprietary web services. WIA driver, TWAIN driver and Network FAX

driver use this Enhanced WSD web service.*1

Value: Off, On

Wi-Fi Direct*2 Set whether to enable this function for each network.

Value: Disable, Enable

NOTE

This function is displayed when [WSD-PRINT] is set to [On].

Wi-Fi*2

Wired Network

Enhanced WSD Set whether to use our proprietary web services.*1

Value: Off, On

NOTE

Selecting [Off] will disable the functionality of WIA, TWAIN, and Network FAX driver.

Wi-Fi Direct*2 Set whether to enable this function for each network.

Value: Disable, Enable

NOTE

This function is displayed when [Enhanced WSD] is set to [On].

Wi-Fi*2

Wired Network

EnhancedWSD(SSL) Set whether to use our proprietary web services over SSL.*1, *3

Value: Off, On

NOTE

Selecting [Off] will disable the functionality of WIA, TWAIN and Network FAX drivers.

Wi-Fi Direct*2 Set whether to enable this function for each network.

Value: Disable, Enable

NOTE

This function is displayed when [EnhancedWSD(SSL)] is set to [On].

Wi-Fi*2

Wired Network

eSCL Selects whether to receive scanned documents using eSCL.*1

Value: Off, On

Wi-Fi Direct*2 Set whether to enable this function for each network.

Value: Disable, Enable

NOTE

This function is displayed when [eSCL] is set to [On].

Wi-Fi*2

Wired Network

Item Description

8-16

Setup and Registration (System Menu) > System Menu

Secure Settings

eSCL over SSL Selects whether to receive scanned documents using eSCL over SSL.*1, *3

Value: Off, On

Wi-Fi Direct*2 Set whether to enable this function for each network.

Value: Disable, Enable

NOTE

This function is displayed when [eSCL over SSL] is set to [On].

Wi-Fi*2

Wired Network

REST Select whether to use REST. When selecting [On], specifies the port number used. The default

port number is 9080.*1

Value: Off, On (Port Number: 1 to 32767)

NOTE

This function is displayed when [REST] is set to [On].

Wi-Fi Direct*2 Set whether to enable this function for each network.

Value: Disable, Enable

NOTE

This function is displayed when [REST] is set to [On].

Wi-Fi*2

Wired Network

REST over SSL Select whether to use REST secured by SSL. When selecting [On], specifies the port number

used. The default port number is 9081.*1, *3

Value: Off, On (Port Number: 1 to 32767)

NOTE

• This function is displayed when [REST over SSL] is set to [On].

• When selecting [On], it also requires a certificate for SSL. the default certificate is the self-

certificate of the machine.

Command Center RX User Guide

Wi-Fi Direct*2 Set whether to enable this function for each network.

Value: Disable, Enable

NOTE

This function is displayed when [REST over SSL] is set to [On].

Wi-Fi*2

Wired Network

*1 The setting will be changed after restarting the device or network.

*2 Displayed only when the wireless network function is available on the machine.

*3 Set "SSL" to [On] in Secure Settings.

Secure Settings (page 8-16)

IMPORTANT

After changing the setting, restart the network or turn the machine OFF and then ON.

Item Description

SSL Select whether or not to use SSL.

Value: Off, On

Item Description

8-17

Setup and Registration (System Menu) > System Menu

Ping

Restart Network

Optional Network

[System Menu/Counter] key > [▲] [▼] key > [System/Network] > [OK] key > [▲] [▼] key > [Optional Network] >

[OK] key

Configure settings for the optional Network Interface Kit.

Basic

Item Description

Ping Checks if communication with the destination by entering the host name or IP address of the

destination is possible.

NOTE

If [Primary Network] is set to [Option Network], this item is not displayed.

Item Description

Restart Network Restarts the network.

NOTE

This menu is displayed when the optional Network Interface Kit or Wireless Network Interface Kit is installed.

Item Description

Host Name

Check the host name of the machine. Host name can be changed from Command Center RX.

Changing Device Information (page 2-48)

TCP/IP Settings For details on setting value.

TCP/IP Settings (page 8-11)

IPSec (page 8-12)

Bonjour Select whether to use Bonjour.

Value: Off, On

Wi-Fi Direct*1

*1 Displayed only when the wireless network function is available on the machine.

Set whether to enable this function for each network.

Value: Disable, Enable

Wi-Fi*1

Wired Network

IPSec Select whether to use IPSec.

Value: Off, On

LAN Interface Select the LAN Interface type.*2

NOTE

Value: Auto, 10Base-Half, 10Base-Full, 100Base-Half, 100Base-Full, 1000Base-T

This function is displayed when the optional Network Interface Kit is installed.

*2 The setting will be changed after restarting the device or network.

MACAddressFilter Select whether to use MAC Address Filter.

Operation Guide for the optional Network Interface Kit

Value: Off, On

Restart Network Restarts the network card of the device.

8-18

Setup and Registration (System Menu) > System Menu

Wireless Network

[System Menu/Counter] key > [▲] [▼] key > [System/Network] > [OK] key > [▲] [▼] key > [Wireless Network] >

[OK] key

Configure settings for the optional Wireless Network Interface Kit.

Setup

NOTE

This function is displayed when the optional Wireless Network Interface Kit is installed.

Item Description

ConnectionStatus

When the optional Wireless Network Interface Kit is installed, you can check the wireless LAN status.

Quick Setup

If the machine will connect to an access point that supports the automatic wireless network setup,

connection settings can be configured by Quick Setup.

AvailableNetwork Displays access points to which the machine can connect.

Push Button If the access point supports the push button method, wireless settings can be configured using

the push button. This setting executes push button, and the connection is started by pressing

the push button on the access point.

NOTE

The push button method supports only the WPS.

PIN (Device) Starts connection using the machine's PIN code. Enter the PIN code into the access point. The

PIN code of the machine is automatically generated.

PIN (Terminal)

Starts connection using the PIN code of the access point. Enter the PIN code of the access point.

Custom Setup The detailed settings for wireless LAN can be changed. You can check the connection with a

wireless network by selecting [Connect].

Netwk Name(SSID) Set the SSID (Service Set Identifier) of the wireless LAN to which the machine connects.

NOTE

Up to 32 characters can be entered.

Connection Mode Set the connection mode.

Value: Ad Hoc, Infrastructure

NOTE

Ad Hoc: Directly communicates with the device without going through an access point. This

method cannot be used to connect to two or more devices.

Infrastructure: Performs communication through an access point.

Channel Set channel. Use [▲] or [▼] or the numeric keys to enter a number.

Value: 1 to 11

Netwk Authentic. Select network authentication type. To select other options, open the device home page from a

computer.

Value: Open, Shared, WPA-PSK*1, WPA2-PSK*1

8-19

Setup and Registration (System Menu) > System Menu

Primary Network

[System Menu/Counter] key > [▲] [▼] key > [System/Network] > [OK] key > [▲] [▼] key > [Primary Network] > [OK]

key

Encryption Select encryption settings. The setting values vary depending on the "Netwk Authentic."

setting.

Data Encryption Set the encryption method.

When "Netwk Authentic." is set to [Open] or [Shared]:

Value: Disable, WEP

When "Netwk Authentic." is set to [WPA-PSK] or [WPA2-PSK]:

Value: TKIP*2, AES, Auto*2

WEP Key Register the WEP key. Select [Edit] and Enter the WEP Key using the numeric keys.

NOTE

Up to 26 characters can be entered.

Character Entry Method (page 11-9)

Preshared Key*3 Register the Preshared Key. Select [Edit] and Enter the Preshared Key using the numeric

keys.

NOTE

The number of characters is between 8 and 64.

Character Entry Method (page 11-9)

*1 Not displayed if you selected [Ad Hoc] for "Connection Mode".

*2 Not displayed if you selected [WPA2-PSK] for "Netwk Authentic.".

*3 Displayed if you selected [WPA-PSK] or [WPA2-PSK] for "Netwk Authentic.".

NOTE

This function is displayed when the optional Network Interface Kit or Wireless Network Interface Kit is installed.

Item Description

Primary Network Specify the network interface card to be used for the send function, the network authentication

and connecting to external address book.

Value: Wi-Fi, Wired Network, Option Network

Item Description

8-20

Setup and Registration (System Menu) > System Menu

I/F Block Set.

[System Menu/Counter] key > [▲] [▼] key > [System/Network] > [OK] key > [▲] [▼] key > [I/F Block Set.] > [OK] key

This allows you to protect this machine by blocking the interface with external devices such as USB hosts or optional

interfaces.

Bluetooth Set.

[System Menu/Counter] key > [▲] [▼] key > [System/Network] > [OK] key > [▲] [▼] key > [Bluetooth Set.] > [OK]

key

Security Level

[

System Menu/Counter

] key > [

▲

] [

▼

] key > [

System/Network

] > [

] key > [

▲

] [

▼

] key > [

Security Level

] > [

] key

Item Description

USB Host This locks and protects the USB port (USB host).

Value: Unblock, Block

USB Device This locks and protects the USB interface connector (USB Device).

Value: Unblock, Block

USB Storage This locks and protects the USB memory slot.

Value: Unblock, Block

NOTE

This function is available when USB Host is set to [Unblock].

Option I/F This locks and protects the optional interface slots.

Value: Unblock, Block

NOTE

If the machine has two optional interface slots, you can set this feature for each slot.

IMPORTANT

After changing the setting, restart the network or turn the machine OFF and then ON.

NOTE

This function is displayed when the Bluetooth adapter is installed.

Item Description

Bluetooth Use Bluetooth Keyboard.

Value: Off, On

Search Device Select the keyboard to be used.

Item Description

Security Level Specify the security level.

Value

Low: This mode is used during maintenance. Do not use normally.

High: This is the security setting we recommend. Use this setting normally.

Very High: In addition to [High] setting, this setting disables the machine settings to be

changed from external command.

8-21

Setup and Registration (System Menu) > System Menu

Data Security

[System Menu/Counter] key > [▲] [▼] key > [System/Network] > [OK] key > [▲] [▼] key > [Data Security] > [OK] key

Configure settings for data stored in the optional SSD and machine's memory.

Item Description

SSD Initializ. This changes security function settings.

NOTE

• This function is displayed when the optional SSD is installed and the optional Data Security

Kit is activated.

• Input of the security password is required to change security function settings. The initial

setting for the Security Password is "000000".

Security Passwd You can customize the security password so that only the administrator can use the security kit.

Enter a password that uses six to 16 alphanumeric characters and symbols.

You will need to enter the password again for confirmation.

IMPORTANT

Avoid any easy-to-guess numbers for the security password (e.g. 11111111 or 12345678).

Initialization This can be used to delete all the data stored in the SSD. Overwrite all the data stored in the

SSD when disposing of the machine.

IMPORTANT

If you accidentally turn the power switch off during initialization, the SSD might possibly

crash or initialization might fail.

NOTE

If you accidentally turn off power during initialization, turn it back on.

Initialization will restart automatically.

DataSanitization Return the following information registered in the machine to the factory defaults.

• System settings

• Data saved in Custom Box

• Optional applications

IMPORTANT

Data saved in an application or SD card cannot be erased. To erase data on an SD card,

you must format the SD card.

NOTE

• Once in progress, the processing cannot canceled.

• Before performing this function, disconnect modular, network, and other cables.

• Before performing this function, set all interface block settings to [Unblock].

I/F Block Set. (page 8-20)

• Do not turn off the main power switch while sanitizing the data. If the main power is turned

off during data erasing, erasing will be executed automatically when the power is restored,

however, complete erasure cannot be guaranteed.

Run Immediately Data Sanitization will be performed.

Schedule Completely erase address and image data saved in the device at the scheduled time.

Value: Off, On

If [On] is selected, set the date and time that sanitization is to be performed. The setting range

is Year (2000 to 2037), Month (1 to 12), Day (1 to 31), Hour (00 to 23).

Device Use The device use restriction after the data sanitization is completed.

The device cannot be used if [Prohibit] is selected.

Value: Permit, Prohibit

8-22

Setup and Registration (System Menu) > System Menu

Restart

[System Menu/Counter] key > [▲] [▼] key > [System/Network] > [OK] key > [▲] [▼] key > [Restart] > [OK] key

Op Functions

[System Menu/Counter] key > [▲] [▼] key > [System/Network] > [OK] key > [▲] [▼] key > [Op Functions] > [OK] key

Software Version

[

System Menu/Counter

] key > [

▲

] [

▼

] key > [

System/Network

] > [

] key > [

▲

] [

▼

] key > [

Software Version

] > [

] key

Item Description

Restart Restart the CPU without turning the power switch off. Use this to deal with any unstable

operation by the machine. (Same as the computer restart.)

Item Description

Op Functions You can use the optional applications installed on this machine.

Optional Applications (page 11-7)

Item Description

Software Version

Check the machine's system and engine software versions.

8-23

Setup and Registration (System Menu) > System Menu

FAX Server Settings

[System Menu/Counter] key > [▲] [▼] key > [System/Network] > [OK] key > [▲] [▼] key > [FAX Server Set.] >

[OK]key

Configure settings for FAX Server.

User/Job Account

[System Menu/Counter] key > [▲] [▼] key > [User/Job Account] > [OK] key

Configure settings related to machine management.

Overview of User Login Administration (page 9-2)

Overview of Job Accounting (page 9-25)

Unknown ID Job (page 9-42)

User Property

[System Menu/Counter] key > [▲] [▼] key > [User Property] > [OK] key

Allows you to view information about logged in users and edit some of that information.

Enabling User Login Administration (page 9-3)

Item Description

FAX Server Select whether or not to use FAX Server.

Value: Off, On

Address Settings Set the prefix, suffix, and domain name to be assigned to the address.

NOTE

For the fax server information, ask your fax server administrator.

File Format Select the default type of the files to be sent.

Value: PDF, TIFF, XPS

AddrBookDefaults Set the expansion address book to be used.

Value: Machine AddrBook, Ext. Address Book

NOTE

• This appears when [On] is set in fax server.

• This does not appear when extension address book is not enabled.

Command Center RX User Guide

8-24

Setup and Registration (System Menu) > System Menu

Common Settings

Configures overall machine operation.

Language

[System Menu/Counter] key > [▲] [▼] key > [Common Settings] > [OK] key > [▲] [▼] key > [Language] > [OK] key

Default Screen

[

System Menu/Counter

] key > [

▲

] [

▼

] key > [

Common Settings

] > [

] key > [

▲

] [

▼

] key > [

Default Screen

] > [

] key

Sound

[System Menu/Counter] key > [▲] [▼] key > [Common Settings] > [OK] key > [▲] [▼] key > [Sound] > [OK] key

Display Bright. (Display Brightness)

[

System Menu/Counter

] key > [

▲

] [

▼

] key > [

Common Settings

] > [

] key > [

▲

] [

▼

] key > [

Display Bright.

] > [

] key

Item Description

Language Select the language displayed on the message display.

Item Description

Default Screen Select the screen appearing right after start-up (default screen).

Value: Status, Copy, Send, FAX, Document Box

Item Description

Buzzer Set options for buzzer sound during the machine operations.

Key Confirmation Emit a sound when the operation panel keys are selected.

Value: Off, On

Job Finish Emit a sound when a print job is normally completed.

Value: Off, On, FAX RX Only*1

*1 Only on products with the fax function installed.

Ready Emit a sound when the warm-up is completed.

Value: Off, On

Warning Emit a sound when errors occur.

Value: Off, On

Keyboard Confirm Emit a sound to confirm keypresses with a sound.

Value: Off, On

FAX Speaker*1 FAX Operation Guide

FAX Monitor *1 FAX Operation Guide

Item Description

Display Bright. Set the brightness of the message display.

Value: Darker -3, Darker -2, Darker -1, Normal 0, Lighter +1, Lighter +2, Lighter +3

8-25

Setup and Registration (System Menu) > System Menu

Orig./Paper Set.

[

System Menu/Counter

] key > [

▲

] [

▼

] key > [

Common Settings

] > [

] key > [

▲

] [

▼

] key > [

Orig./Paper Set.

] > [

] key

Configure settings for originals.

Item Description

Custom Orig. Size Set up frequently-used custom original size.

The custom size option is displayed on the screen to select original size.

Value

Metric

X: 50 to 356 mm (in 1 mm increments)

Y: 50 to 216 mm (in 1 mm increments)

Inch

X: 1.97 to 14.02" (in 0.01" increments)

Y: 1.97 to 8.50" (in 0.01" increments)

X=Length, Y=Width

Detect Orig.(DP) Select whether to automatically detect originals of the document processor.

Auto Detect Select whether to enable automatic detection of original size.

Value: Off, On

System of Units Select metric or inch for the unit of original size detection.

Value: Metric, Inch

LGL/OFII/216x340 As Legal, OficioII and 216 x 340 mm are similar in size, select either one of them for automatic

detection.

Value: Legal, OficioII, 216 x 340 mm

NOTE

When [Auto Detect] is set to [Off], this function will not be displayed.

When [System of Units] is set to [Metric], this function will not be displayed.

Def. Orig. Size Set the default original size.

Value: A4, A5, A6, B5, B6, Folio*1, 216 × 340 mm*1, Letter, Legal*1, Statement, Executive,

Oficio II*1, 16K

*1 Not displayed for inch models.

Horizontal

8-26

Setup and Registration (System Menu) > System Menu

Item Description

Custom PaperSize Set up frequently-used custom paper size.

One custom paper size is set for each paper supply source. The custom size option is

displayed on the screen to select paper size.

Cassette 1 Size*1

*1 Only set this when the size dial on the cassette is set to "Other".

Value

Metric

X: 140 to 216 mm (in 1 mm increments)

Y: 210 to 356 mm (in 1 mm increments)

Inch

X: 5.50 to 8.50" (in 0.01" increments)

Y: 8.25 to 14.02" (in 0.01" increments)

X=Length, Y=Width

Cassette 2 (to 5) Size*1 Register the custom paper size to be used in Cassettes 2 to 5.

Value

Metric

X: 92 to 216 mm (in 1 mm increments)

Y: 162 to 356 mm (in 1 mm increments)

Inch

X: 3.62 to 8.50" (in 0.01" increments)

Y: 6.38 to 14.02" (in 0.01" increments)

MP Tray Size Register the custom paper size to be used in the multi purpose tray.

Value

Metric

X: 70 to 216 mm (in 1 mm increments)

Y: 148 to 356 mm (in 1 mm increments)

Inch

X: 2.76 to 8.50" (in 0.01" increments)

Y: 5.83 to 14.02" (in 0.01" increments)

X=Length, Y=Width

Cassette 1 (to 5) Set. Select the paper size and media type for cassettes 1 to 5.

Cassette 1 (to 5) Set. (Cassette 1 (to 5) Settings) (page 8-28)

MP Tray Set. Select the paper size and media type for the multi purpose tray.

MP Tray Set. (MP Tray Settings) (page 8-28)

Vertical

Vertical Horizontal

8-27

Setup and Registration (System Menu) > System Menu

Item Description

Media Type Set. Select weight for each media type.

For Custom 1-8, settings for duplex printing and media type name can be changed.

Media Type Setting (page 8-29)

Media for Auto Select a default media type for auto paper selection when [Auto] is selected of Paper

Selection. If [Plain] is selected, the paper source with plain paper loaded in the specific size is

selected. Select [All Media Types] for the paper source with any kind of paper loaded in the

specific size.

Value: All Media Types, Plain, Transparency, Rough, Vellum, Labels, Recycled,

Preprinted, Bond, Cardstock, Color, Prepunched, Letterhead, Envelope, Thick,

High Quality, Custom 1 to 8

Def. PaperSource Select the default paper source from Cassette 1-5 and multi purpose tray.

Value: Cassette 1 to 5, MP Tray

NOTE

[Cassette 2] to [Cassette 5] are displayed when optional paper feeder is installed.

SpecialPaper Act. When printing on Prepunched, Preprint, and Letterhead, punch-holes might not be aligned or

the print direction might be upside-down depending on how originals are set and the

combination of copying functions. In such a case, select [Adj. PrintDirect] to adjust the print

direction. When paper orientation is not important, select [Speed Priority].

If [Adj. PrintDirect] is selected, load paper according to the steps below.

Example: copying on Letterhead

Value: Adj. PrintDirect, Speed Priority

Paper Setup Msg Set whether to display the confirmation screen for the paper setting when a new paper is set for

each cassette.

Value: Off, On

NOTE

[Cassette 2] to [Cassette 5] are displayed when optional paper feeder is installed.

Cassette 1 to 5

MP Tray

Multi Purpose TrayCassetteFinishedPaperOriginal

8-28

Setup and Registration (System Menu) > System Menu

Cassette 1 (to 5) Set. (Cassette 1 (to 5) Settings)

[System Menu/Counter] key > [▲] [▼] key > [Common Settings] > [OK] key > [▲] [▼] key > [Orig./Paper Set.] >

[OK] key > [▲] [▼] key > [Cassette 1 (to 5) Set.] > [OK] key

Select paper size and media type for Cassettes 1 to 5.

MP Tray Set. (MP Tray Settings)

[

System Menu/Counter

] key > [

▲

] [

▼

] key > [

Common Settings

]

> [OK] key > [▲] [▼] key > [Orig./Paper Set.]

[

] key > [

▲

] [

▼

] key > [

MP Tray Set.

] > [

] key

Select paper size and media type for the multi purpose tray.

Item Description

Cassette 1 (to 5) Size*1

*1 Only set this when the size dial on the cassette is set to "Other".

Available options are as follows:

Value

Cassette 1: A4, A5, B5, Folio, 216 × 340 mm, Letter, Legal, Statement, Executive, Oficio II, 16K,

ISO B5, Envelope C5, Custom

Cassettes 2 to 5: A4, A5, B5, B6, Folio, 216 × 340 mm, Letter, Legal, Statement, Executive,

Oficio II, 16K, ISO B5, Envelope #10, Envelope #9, Envelope #6, Envelope Monarch,

Envelope DL, Envelope C5, Oufuku Hagaki (Return postcard), Youkei 4, Youkei 2, Custom

Cassette 1 (to 5) Type*2

*2 To change to a media type other than "Plain".

Media Type Setting (page 8-29).

When a paper weight that cannot be loaded in the cassette is set for a media type, that media type does not appear.

Select the media type.

Value

Cassette 1: Plain (60 to 105 g/m2), Rough, Recycled, Preprinted*3, Bond, Color, Prepunched*3,

Letterhead*3, High Quality, Custom 1 - 8

Cassettes 2 to 5: Plain (60 to 105 g/m2), Rough, Recycled, Preprinted*3, Bond, Color,

Prepunched*3, Letterhead*3, Envelope, High Quality, Custom 1 - 8

*3 To print on preprinted or prepunched paper or on letterhead.

SpecialPaper Act. (page 8-27)

Item Description

MP Tray Size Available options are as follows:

Value: A4, A5, A6, B5, B6, Folio, 216 × 340 mm, Letter, Legal, Statement, Executive, Oficio II,

16K, ISO B5, Envelope #10, Envelope #9, Envelope #6, Envelope Monarch, Envelope DL,

Envelope C5, Hagaki (Cardstock), Oufuku Hagaki (Return postcard), Youkei 4, Youkei 2,

Custom*1

*1 For instructions on how to specify the custom paper size.

Custom PaperSize (page 8-26)

MP Tray Type*2

*2 To change to a media type other than "Plain".

Media Type Setting (page 8-29)

Select the media type.

Values: Plain (60 to 105 g/m2), Transparency, Rough, Vellum, Labels, Recycled, Preprinted*3,

Bond, Cardstock, Color, Prepunched*3, Letterhead*3, Envelope,

Thick (106 to 220 g/m2), High Quality, Custom 1-8

*3 To print on preprinted or prepunched paper or on letterhead.

SpecialPaper Act. (page 8-27)

8-29

Setup and Registration (System Menu) > System Menu

Media Type Setting

The following media type and paper weight combinations are available.

Each media type's default weight is indicated.

For Custom 1-8, settings for duplex printing and media type name can be changed.

Preset Limit

[

System Menu/Counter

] key > [

▲

] [

▼

] key > [

Common Settings

] > [

] key > [

▲

] [

▼

] key > [

Preset Limit

] > [

] key

Measurement

[

System Menu/Counter

] key > [

▲

] [

▼

] key > [

Common Settings

] > [

] key > [

▲

] [

▼

] key > [

Measurement

] > [

] key

Paper Weight Weight (g/m2)Paper Weight Weight (g/m2)

Light 52 g/m² to 59 g/m² Heavy 1 106 g/m² to 135 g/m²

Normal 1 60 g/m² to 74 g/m² Heavy 2 136 g/m² to 163 g/m²

Normal 2 75 g/m² to 90 g/m² Heavy 3 164 g/m² to 220 g/m²

Normal 3 91 g/m² to 105 g/m² Extra Heavy Transparencies

Media Type Default Media Type Default

Plain Normal 2 Cardstock Heavy 3

Transparency Extra Heavy Color Normal 2

Rough Normal 2 Prepunched Normal 2

Vellum Light Letterhead Normal 2

Labels Heavy 1 Envelope*1

*1 The processing speed will be slower than normal.

Heavy 3

Recycled Normal 2 Thick Heavy 3

Preprinted Normal 2 High Quality Normal 2

Bond Normal 3 Custom 1 - 8 Normal 2

Item Description

Duplex Print Permit Duplex printing allowed.

Prohibit Duplex printing not allowed.

Name Change names for Custom 1-8. Names should be not more than 16 characters. Selecting

media type at multi purpose tray, the name after change will be displayed.

Character Entry Method (page 11-9)

Item Description

Preset Limit Restrict the number of copies that can be made at one time.

Value: 1 to 999 copies.

Item Description

Measurement Select inch or metric for the unit for paper dimensions.

Value: inch, mm

8-30

Setup and Registration (System Menu) > System Menu

Error Handling

[

System Menu/Counter

] key > [

▲

] [

▼

] key > [

Common Settings

] > [

] key > [

▲

] [

▼

] key > [

Error Handling

] > [

] key

Select whether to cancel or continue the job when error has occurred.

Date Setting

[

System Menu/Counter

] key > [

▲

] [

▼

] key > [

Common Settings

] > [

] key > [

▲

] [

▼

] key > [

Date Setting

] > [

] key

Configure settings related to the date and time.

Item Description

DuplexPaperError

Select what to do when duplex printing is not possible for the selected paper size and media type.

Value

1-sided: Printed in 1-sided

Display Error: Message to cancel printing is displayed.

PaperMismatchErr Select what to do when the selected paper size or type does not match paper size or type

loaded in the specified paper source while printing from the computer by specifying the

cassette or multi-purpose tray.

Value

Ignore: The setting is ignored and the job is printed.

Display Error: Message to cancel printing is displayed.

Item Description

Date/Time Set the date and time for the location where you use the machine. When you send an E-mail

using the transmission function, the date and time as set here will be printed in the header of

the E-mail message.

Value: Year (2000 to 2037), Month (01 to 12), Day (01 to 31), Hour (00 to 23),

Min. (00 to 59), Second (00 to 59)

Setting Date and Time (page 2-16)

NOTE

If you change the date/time while using the trial version of an application, you will no longer be

able to use the application.

Date Format Select the display format of year, month, and date. The year is displayed in Western notation.

Value: Month/Day/Year, Day/Month/Year, Year/Month/Day

Time Zone Set the time difference from GMT. Choose the nearest listed location from the list. If you select

a region that utilizes summer time, configure settings for summer time.

Setting Date and Time (page 2-16)

Summer Time

8-31

Setup and Registration (System Menu) > System Menu

Timer Setting

[

System Menu/Counter

] key > [

▲

] [

▼

] key > [

Common Settings

] > [

] key > [

▲

] [

▼

] key > [

Timer Setting

] > [

] key

Configure settings related to the time.

Item Description

Auto Panel Reset If no jobs are run for a certain period of time, automatically reset settings and return to the

default setting. Select to use Auto Panel Reset or not.

Value: Off, On

NOTE

The time allowed to elapse before the panel is reset is set with the "PanelReset TimerPanel

Reset Timer".

PanelReset Timer (page 8-31)

PanelReset Timer

If you select [

] for Auto Panel Reset, set the amount of time to wait before Auto Panel Reset.

Value: 5 to 495 seconds (in 5 second increments)

NOTE

This function is displayed when [Auto Panel Reset] is set to [On].

Low Power Timer Set amount of time before entering the Low Power mode.

Value

For Europe: 1 to 120 minutes (1 minute increments)

Except for Europe: 1 to 240 minutes (1 minute increments)

Low Power Mode (page 2-25)

Sleep Level (models except for

Europe)*1

Select the Sleep level.

Set the Energy Saver mode to reduce power consumption even more than

Quick Recovery

mode.

Value: Quick Recovery, Energy Saver

(Detailed settings)

Set whether to use the Energy Saver mode for the following functions individually:

• Card Reader*2

•Application

Value: Off, On

NOTE

When the machine enters Energy Saver, the ID card cannot be recognized.

Sleep Rules (models for

Europe)

Select whether to use the Sleep mode for the following functions individually:

• Card Reader*2

•Application

Value: Off, On

NOTE

When the machine enters Energy Saver, the ID card cannot be recognized.

Sleep Timer Set amount of time before entering Sleep.

Value

For Europe

1 to 120 minutes (1 minute increments)

Except for Europe

1 to 240 minutes (1 minute increments)

Sleep and Auto Sleep (page 2-25)

8-32

Setup and Registration (System Menu) > System Menu

WeeklyTimer Set. Configure settings for switching the machine to OFF and waking it automatically at a specified

time for each day of the week.

Weekly Timer Select whether to use Weekly Timer.

Value: Off, On

Schedule Specify the time for each day of the week at which the machine turns OFF.

Retry Settings －

Limited Retries Select whether to limit the numbers of retries for turning OFF this machine.

Value: On, Off

Retry Times If you select [On] for Limited Retries, set the number of retries for turning OFF this machine.

Value: 0 to 10 times

Retry Interval Set the retry interval.

Use [-] / [+] to enter a number.

Value: 10 to 60 seconds (increments of 10 seconds)

Power Off Rule (models for

Europe)

Select whether or not the machine enters Power Off mode for the following function. Select

[On] to set the Power Off mode.

•Network

•FAX

• USB Cable

• USB Host

• RAM Disk

•NIC

• Remote Diag.

NOTE

Even when any of the functions is set to [On], if [FAX] is set to [Off], the machine does not

enter Power Off Mode.

Even when [Network] or [USB Cable] is set to [Off], if the machine does not communicate with

the other devices, the machine will enter Power Off Mode.

Power Off Timer (models for

Europe)

Select whether to turn off the power automatically after a period of inactivity.

Value: 1 hour, 2 hours, 3 hours, 4 hours, 5 hours, 6 hours, 9 hours, 12 hours, 1 day, 2

days, 3 days, 4 days, 5 days, 6 days, 1 week

Auto Err. Clear If an error occurs during processing, processing stops to wait for the next step to be taken by

the user. In the Auto Error Clear mode, automatically clear the error after a set amount of time

elapses.

Value: Off, On

Err. Clear Timer If you select [On] for Auto Error Clear, set the amount of time to wait before automatically

clearing errors.

Value: 5 to 495 seconds (in 5 second increments)

NOTE

This function is displayed when [Auto Err. Clear] is set to [On].

Unusable Time FAX Operation Guide

Ping Timeout*3 Set the time until timeout occurs when [Ping] is executed in "System/Network".

Value: 1 to 30 seconds (in 1 second increments)

*1 When the optional Network Interface Kit is installed, this is not displayed.

*2 Displayed only when the optional Card Authentication Kit is activated.

*3 Only on products with the fax function installed.

*4 Displayed only when the optional Network Interface Kit is installed.

Item Description

8-33

Setup and Registration (System Menu) > System Menu

Function Defaults

[System Menu/Counter] key > [▲] [▼] key > [Common Settings] > [OK] key > [▲] [▼] key > [Function Defaults] >

[OK] key

Item Description

Color Selection Select the default color mode for scanning documents.

Value: Auto (Color/Gray), Auto (Color/B & W), Full Color, Grayscale, Black & White

Scan Resolution Select the default scanning resolution.

Value: 200×100dpi Norm., 200×200dpi Fine, 200×400dpi S.Fin, 300×300dpi,

400×400dpi U.Fin, 600×600dpi

FAX Resolution FAX Operation Guide

Orig.Image(Copy) Set the default original document type for copying.

Value: Text+Photo, Photo, Text, Graphic/Map

Orig.Image(Send) Set the default original document type for sending.

Value: Text+Photo, Photo, Text, for OCR, Light Text/Line

NOTE

[for OCR] is only available when "Color Selection" is set to [Auto (Color/B & W)] or [Black &

White].

Zoom

Select the enlarged/reduced default when paper size/sending size changed after the originals set.

Value: 100%, Auto

Collate Set the defaults for Collate.

Value: Off, On

Orig.Orientation Set the original orientation defaults.

Value: Top Edge on Top, Top Edge on Left

Backgrnd(Copy) Set the default Backgrnd Density (Copy).

Value: Off, Auto, Manual (Darker 5)

Backgrnd(Send) Set the default Backgrnd Density (Send).

Value: Off, Auto, Manual (Darker 5)

EcoPrint Select the EcoPrint default.

Value: Off, On

Prevent B-t Copy Set the default value for preventing bleed-through (Copy).

Value: Off, On

Prevent B-t Send Set the default Prevent Bleed (Send).

Value: Off, On

Skip Blank(Copy) Set the default Skip Blank(Copy) settings.

Value: Off, On

Skip Blank(Send) Set the default Skip Blank(Send) settings.

Value: Off, On

File Name Entry Set an automatically entered name (default) for jobs. Additional information such as Date and

Job No. can also be set.

Value

File Name: Up to 32 characters can be entered.

Additional Info: None, Date, Job No., Job No. + Date, Date + Job No.

8-34

Setup and Registration (System Menu) > System Menu

Subject/Body Set the subject and body automatically entered (default subject and body) when sending the

scanned originals by E-mail.

Value

Subject: Up to 256 characters can be entered.

Body: Up to 500 characters can be entered.

Con.scan-Copy Set the continuous scan (copy) defaults.

Value: Off, On

Con.scan-FAX FAX Operation Guide

Con.scan-Others Set the continuous scan (excludes copy) defaults.

Value: Off, On

File Format Select the default type of the files to be sent.

Value: PDF, TIFF, XPS, JPEG, OpenXPS, High Comp. PDF

File Separation Select the default file separation setting.

Value: Off, Each Page

JPEG/TIFF Print Select the image size (resolution) when printing JPEG or TIFF file.

Value: Paper Size, Image Resolution, Print Resolution

XPS FitTo Page Set the default value for the XPS fit to page function.

Value: Off, On

Detail Setting —

2 in 1 Layout Set the default for the 2-in-1 layout of Combine copies.

Value: L to R T to B, R to L B to T

4 in 1 Layout Set the default for the 4-in-1 layout of Combine copies.

Value: Right then Down, Down then Right, Left then Down, Down then Left

Border Line Set the default for the border line of Combine copies.

Value: None, Solid Line, Dotted Line, Positioning Mark

Orig. Binding Set the default binding side for duplex scanning.

Value: Left/Right, Top

Finish. Binding Set the default for the binding orientation of finished two-sided copies.

Value: Left/Right, Top

Image Quality Select the default PDF/TIFF/JPEG/XPS/OpenXPS file quality.

Value: 1 Low(High Comp) to 5 High(Low Comp)

Color TIFF Comp. Select the compression method for sending the color documents in the TIFF format.

Value: TIFF V6, TTN2

PDF/A Select the default PDF/A setting.

Value: Off, PDF/A-1a, PDF/A-1b, PDF/A-2a, PDF/A-2b, PDF/A-2u

High Comp. PDF Select the default quality setting for high compressed PDF files.

Value: Comp. Priority, Standard, Quality Priority

ItemsToSkip Copy Select the default Items to Skip (Copy) settings.

Value: Blank+Ruled Line, Blank Pages Only, Blank+Some Text

ItemsToSkip Send Select the default Items to Skip (Send/Store) settings.

Value: Blank+Ruled Line, Blank Pages Only, Blank+Some Text

Item Description

8-35

Setup and Registration (System Menu) > System Menu

[System Menu/Counter] key > [▲] [▼] key > [Common Settings] > [OK] key > [▲] [▼] key > [Login Operation] >

[OK] key

RAM Disk Mode

[System Menu/Counter] key > [▲] [▼] key > [Common Settings] > [OK] key > [▲] [▼] key > [RAM Disk Mode] >

[OK] key

Optional Memory

[System Menu/Counter] key > [▲] [▼] key > [Common Settings] > [OK] key > [▲] [▼] key > [Optional Memory] >

[OK] key

Item Description

Value: Use Numeric Key, Select Character

NOTE

This function will not be displayed when the optional SSD is installed.

Item Description

RAM Disk Mode A RAM disk can be created and its size can be set.

Creating a RAM disk makes it possible to print from a Job Box.

Value

RAM Disk Mode: Off, On

RAM Disk Size: The setting range varies depending on the amount of memory installed

and the option memory usage setting.

IMPORTANT

After changing the setting, restart the network or turn the machine OFF and then ON.

Item Description

Optional Memory When optional memory is installed, select the memory allocation scheme based on the

application in which you are using the equipment.

Value: Normal, Printer Priority, Copy Priority

IMPORTANT

After changing the setting, restart the network or turn the machine OFF and then ON.

8-36

Setup and Registration (System Menu) > System Menu

Disp. Status/Log

[System Menu/Counter] key > [▲] [▼] key > [Common Settings] > [OK] key > [▲] [▼] key > [Disp. Status/Log] >

[OK] key

Keyboard Type

[System Menu/Counter] key > [▲] [▼] key > [Common Settings] > [OK] key > [▲] [▼] key > [Keyboard Type] >

[OK]key

Low Toner Alert

[System Menu/Counter] key > [▲] [▼] key > [Common Settings] > [OK] key > [▲] [▼] key > [Low Toner Alert] >

[OK]key

Show PowerOffMsg

[System Menu/Counter] key > [▲] [▼] key > [Common Settings] > [OK] key > [▲] [▼] key > [Show PowerOffMsg] >

[OK] key

Item Description

Disp. Status/Log Set the display method of the Status/Log.

JobsDetailStatus Value: Show All, My Jobs Only, Hide All

Jobs Log Value: Show All, My Jobs Only, Hide All

FAX Log*1

*1 Only on products with the fax function installed.

Value: Show All, Hide All

Item Description

Keyboard Type Select the type of keyboard that you want to use.

Value: US-English, US-English with Euro, French, German, UK-English

Item Description

Low Toner Alert Set the amount of remaining toner to notify the administrator when to order a toner when the

toner is running low.

Value: Off, On

NOTE

Selecting [Off] alerts you low toner when the amount of remaining toner becomes 5%.

If [On] is selected, set the amount of remaining toner to alert. The setting range is 5 to 100% (in

1% increments).

Item Description

Show PowerOffMsg Set the mode whether display a confirmation message in power supply off.

Value: Off, On

8-37

Setup and Registration (System Menu) > System Menu

EnergySaver Set.

[System Menu/Counter] key > [▲] [▼] key > [Common Settings] > [OK] key > [▲] [▼] key > [EnergySaver Set.] >

[OK] key

Msg Banner Print

[System Menu/Counter] key > [▲] [▼] key > [Common Settings] > [OK] key > [▲] [▼] key > [Msg Banner Print] >

[OK] key

Item Description

Recovery Level Select the method of recovery from energy saver.

Value:

Full Recovery: This mode enables the use of all functions immediately. However,

this mode saves less energy.

Normal Recovery: In this mode, you can select the method from the following:

enabling the use of all functions immediately or enabling the use of

desired functions only.

If you want to use all functions immediately, press the power switch

to execute recovery.

Power Saving: This mode enables the use of desired functions only. This mode

saves energy most effectively.

Item Description

Msg Banner Print Set whether the confirmation screen appears before each sheet is printed when printing

multiple banner sheets.

Value: Off, On

8-38

Setup and Registration (System Menu) > System Menu

Copy

[System Menu/Counter] key > [▲] [▼] key > [Copy] > [OK] key

Configures settings for copying functions.

Item Description

Paper Selection Set the default paper selection.

Value: Auto, Def. PaperSource

AutoPaperSelect. If [Auto] is selected for Paper Selection, set the paper size selection method when the zoom

changes.

Value

MostSuitableSize: Select paper based on the current zoom and the size of the original.

Same as OrigSize: Select paper that matches the size of the original, regardless the

zoom.

Auto % Priority When a paper source of different size from the original is selected, select whether automatic

zoom (reduce/zoom) is performed.

Value: Off, On

Reserve Priority Specify whether the default screen appears when a subsequent copy job is reserved while

printing is in progress. To have the default screen appear, select [On].

Value: Off, On

Select Key Set. Commonly used copying functions can be registered to the Select key. Functions can be easily

configured by selecting the Select key.

Value: None, Quiet Mode, Paper Selection, Collate, ID Card Copy, Duplex, Zoom,

Combine, Original Size, Orig. Orientation, Mixed Size Orig., Original Image, Density,

EcoPrint, Continuous Scan, File Name Entry, JobFinish Notice, Print Override,

Sharpness, Contrast, Backgrnd Density, Prevent Bleed-t, Skip Blank Page

8-39

Setup and Registration (System Menu) > System Menu

Printer

[System Menu/Counter] key > [▲] [▼] key > [Printer] > [OK] key

Printing from computers, settings are generally made on the application software screen. However, the following

settings are available for configuring the defaults to customize the machine.

Item Description

Emulation Set. Select the emulation for operating this machine by commands oriented to other types of

printers.

Value: Line Printer, IBM Proprinter, EPSON LQ-850, PCL6, KPDL, KPDL (Auto)

NOTE

When you have selected [KPDL] or [KPDL (Auto)], set "KPDL Error Rpt", too.

Alt. Emulation

When you have selected [

KPDL (Auto)

] as emulation mode, you can switch between KPDL and

another emulation mode (alternative emulation) automatically according to the data to print.

Value: Line Printer, IBM Proprinter, EPSON LQ-850, PCL6

KPDL Error Rpt When an error has occurred during printing in KPDL emulation mode, set whether or not the

error report is output.

Value: Off, On

EcoPrint EcoPrint conserves toner when printing. This is recommended for test copies where faded

printing is not a problem.

Value: Off, On

Override A4/LTR Select whether to treat A4 size and Letter, which are similar in size, as the same size when

printing.

Value

Off: A4 and Letter are not regarded as the same in size.

On: A4 and Letter are regarded as the same in size. The machine will use whichever size

is in the paper source.

Duplex Select binding orientation for duplex mode.

Value: Off, Bind Long Edge, Bind Short Edge

Copies Set the default number of copies, from 1 to 999.

Value: 1 to 999 copies

Orientation Set the default orientation, [Portrait] or [Landscape].

Value: Portrait, Landscape

Wide A4 Turn this to on to increase the maximum number of characters that can be printed in a line for

an A4 page (78 characters at 10 pitch) and Letter size page (80 characters at 10 pitch). This

setting is only effective in PCL6 emulation.

Value: Off, On

FormFeed TimeOut Receiving print data from the computer, the machine may sometimes wait if there is no

information signaling that the last page does not have any more data to be printed. When the

preset timeout passes, the machine automatically prints paper. The options are between 5 and

495 seconds.

Value: 5 to 495 seconds (in 5 second increments)

LF Action Set the line feed action when the machine receives the line feed code (character code 0AH).

Value: LF Only, LF and CR, Ignore LF

CR Action Set the character return action when the machine receives the character return code (character

code 0DH).

Value: CR Only, LF and CR, Ignore CR

8-40

Setup and Registration (System Menu) > System Menu

Job Name Set whether the job name set in the printer driver is displayed.

Value: Off, On

NOTE

When selecting [On], select the job name to be displayed from [Job Name], [Job No.+Job

Name], or [Job Name+Job No.].

User Name Set whether the user name set in the printer driver is displayed.

Value: Off, On

MP Tray Priority If paper is set in the MP Tray then it is possible for priority to be given to that MP tray in the

paper feed.

Value

Off: The printer driver settings are followed.

Auto Feed: If Auto is selected in the printer driver and there is paper in the MP tray then

the paper feed will be from the MP tray.

Always: If there is paper in the MP tray then the paper feed will be from the MP tray

regardless of what is set in the printer driver.

Paper Feed Mode While printing from the computer, select how to feed paper when the paper source and type are

specified.

Value

Auto: Search the paper source that matches the selected paper size and type.

Fixed: Print on paper loaded in the specified paper source.

Auto Cass.Change Select the following actions when the paper runs out in the paper source while printing.

Value: Off, On

NOTE

When selecting [Off], the machine displays "Load paper in cassette #." (# is a cassette

number) or "Load paper in MP Tray", and stops printing.

Load the paper according to the paper source displayed to resume printing.

To print from the other paper source, select [Paper]. Select the desired paper source, and then

select the [OK] key.

When selecting [On], the machine continues printing automatically when the other cassette

contains the same paper as the currently-used cassette.

Resolution Set the resolution used for printing.

Value: 300dpi, 600dpi, Fine1200, Fast1200

NOTE

Settings that are received from the printer driver have priority over the operation panel settings.

KIR The machine is equipped with the smoothing function, which realizes an excellent printing of

about 9600 dpi (600 dpi × 15 gradation) × 600 dpi.

Value: Off, On

Job Terminator Set the condition to be regarded as the job end if the print job has not been processed to the

end due to the usage environment or for other reasons.

Value:

EOJ (End of Job): Up to the detection of a command indicating the end of job data is

regarded as one job.

End of Session: Data contained in one session of network connection is regarded as

one job.

UEL (Universal Exit Language): Up to detection of UEL at the end of the job is regarded

as one job.

Item Description

8-41

Setup and Registration (System Menu) > System Menu

Send

[System Menu/Counter] key > [▲] [▼] key > [Send] > [OK] key

Configures settings for sending functions.

FAX

[System Menu/Counter] key > [▲] [▼] key > [FAX] > [OK] key

Configure settings for FAX.

FAX Operation Guide

Item Description

Select Key Set. Commonly used sending functions can be registered to the Select key. Functions can be easily

configured by selecting the Select key.

Value: None, Quiet Mode, Color Selection, Original Size, Original Image,

Scan Resolution, Sending Size, Zoom, Orig. Orientation, Mixed Size Orig.,

Continuous Scan, File Format, File Name Entry, Subject/Body, Long Original,

JobFinish Notice, FAX Resolution*1, FAX Direct TX*1, FAX Delayed TX*1,

FAX RX Polling*1, FAXTXReport

*1, Density, Duplex, FTP Encrypted TX, File Separation,

Sharpness, Backgrnd Density, Prevent Bleed-t, Skip Blank Page

*1 Only on products with the fax function installed.

DestinationCheck Set the confirmation of destinations. *2

*2 Also applies when sending the fax.

Check beforeSend Select whether to display the confirmation screen of destinations after pressing the [Start] key

when performing sending jobs.

Value: Off, On

Check New Dest. When adding new destination, select whether to display the entry check screen to check the

entered destination.

Value: Off, On

New Dest. Entry Select whether to permit direct entry of destination.*2

Value: Permit, Prohibit

Recall Dest. Select whether to permit usage of [Recall] on the Send screen.*2

Value: Permit, Prohibit

Broadcast Set whether to enable broadcast.

Value: Permit, Prohibit

Default Screen Use this procedure to set the default screen displayed when you select the [Send] key.

Value: Destination, Address Book

Send and Forward Set whether to send the original to another destination and store it when sending images.

Forward Set the rule to send the original.

Value: Off, On

NOTE

When selecting [On], select rules to forward from [E-mail], [Folder (SMB)], [Folder (FTP)] and

[FAX]*1.

Destination Set the destination to which the original is forwarded. One destination can be set. You can

check and edit the set address.

Follow the steps below to register the destination.

• Address Book

• Address Entry

Specifying Destination (page 5-14)

8-42

Setup and Registration (System Menu) > System Menu

Document Box

[System Menu/Counter] key > [▲] [▼] key > [Document Box] > [OK] key

Configures settings related to the Custom Box, Job Box, Sub Address Box and Polling Box.

Item Description

Custom Box Configure settings for Custom Box.

Detail/Edit Using a Custom Box (page 5-33)

File Del. Time Set the time to automatically delete stored documents.

Value: Hour (00 to 23), Min. (00 to 59)

Sub Address Box*1

*1 Only on products with the fax function installed.

FAX Operation Guide

Job Box Configure settings for Job Box.

Quick Copy Jobs To maintain free space on the box, you can set the maximum number of stored jobs.

Value: number between 0 and 300

NOTE

When 0 is set, Quick Copy cannot be used.

JobRet. Deletion This setting specifies that documents, such as Private Printing, Quick Copying, or Proof and

Hold Printing, saved temporarily in the job box are automatically deleted after they have been

saved for a set time.

Value: Off, 1 hour, 4 hours, 1 day, 1 week

NOTE

This function is valid for documents saved after the function is set. Regardless of this function

setting, temporary documents are deleted when the main power switch is turned off.

Storage Media Select which storage media to use.

Value: SSD, SD Card

NOTE

This setting is not displayed if the optional SSD or SD card is not installed.

Polling Box*1 FAX Operation Guide

Select Key Set. Commonly used printing and storing functions can be registered to the Select key. Functions

used when printing and when saving can both be registered. Functions can be easily

configured by selecting the Select key.

Value

Print: None, Quiet Mode, Collate*2, Paper Selection*2, Duplex*2, EcoPrint*2,

File Name Entry, JobFinish Notice, Print Override, Encrypted PDF*3, JPEG/TIFF Print*3,

XPS FitTo Page*3, Del. after Print*4

Store: None, Quiet Mode, Color Selection*5, Original Size, Original Image,

Scan Resolution, Storing Size*5, Zoom*5, Orig. Orientation, Mixed Size Org.*5,

Continuous Scan, Long Original, File Format*5, File Separation*5, File Name Entry,

JobFinish Notice, Density, Duplex, Sharpness*5, Contrast*5, Backgrnd Density*5, Prevent

Bleed-t*5, Skip Blank Page

*2 Only displayed when printing from USB memory and Custom Box.

*3 Only displayed when printing from USB memory.

*4 Only displayed when printing from Sub Address Box and Custom Box.

*5 Not displayed when saving to Polling Box.

8-43

Setup and Registration (System Menu) > System Menu

Edit Destination

Address Book

[

System Menu/Counter

] key > [

▲

] [

▼

] key > [

Edit Destination

] > [

] key > [

▲

] [

▼

] key > [

Address Book

] > [

] key

Configure settings for address book.

Adding a Destination (Address Book) (page 3-25)

Edit Restriction

[

System Menu/Counter

] key > [

▲

] [

▼

] key > [

Edit Destination

] > [

] key > [

▲

] [

▼

] key >

[Edit Restriction]

> [

] key

AddrBookDefaults

[

System Menu/Counter

] key > [

▲

] [

▼

] key > [

Edit Destination

] > [

] key > [

▲

] [

▼

] key > [

AddrBookDefaults

] > [

] key

Print List

[System Menu/Counter] key > [▲] [▼] key > [Edit Destination] > [OK] key > [▲] [▼] key > [Print List] > [OK] key

FAX Operation Guide

Item Description

Address Book Restrict editing of the address book. If you selected [Admin. Only], you can only edit the

Address Book by logging in with administrator privileges.

Value: Off, Admin. Only

One Touch Key Restrict editing of the One Touch Key. If you selected [Admin. Only], you can only edit the One

Touch Key by logging in with administrator privileges.

Value: Off, Admin. Only

NOTE

This function does not appear when the External Address Book is not set.

Item Description

Address Book Set the type of address book that appears when the address book is displayed.

Value: Machine AddrBook, Ext Address Book

8-44

Setup and Registration (System Menu) > System Menu

Adjust/Maint.

[System Menu/Counter] key > [▲] [▼] key > [Adjust/Maint.] > [OK] key

Adjust printing quality and conduct machine maintenance.

Item Description

Quiet Mode Lower print and scan speed for quiet processing.

Quiet Mode Set the Quiet Mode. Select this mode when the running noise is uncomfortable.

Value: Off, On

Each Job It is possible to set the use of Quiet Mode for each job, such as copying and sending. Set

whether or not to permit the setting for each job.

Value: Permit, Prohibit

Copy Denst. Adj. Adjust copy density.

Value: -3 Lighter, -2, -1, 0 Normal, +1, +2, +3 Darker

Send/Box Density Adjust scan density when sending or storing the data in Document Box.

Value: -3 Lighter, -2, -1, 0 Normal, +1, +2, +3 Darker

Contrast (Copy) Increases or decreases the overall contrast of copies.

Value: -3, -2, -1, 0, 1, 2, 3

Contrast (Send) Increases or decreases the overall contrast when documents are sent or saved in a document

box.

Value: -3, -2, -1, 0, 1, 2, 3

Background Density Darkens or lightens overall background density adjustment.

Copy (Auto) Darkens or lightens overall background density adjustment during copying.

Value: -3 Lighter, -2, -1, 0 Normal, +1, +2, +3 Darker

Send/Box (Auto) Darkens or lightens overall background density when sending images or storing them in the

Document Box.

Value: -3 Lighter, -2, -1, 0 Normal, +1, +2, +3 Darker

EcoPrint Setting Select the default EcoPrint Setting.

Save Level(Copy) Select the default EcoPrint Setting at the time of copying.

Value: 1 (Lower) to 5 (Higher)

Raising the level reduces toner consumption, but image quality falls.

SaveLvl(Printer) Select the default EcoPrint Setting at the time of use of the printer.

Value: 1 (Lower) to 5 (Higher)

Raising the level reduces toner consumption, but image quality falls.

Print Density Adjust print density. Adjustment can be made in 5 levels.

Value: 1 (Lighter) to 5 (Darker)

AutoColorCorrect This setting allows you to adjust the detection level used by the machine to determine whether

the original is color or black and white during Auto Color Mode. Setting a lower value will result

in more originals being identified as color, while a larger value will tend to increase the number

of originals being identified as black and white.

Value: 1 to 5

8-45

Setup and Registration (System Menu) > System Menu

Correct. Bk Line Correct fine lines (streaks caused by contamination), which may appear on the image, when

the document processor is used.

Value

Off: No correction performed. Select this when you want to reproduce fine lines in the

original more clearly than with [On].

On: Correction performed.

Service Setting Settings for machine maintenance and inspection. This menu is primarily used by service

technicians to perform maintenance.

Item Description

9-1

User Authentication and

Accounting (User Login,

Job Accounting)

This chapter explains the following topics:

Overview of User Login Administration .............................................................................................................. 9-2

Enabling User Login Administration ................................................................................................................... 9-3

Setting User Login Administration ...................................................................................................................... 9-5

Authentication Security ............................................................................................................................ 9-5

Adding a User (Local User List) ............................................................................................................... 9-6

Changing User Properties ....................................................................................................................... 9-9

User Login Administration for Printing .................................................................................................... 9-11

To Manage the Users to Scan Using TWAIN ......................................................................................... 9-13

To Manage the Users to Scan Using WIA ............................................................................................. 9-14

To Manage the Users that Send Faxes from a PC ................................................................................ 9-15

Local Authoriz. (Local Authorization) ..................................................................................................... 9-16

Group Auth. (Group Authorization Settings) .......................................................................................... 9-17

Guest Authorization Set. ........................................................................................................................ 9-18

NW User Property (Obtain Network User Property) .............................................................................. 9-21

ID Card Settings .................................................................................................................................... 9-22

PIN Login Settings ................................................................................................................................. 9-23

Using User Login Administration ...................................................................................................................... 9-24

Login/Logout .......................................................................................................................................... 9-24

Overview of Job Accounting ............................................................................................................................ 9-25

Enabling Job Accounting ................................................................................................................................. 9-26

Job Accounting Access .......................................................................................................................... 9-27

Setting an Account ........................................................................................................................................... 9-28

Adding an Account ................................................................................................................................. 9-28

Restricting the Use of the Machine ........................................................................................................ 9-30

Editing an Account ................................................................................................................................. 9-31

Deleting an Account ............................................................................................................................... 9-32

Job Accounting for Printing .................................................................................................................... 9-33

Job Accounting for Scan Using TWAIN ................................................................................................. 9-34

Job Accounting for Scan Using WIA ...................................................................................................... 9-35

Job Accounting for the FAX Transmitted from a Computer ................................................................... 9-36

Configuring Job Accounting ............................................................................................................................. 9-37

Default Setting ....................................................................................................................................... 9-37

Counting the Number of Pages Printed ................................................................................................. 9-39

Print Accounting Report ......................................................................................................................... 9-40

Using Job Accounting ...................................................................................................................................... 9-41

Login/Logout .......................................................................................................................................... 9-41

Unknown User Settings ................................................................................................................................... 9-42

Unknown ID Job .................................................................................................................................... 9-42

Registering Information for a User whose ID is Unknown ..................................................................... 9-43

9-2

User Authentication and Accounting (User Login, Job Accounting) > Overview of User Login Administration

Overview of User Login Administration

User login administration specifies how the user access is administered on this machine. Enter a correct login user

name and password for user authentication to login.

Access are in three levels - "User", "Administrator", and "Machine Administrator". The security levels can be modified

only by the "Machine Administrator".

To manage the job account from PC

In addition to the above settings, the following are necessary to manage the job account from PC.

To Manage the Users to Print from PCs

Printer driver settings are necessary to manage the users that print on the machine from PCs.

To Manage the Users to Use TWAIN for Scanning

TWAIN driver settings on the PC are necessary to manage the users that use TWAIN for scanning.

To Manage the Users to Scan Using TWAIN (page 9-13)

To Manage the Users to Use WIA for Scanning

WIA driver settings on the PC are necessary to manage the users that use WIA for scanning.

To Manage the Users to Scan Using WIA (page 9-14)

To Manage the Users to Send Faxes from a PC*1

FAX driver settings on the PC are necessary to manage the users that send faxes from a PC.

To Manage the Users that Send Faxes from a PC (page 9-15)

*1 Only on products with the fax function installed.

UserA

1Enable User Login

Administration

(page 9-3)

2Set the user

(page 9-6)3Enter the login user name and

password and execute the job

(page 9-24)

User A

User B

User C

1Set the User Login Administration

on the printer driver (page 9-11)2Print

9-3

User Authentication and Accounting (User Login, Job Accounting) > Enabling User Login Administration

Enabling User Login Administration

This enables user login administration. Select one of the following authentication methods:

1Display the screen.

1[System Menu/Counter] key > [▲] [▼] key > [User/Job Account] > [OK] key

2[▲] [▼] key > [User Login Set.] > [OK] key

2Configure the settings.

1[▲] [▼] key > [User Login] > [OK] key > [▲] [▼] key >

[Local Authentic.] or [Netwk Authentic.] > [OK] key

When selecting [Netwk Authentic.]

1[▲] [▼] key > [NTLM], [Kerberos] or [Ext.] > [OK] key

2Enter the host name (64 characters or less) for the Authentication Server and select the

[OK] key.

3Select the domain name for the Authentication Server, and select the [OK] key.

If the domain has not been set, select the number where "----------------" is displayed and select

[Menu]. Select [Edit] and select the [OK] key then enter the domain name (in 256 characters or less).

Select the [OK] key and the domain will be registered.

To edit or delete a domain name that has already been registered, select that domain name and

select [Menu].

Item Descriptions

Local Authentication User authentication based on user properties on the local user list stored in the

machine.

Network Authentication

User authentication based on Authentication Server. Use a user property stored

in Authentication Server to access the network authentication login page.

NOTE

If the login user name entry screen appears during operations, enter a login user name

and password, and select [

]. For this, you need to login with administrator privileges.

The factory default login user name and login password are set as shown below.

NOTE

Select [Off] to disable user login administration.

NOTE

Up to 10 domain names can be registered.

9-4

User Authentication and Accounting (User Login, Job Accounting) > Enabling User Login Administration

4When selecting [Ext.] as the server type, enter the port number and select the [OK] key.

NOTE

If the login user name and password are rejected, check the following settings.

• Network Authentication setting of the machine

• User property of the Authentication Server

• Date and time setting of the machine and the Authentication Server

If you cannot login because of the setting of the machine, login with any administrator

registered in the local user list and correct the settings.

9-5

User Authentication and Accounting (User Login, Job Accounting) > Setting User Login Administration

Setting User Login Administration

This registers, alters and deletes users and configures the settings for User Login Administration.

Authentication Security

If user authentication is enabled, configure the user authentication settings.

User Account Lockout Setting

You can prohibit the use of a user account if an incorrect password is entered repeatedly to login with that account.

1Display the screen.

1[System Menu/Counter] key > [▲] [▼] key > [User/Job Account] > [OK] key

2[▲] [▼] key > [User Login Set.] > [OK] key > [▲] [▼] key > [Account Lockout] > [OK] key

2Configure the settings.

The following settings can be selected.

NOTE

If the login user name entry screen appears during operations, enter a login user name

and password, and select [Login]. For this, you need to login with administrator

privileges.

The factory default login user name and login password are set as shown below.

Item Descriptions

Lockout Select whether or not account lockout policy is enabled.

Value: Off, On

Lockout Policy Specify the conditions and the extent to which the account lockout is

applied.

Number of

Retries

Specify how many login retries are allowed until the account is locked out.

Value: 1 to 10 times

Lockout Duration Specify how long the account is to be locked out until it is unlocked.

Value: 1 to 60 minutes

Lockout Target Specify the extent to which the account lockout is applied. [Remote Only]

locks out all operations from outside the operation panel.

Value: All, Remote Only

Locked out Users Displays a list of locked out users.

To cancel the locks:

Select the [▲] or [▼] key to select the user in the list, and [Select]. A

checkmark will be placed on the right of the selected user.

Select [Menu]. Select [Unlock] and the [OK] key.

9-6

User Authentication and Accounting (User Login, Job Accounting) > Setting User Login Administration

Adding a User (Local User List)

This adds a new user. You can add up to 100 users (including the default login user name).

1Display the screen.

1[System Menu/Counter] key > [▲] [▼] key > [User/Job Account] > [OK] key

2[▲] [▼] key > [User Login Set.] > [OK] key > [▲] [▼] key > [Local User List] > [OK] key >

[Menu] > [▲] [▼] key > [Add User] > [OK] key

NOTE

By default, one of each default user with machine administrator rights and administrator privileges is already stored.

Each user's properties are:

Machine Administrator

User Name: DeviceAdmin

Access Level: Machine Administrator

Administrator

User Name: Admin

Access Level: Administrator

* Upper case and lower case letters are distinguished (case sensitive).

It is recommended to periodically change the user name, login user name and login password regularly for your

security.

NOTE

If the login user name entry screen appears during operations, enter a login user name

and password, and select [Login]. For this, you need to login with administrator

privileges.

The factory default login user name and login password are set as shown below.

9-7

User Authentication and Accounting (User Login, Job Accounting) > Setting User Login Administration

2Enter the user information.

1Enter the name displayed on the user list (up to 32 characters) and select the [OK] key.

2Enter the login user name to login (up to 64 characters) and select the [OK] key.

3To enter detailed user information, select [▲] [▼] key > [Detail] > [OK] key

To exit the operation, select [▲] [▼] key > [Exit] > [OK] key

4Enter the detailed user information.

Select [Edit], [Change] or [Detail] on each item, enter the information and then select the [OK] key.

Select the [►] key to view the next screen. Select the [◄] key to return to the previous screen. The

table below explains the user information to be registered.

NOTE

For details on entering characters, refer to the the following:

Character Entry Method (page 11-9)

NOTE

The same login user name cannot be registered.

Item Descriptions

User Name*1

*1 Mandatory at user registration.

Enter the name displayed on the user list (up to 32 characters).

Name*1 Enter the login user name to login (up to 64 characters). The same login user

name cannot be registered.

for confirmation and select the [OK] key.

E-mail Address The user can register his/her E-mail address. The registered address will be

automatically selected for subsequent operations that need any E-mail function.

Access Level*1 Select "Administrator" or "User" for user access privileges.

Account Name Add an account where the user belongs. The user, who registered his/her

account name, can login without entering the account ID.

Overview of Job Accounting (page 9-25)

ID Card Info. Register ID card information. Select [Read] and the [OK] key.

Place the ID card on the ID card reader, and select [Read].

NOTE

This function is displayed when the optional ID Card Authentication Kit is

activated.

Card Authentication Kit(B) "Card Authentication Kit" (page 11-3)

To delete IC card information, select [Delete] > [OK] key.

9-8

User Authentication and Accounting (User Login, Job Accounting) > Setting User Login Administration

3Select the [OK] key.

A new user is added on the local user list.

Item Descriptions

Authoriz. Rules*1 Set usage authority for each user.

Select [Edit] for each item, change the restrictions and then select the [OK] key.

Select the [►] key to view the next screen. Select the [◄] key to return to the

previous screen.

The following restriction items are available:

Print Restrict.:

Select whether or not use of the print function of the printer is prohibited.

Applicable print functions are as follows:

• Print from Box

• Print from Removable Memory

• Print Report

• Print from PC

Copy Restrict.:

Select whether or not use of the copy print function is prohibited.

Duplex Restrict:

Select whether only duplex printing is allowed.

CombineRestrict:

Specify whether only Combine is allowed.

EcoPrint Restr.:

Specify whether only EcoPrint is allowed.

Send Restrict.:

Select whether or not use of the send function is prohibited.

FAX Restrict.*2:

Select whether or not use of the fax send function is prohibited.

Storing in Box:

Select whether or not use of the box store function is prohibited.

StoringinMemory:

Select whether or not use of the removable memory store function is prohibited.

My Panel You can register the language selection, and initial screen for each user.

Settings registered here can be applied simply by logging in.

*1 Displayed when Local Authoriz. is enabled.

Local Authoriz. (Local Authorization) (page 9-16)

*2 Only on products with the fax function installed.

9-9

User Authentication and Accounting (User Login, Job Accounting) > Setting User Login Administration

Changing User Properties

User properties can be changed. Types of user properties that could be changed may be different depending on user

access privilege.

For a user with administrator rights who logs in

User properties can be changed and users can be deleted. The items, which can be added, are all able to be changed.

1Display the screen.

1[System Menu/Counter] key > [▲] [▼] key > [User/Job Account] > [OK] key

2[▲] [▼] key > [User Login Set.] > [OK] key > [▲] [▼] key > [Local User List] > [OK] key

2Change the user properties.

Changing user properties

1Select the user whose properties you wish to change, and the [OK] key.

2Refer to step 2 of "Adding a User (Local User List)" to change a user property.

3[OK] key > [Yes]

The user information is changed.

Deleting a user

1Select the user whose properties you wish to delete, and [Menu].

2[▲] [▼] key > [Delete] > [OK] key > [Yes]

The selected user will be deleted.

NOTE

To change the user information of the machine administrator, you must log in with machine administrator authority.

You can only view user information if you log in as a regular user.

The factory default login user name and login password are set as shown below.

NOTE

If the login user name entry screen appears during operations, enter a login user name

and password, and select [Login]. For this, you need to login with administrator

privileges.

The factory default login user name and login password are set as shown below.

Adding a User (Local User List) (page 9-6)

NOTE

The default user with machine administrator rights cannot be deleted.

9-10

User Authentication and Accounting (User Login, Job Accounting) > Setting User Login Administration

To change the user information of logged in user (User Property)

These users can partially change their own user properties including user name, login password, E-mail address, and

Simple Login.

Although "Login User Name", "Access Level", or "Account Name" cannot be changed, the users can check the present

status.

1Display the screen.

[System Menu/Counter] key > [▲] [▼] key > [User Property] > [OK] key

2Change the user properties.

1Refer to step 2 of "Adding a User (Local User List)" to change a user property.

2[OK] key > [Yes]

The user information is changed.

Adding a User (Local User List) (page 9-6)

Item Description

User Name Changes the name shown on the user list. Up to 32 characters can be

entered.

can be entered.

E-mail Address Changes the user's e-mail address. Up to 256 characters can be

entered.

NOTE

This cannot be changed for network authentication.

Access Level Displays the user's access level.

Account Name Displays the account where the user belongs.

ID Card Info. Displays the ID card information of the logged in user.

NOTE

This function is displayed when the optional ID Card Authentication

Kit is activated.

Card Authentication Kit(B) "Card Authentication Kit" (page 11-3)

This function does not appear when the server type is set to [Ext.] in

Network Authentication, and logged in with the user account

certificated in the server specified as the [Ext.] server type.

Authoriz. Rules*1

*1 Displayed when Local Authorization is enabled.

Local Authoriz. (Local Authorization) (page 9-16)

Set usage authority for each user.

Authoriz. Rules (page 9-8)

My Panel Register the language and default screen for each user.

My Panel (page 9-8)

Network users are not displayed.

9-11

User Authentication and Accounting (User Login, Job Accounting) > Setting User Login Administration

User Login Administration for Printing

It is possible to manage the users that print on this machine from a PC.

Setting Printer Driver

To manage the users that print on this machine from a PC, the following settings are necessary in the printer driver.

Instructions are based on interface elements as they appear in Windows 8.1.

1Display the screen.

1Select [Settings] in charms on Desktop, and select [Control Panel], and then [Devices

and Printers].

2Right-click the printer driver icon of the machine, and click the [Printer properties] menu of

the printer driver.

3Click [Administrator] on the [Device Settings] tab.

2Configure the settings.

1Select [User Login] on the [User Login] tab.

2Set the User Login Administration.

[Use specific name]: This option can be used to specify a user name and password to use the same

User login for every print job. If this option is selected, the user does not have to type the name and

password for each print job.

[Prompt for name]: A screen for entering the user name and password will be displayed when

attempting a printing. The user name and password must be entered each time a printing is

attempted.

[Prompt for name and validate]: A screen for entering the user name and password will be

displayed when attempting a printing. The user name and password stored in the Login user name

list needs to be entered. The user name and password must be entered each time a printing is

attempted.

[Validate user name (computer) or prompt for login user name]: When printing, the Windows

user name is searched in the "Login user names" and printing is possible if the name is registered. If

the name is not registered, the printing will be canceled for users with only user authority. If the user

has administrator privileges, the screen to enter the user name and password will appear.

NOTE

In Windows 7, click [Start] button on the Windows, and then click [Devices and

Printers].

9-12

User Authentication and Accounting (User Login, Job Accounting) > Setting User Login Administration

3Click [OK].

NOTE

For other settings of job accounting, refer to the following:

Printer Driver User Guide

9-13

User Authentication and Accounting (User Login, Job Accounting) > Setting User Login Administration

To Manage the Users to Scan Using TWAIN

It is possible to manage the users that scan using TWAIN.

Setting TWAIN Driver

To manage the users that scan using TWAIN, the following settings are necessary in the TWAIN driver. Instructions are

based on interface elements as they appear in Windows 8.1.

1Display the screen.

1Select [Search] in charms, and enter "TWAIN Driver Setting" in the search box. Click

[TWAIN Driver Setting] in the search list then the TWAIN Driver Setting screen appears.

2Select the machine,and click [Edit].

2Configure the settings.

1Click [User Authentication Settings].

2Select the checkbox beside [Authentication], and enter Login User Name and Password.

3Click [OK].

NOTE

In Windows 7, select [Start] button on the Windows, [All Programs], [Kyocera] and then

[TWAIN Driver Setting].

9-14

User Authentication and Accounting (User Login, Job Accounting) > Setting User Login Administration

To Manage the Users to Scan Using WIA

It is possible to manage the users that scan using WIA.

Setting WIA Driver

To manage the users that scan using WIA, the following settings are necessary in the WIA driver. Instructions are based

on interface elements as they appear in Windows 8.1.

1Display the screen.

1Click [Search] in charms, and enter "Scanner" in the search box. Click [View scanners

and cameras] in the search list then the Scanners and Cameras screen appears.

2Select the same name as this machine from WIA Drivers, and press [Properties].

2Configure the settings.

1Select the checkbox beside [Authentication] on the [Settings] tab, and enter Login User

Name and Password.

2Click [OK].

NOTE

In Windows 7, click [Start] button on the Windows and enter [Scanner] in [Program and

File Search]. Click [View scanners and cameras] in the search list then the Scanners

and Cameras screen appears.

9-15

User Authentication and Accounting (User Login, Job Accounting) > Setting User Login Administration

To Manage the Users that Send Faxes from a PC

It is possible to manage the users that send faxes from a PC.

Setting FAX Driver

To manage the users that send faxes from a PC, the following settings are necessary in the FAX driver. Instructions are

based on interface elements as they appear in Windows 8.1.

1Display the screen.

1Select [Settings] in charms on Desktop, and select [Control Panel], and then [Devices

and Printers].

2Right-click the printer driver icon of the machine, and click the [Printer properties] menu of

the printer driver.

3Click [FAX TX Setting] on the [Printing Preferences] window.

2Configure the settings.

1Select [User Login] on the [Authentication] tab.

2Set the User Login Administration.

[Use Specific Login User Name]: This option can be used to specify a user name and password to

use the same User login for every FAX job. If this option is selected, the user does not have to type

the name and password for each FAX job.

[Prompt for Login User Name]: A screen for entering the user name and password will be displayed

when attempting a transmission. The user name and password must be entered each time a

transmission is attempted.

3Click [OK].

NOTE

In Windows 7, click [Start] button on the Windows, and then click [Devices and

Printers].

9-16

User Authentication and Accounting (User Login, Job Accounting) > Setting User Login Administration

Local Authoriz. (Local Authorization)

Select whether or not to use Local Authorization.

1Display the screen.

1[System Menu/Counter] key > [▲] [▼] key > [User/Job Account] > [OK] key

2[▲] [▼] key > [User Login Set.] > [OK] key

2Configure the setting.

[▲] [▼] key > [Local Authoriz.] > [OK] key > [▲] [▼] key > [Off] or [On] > [OK] key

NOTE

When using Local Authorization, the user authentication type must be set to [Local Authoriz.].

Enabling User Login Administration (page 9-3)

NOTE

If the login user name entry screen appears during operations, enter a login user name

and password, and select [Login]. For this, you need to login with administrator

privileges.

The factory default login user name and login password are set as shown below.

9-17

User Authentication and Accounting (User Login, Job Accounting) > Setting User Login Administration

Group Auth. (Group Authorization Settings)

Set restrictions of the machine usage by each individual group registered in the authentication server.

Group Authorization

Use the group authorization.

1Display the screen.

1[System Menu/Counter] key > [▲] [▼] key > [User/Job Account] > [OK] key

2[▲] [▼] key > [User Login Set.] > [OK] key

2Configure the setting.

[▲] [▼] key > [Group Auth.] > [OK] key > [▲] [▼] key > [Off] or [On] > [OK] key

NOTE

• To use the group authorization settings, [Netwk Authentic.] must be selected for the authentication method in

"Enabling User Login Administration". Select "On" for "LDAP" in "Protocol Settings".

Enabling User Login Administration (page 9-3)

ProtocolSettings (page 8-12)

• Setting to use group authorization is performed from the operation panel. The groups should be registered with

Command Center RX.

Command Center RX User Guide

NOTE

If the login user name entry screen appears during operations, enter a login user name

and password, and select [Login]. For this, you need to login with administrator

privileges.

The factory default login user name and login password are set as shown below.

9-18

User Authentication and Accounting (User Login, Job Accounting) > Setting User Login Administration

Guest Authorization Set.

When User Login Administration is enabled, set the functions that guest users who cannot log in to the machine are

allowed to use.

Guest Authorization

Use the guest authorization.

1Display the screen.

1[System Menu/Counter] key > [▲] [▼] key > [User/Job Account] > [OK] key

2[▲] [▼] key > [User Login Set.] > [OK] key > [▲] [▼] key > [Guest Auth. Set.] >

[OK] key > [▲] [▼] key > [Guest Auth.] > [OK] key

2Configure the setting.

[▲] [▼] key > [On] or [Off] > [OK] key

NOTE

To use Guest Authorization Set., User Login Administration must be enabled in "Enabling User Login Administration".

Enabling User Login Administration (page 9-3)

NOTE

If the login user name entry screen appears during operations, enter a login user name

and password, and select [Login]. For this, you need to login with administrator

privileges.

The factory default login user name and login password are set as shown below.

NOTE

If the guest authorization setting is enabled, the [Authentication/Logout] key must be

selected when logging in.

In the guest user default settings, only monochrome copying can be used. If you wish to use

a different function, log in as a user who can use that function, or change the settings in the

guest properties.

9-19

User Authentication and Accounting (User Login, Job Accounting) > Setting User Login Administration

Guest Property

The table below explains the user information to be registered.

Item Descriptions

User Name Enter the name displayed on the user list (up to 32 characters).

The default setting is "Guest User".

Access Level The authority of the user appears. This cannot be changed.

Account Name Add an account where the user belongs.

Auth. Rules Set usage authority for each user.

The items you can restrict the access level with are as follows.

Print Restrict.:

Select whether or not use of the print function of the printer is prohibited.

Applicable print functions are as follows:

• Print from Box

• Print from Removable Memory

• Print Report

Copy Restrict.:

Select whether or not use of the copy print function is prohibited.

Duplex Restrict:

Select whether only duplex printing is allowed.

Combine Restrict:

Specify whether only Combine is allowed.

EcoPrint Restr.:

Specify whether only EcoPrint is allowed.

Send Restrict.:

Select whether or not use of the send function is prohibited.

FAX Restrict.*1:

Select whether or not use of the fax send function is prohibited.

Storing in Box:

Select whether or not use of the box store function is prohibited.

StoringinMemory:

Select whether or not use of the removable memory store function is prohibited.

*1 Only on products with the fax function installed.

9-20

User Authentication and Accounting (User Login, Job Accounting) > Setting User Login Administration

1Display the screen.

1[System Menu/Counter] key > [▲] [▼] key > [User/Job Account] > [OK] key

2[▲] [▼] key > [User Login Set.] > [OK] key

2Configure the settings.

1[▲] [▼] key > [Guest Auth. Set.] > [OK] key > [▲] [▼] key > [Guest Property] > [OK] key

2Register guest user information and functions that are restricted.

Select [Edit], [Change] or [Detail] on each item, enter the information and then select the [OK] key.

Select the [►] key to view the next screen. Select the [◄] key to return to the previous screen.

3Select the [OK] key.

NOTE

If the login user name entry screen appears during operations, enter a login user name

and password, and select [Login]. For this, you need to login with administrator

privileges.

The factory default login user name and login password are set as shown below.

9-21

User Authentication and Accounting (User Login, Job Accounting) > Setting User Login Administration

NW User Property (Obtain Network User Property)

Set the required information to obtain the network user property from the LDAP server. The user name and E-mail

address obtained with this setting is shown in the user information, the status confirmation screen, and the header of

E-mail.

1Display the screen.

1[System Menu/Counter] key > [▲] [▼] key > [User/Job Account] > [OK] key

2[▲] [▼] key > [User Login Set.] > [OK] key

2Configure the settings.

[▲] [▼] key > [NW User Property] > [OK] key > [▲] [▼] key > [Off] or [On] > [OK] key

NOTE

• To obtain the network user property from the LDAP server, [Netwk Authentic.] must be selected for the

authentication method in "Enabling User Login Administration". Select "On" for "LDAP" in "Protocol Settings".

Enabling User Login Administration (page 9-3)

ProtocolSettings (page 8-12)

• Setting to obtain network user information is performed from the operation panel. The details of the information to be

obtained should be set with Command Center RX.

Command Center RX User Guide

NOTE

If the login user name entry screen appears during operations, enter a login user name

and password, and select [Login]. For this, you need to login with administrator

privileges.

The factory default login user name and login password are set as shown below.

9-22

User Authentication and Accounting (User Login, Job Accounting) > Setting User Login Administration

ID Card Settings

If ID card authentication is enabled, select the authentication type.

1Display the screen.

1[System Menu/Counter] key > [▲] [▼] key > [User/Job Account] > [OK] key

2[▲] [▼] key > [User Login Set.] > [OK] key

2Configure the settings.

[▲] [▼] key > [ID Card Settings] > [OK] key

The following settings can be selected.

NOTE

This functions appears when the Card Authentication kit is activated.

Card Authentication Kit(B) "Card Authentication Kit" (page 11-3)

NOTE

If the login user name entry screen appears during operations, enter a login user name

and password, and select [Login]. For this, you need to login with administrator

privileges.

The factory default login user name and login password are set as shown below.

Item Descriptions

Key Login When ID card authentication is enabled, select whether or not login by

keyboard is allowed.

Value: Permit, Prohibit

Additional Auth.*1

*1 This function does not appear when the server type is set to [NTLM] or [Kerberos] in "Netwk

Authentic.".

Select whether or not to require password entry after authenticating by ID

card.

Value: Off, Use Password, Use PIN

9-23

User Authentication and Accounting (User Login, Job Accounting) > Setting User Login Administration

PIN Login Settings

1Display the screen.

1[System Menu/Counter] key > [▲] [▼] key > [User/Job Account] > [OK] key

2[▲] [▼] key > [User Login Set.] > [OK] key

2Configure the settings.

[▲] [▼] key > [PIN Login] > [OK] key > [▲] [▼] key > Select [Off] or [On] > [OK] key

NOTE

This setting is only displayed when [Netwk Authentic.] must be selected for the authentication method and the server

type is set to [Ext.] in "Netwk Authentic.".

Enabling User Login Administration (page 9-3)

NOTE

If the login user name entry screen appears during operations, enter a login user name

and password, and select [

]. For this, you need to login with administrator privileges.

The factory default login user name and login password are set as shown below.

9-24

User Authentication and Accounting (User Login, Job Accounting) > Using User Login Administration

Using User Login Administration

This section explains procedures while setting job accounting.

If user login administration is enabled, the login user name and login password entry screen appears each time you use

this machine.

Use the procedure below to login and logout.

If the login user name entry screen appears during operations, log in by referring to the following:

Logout

When the operations are complete, select the [Authentication/Logout] key to return to the login user name and login

password entry screen.

9-25

User Authentication and Accounting (User Login, Job Accounting) > Overview of Job Accounting

Overview of Job Accounting

Job accounting manages the copy/print/scan/FAX count accumulated by individual accounts by assigning an ID to each

account.

To manage the job account from PC

In addition to the above settings, the following are necessary to manage the job account from PC.

To Manage the Number of Sheets Used on Jobs Printed from a PC

To manage the number of jobs to be printed from the PC on the network, you need to configure settings by using the

printer driver on the PC.

To Manage the Scan Job Account by Using TWAIN

To manage the scan job account by using TWAIN, you need to configure the TWAIN driver settings on the computer

connected to the machine.

Job Accounting for Scan Using TWAIN (page 9-34)

To Manage the Scan Job Account by Using WIA

To manage the scan job account by using WIA, you need to configure the WIA driver settings on the computer

connected to the machine.

Job Accounting for Scan Using WIA (page 9-35)

To Manage the FAX Job Transmitted from a PC *1

To manage the number of FAX jobs transmitted from the PC, you need to configure the settings by using the FAX Driver

on the PC.

Job Accounting for the FAX Transmitted from a Computer (page 9-36)

*1 Only on products with the fax function installed.

100 400 200

A: 00000001

1Enable job

accounting. (Refer

to page 9-26.)

3Enter the assigned account

ID when performing the

job. (Refer to page 9-24.)

4Count the number of pages

copied, printed, scanned

and faxed.

2Setting an

account. (Refer

to page 9-28.)

A: 00000001

B: 00000002

C: 00000003

100 400 200

1Set Job Accounting for the PC on

the network by using the printer

driver. (Refer to page 9-33.)

2Execute printing. 3Count the number of

pages printed.

9-26

User Authentication and Accounting (User Login, Job Accounting) > Enabling Job Accounting

Enabling Job Accounting

Enable job accounting. Use the procedure below.

1Display the screen.

1[System Menu/Counter] key > [▲] [▼] key > [User/Job Account] > [OK] key

2[▲] [▼] key > [Job Account.Set.] > [OK] key

2Configure the settings.

[▲] [▼] key > [Job Accounting] > [OK] key > [▲] [▼] key > [On] > [OK] key

NOTE

If the login user name entry screen appears during operations, enter a login user name

and password, and select [Login]. For this, you need to login with administrator

privileges.

The factory default login user name and login password are set as shown below.

NOTE

• To disable job accounting, select [Off].

• When the display returns to System Menu default screen, logout is automatically executed

and the screen to enter the Account ID appears. To continue the operation, enter the

Account ID.

9-27

User Authentication and Accounting (User Login, Job Accounting) > Enabling Job Accounting

Job Accounting Access

Set the job accounting access.

1Display the screen.

1[System Menu/Counter] key > [▲] [▼] key > [User/Job Account] > [OK] key

2[▲] [▼] key > [Job Account.Set.] > [OK] key

2Configure the settings.

[▲] [▼] key > [

AccountingAccess

] > [

] key > [▲] [▼] key > [

Local

] or [

Network

] > [

] key

NOTE

If the login user name entry screen appears during operations, enter a login user name

and password, and select [Login]. For this, you need to login with administrator

privileges.

The factory default login user name and login password are set as shown below.

9-28

User Authentication and Accounting (User Login, Job Accounting) > Setting an Account

Setting an Account

You can add, change and delete an account and set the restriction for each account.

Adding an Account

Up to 100 individual accounts can be added. The following entries are required.

1Display the screen.

1[System Menu/Counter] key >

[▲] [▼] key >

[User/Job Account] > [OK] key

[▲] [▼] key >

[Job Account.Set.] > [OK] key >

[▲] [▼] key >

[Account. List] > [OK] key >

[Menu] >

[▲] [▼] key >

[Add Account] > [OK] key

2Enter the account information.

1Enter the account name > [OK] key

2Enter the account ID > [OK] key

3To apply restriction to the account ID, select [▲] [▼] key > [Detail] > [OK] key.

To exit the operation, select [▲] [▼] key > [Exit] > [OK] key.

Item Descriptions

Account Name Enter the account name (up to 32 characters).

Account ID Enter the account ID as many as eight digits (between 0 and 99999999).

Restriction This prohibits printing/scanning or restricts the number of sheets to load.

Restricting the Use of the Machine (page 9-30)

NOTE

If the login user name entry screen appears during operations, enter a login user name

and password, and select [Login]. For this, you need to login with administrator

privileges.

The factory default login user name and login password are set as shown below.

NOTE

For details on entering characters, refer to the the following:

Character Entry Method (page 11-9)

NOTE

Any "Account ID" that has already registered cannot be used. Enter any other account

ID.

9-29

User Authentication and Accounting (User Login, Job Accounting) > Setting an Account

4Check the account name and account ID and set the use restrictions.

To change the details, select [Edit], enter the information and then select the [OK] key. Select the [►]

key to view the next screen. Select the [◄] key to return to the previous screen.

5Select the [OK] key.

A new account is added on the account list.

Restricting the Use of the Machine (page 9-30)

9-30

User Authentication and Accounting (User Login, Job Accounting) > Setting an Account

Restricting the Use of the Machine

This section explains how to restrict the use of the machine by account or the number of sheets available.

The items that can be restricted differ depending on whether "Individual" or "Total" is selected for "Copy/Print Count".

Copy/Print Count (page 9-37)

Restriction Items

"Individual" selected for Copy/Printer Count"Split" selected for Copy/Printer Count

"Total" selected for Copy/Printer Count

Applying Restriction

Restriction can be applied in the following modes:

Item Descriptions

Print Restrict Copier Limits the number of sheets used for copying.

Print Restrict Printer Limits the number of sheets used for printing.

Scan Restrict. Others Limits the number of sheets scanned (excludes copying).

FAX TX Restrict Limits the number of sheets sent by fax. This is displayed only on products with the

fax function installed.

Item Descriptions

Print Restrict. Limits the total number of sheets used for copying and printing.

Scan Restrict. Others Limits the number of sheets scanned (excludes copying).

FAX TX Restrict Limits the number of sheets sent by fax. This is displayed only on products with the

fax function installed.

Item Descriptions

Off No restriction is applied.

Counter Limit*1

*1 If [Counter Limit] is selected, the [Limit Pages] screen appears after the [OK] key is selected. Enter a counter limit on

pages using the numeric keys, and select the [OK] key.

Restricts the print counter in one-page increments up to 9,999,999 copies.

Reject Usage Restriction is applied.

9-31

User Authentication and Accounting (User Login, Job Accounting) > Setting an Account

Editing an Account

This changes the registered account information.

1Display the screen.

1[System Menu/Counter] key > [▲] [▼] key > [User/Job Account] > [OK] key

2[▲] [▼] key > [Job Account.Set.] > [OK] key > [▲] [▼] key > [Account. List] > [OK] key

2Edit an account.

1Select the account you want to change and select the [OK] key.

2Refer to step 2 of "Adding an Account" and "Restricting the Use of the Machine" to change

account information.

3[OK] key > [Yes]

The account information is changed.

NOTE

If the login user name entry screen appears during operations, enter a login user name

and password, and select [Login]. For this, you need to login with administrator

privileges.

The factory default login user name and login password are set as shown below.

NOTE

The account information can be changed by selecting [Menu], selecting [Detail/Edit] and

then selecting the [OK] key.

Adding an Account (page 9-28)

Restricting the Use of the Machine (page 9-30)

9-32

User Authentication and Accounting (User Login, Job Accounting) > Setting an Account

Deleting an Account

This deletes the account.

1Display the screen.

1[System Menu/Counter] key > [▲] [▼] key > [User/Job Account] > [OK] key

2[▲] [▼] key > [Job Account.Set.] > [OK] key > [▲] [▼] key > [Account. List] > [OK] key

2Delete an account.

1Select the account you want to delete and [Menu].

2[▲] [▼] key > [Delete] > [OK] key > [Yes]

The account is deleted.

NOTE

If the login user name entry screen appears during operations, enter a login user name

and password, and select [Login]. For this, you need to login with administrator

privileges.

The factory default login user name and login password are set as shown below.

9-33

User Authentication and Accounting (User Login, Job Accounting) > Setting an Account

Job Accounting for Printing

The number of jobs to be printed from the computer can be managed by Job Accounting.

Setting Printer Driver

To manage the number of jobs to be printed from the PC on the network, you need configure the following settings by

using the printer driver on the PC. Instructions are based on interface elements as they appear in Windows 8.1.

1Display the screen.

1Select [Settings] in charms on Desktop, and select [Control Panel], and then [Devices

and Printers].

2Right-click the printer driver icon of the machine, and click the [Printer properties] menu of

the printer driver.

3Click [Administrator] on the [Device Settings] tab.

2Configure the settings.

1Select [Job accounting] on the [Job Accounting] tab.

2Set the Account ID.

[Use specific account ID]:

Enter the Account ID. Printing will be performed using the entered

Account ID. If this option is selected, the user does not have to enter the Account ID for each print job.

[Prompt for account ID]: A screen for entering the Account ID will be displayed when attempting a

printing. The Account ID must be entered each time a printing is attempted.

[Prompt for account ID and validate]: A screen for entering the Account ID will be displayed when

attempting a printing. The Account ID stored in the Account ID list needs to be entered. The Account

ID must be entered each time a printing is attempted.

[Display account ID list]: The Account ID list is displayed when printing. The Account ID to be used

needs to be selected from the list.

[Validate user name (computer) or prompt for account ID]: When printing, the Windows user

name is searched in the "Account IDs" and printing is possible if the name is registered. If the

Account ID is not registered, the screen for entering the Account ID will appear.

NOTE

In Windows 7, click [Start] button on the Windows, and then click [Devices and

Printers].

9-34

User Authentication and Accounting (User Login, Job Accounting) > Setting an Account

3Click [OK].

Job Accounting for Scan Using TWAIN

The number of jobs scanned by using TWAIN can be managed by Job Accounting.

Setting TWAIN Driver

To manage the number of jobs scanned by using TWAIN, you need to configure the following settings by using the

TWAIN Driver on the computer. Instructions are based on interface elements as they appear in Windows 8.1.

1Display the screen.

1Select [Search] in charms, and enter "TWAIN Driver Setting" in the search box. Click

[TWAIN Driver Setting] in the search list then the TWAIN Driver Setting screen appears.

2Select the machine, click [Edit].

2Configure the settings.

1Click [User Authentication Settings].

2Select the checkbox beside [Account], and enter the account ID.

3Click [OK].

NOTE

For other settings of job accounting, refer to the following:

Printer Driver User Guide

NOTE

In Windows 7, select [Start] button on the Windows, [All Programs], [Kyocera] and then

[TWAIN Driver Setting].

9-35

User Authentication and Accounting (User Login, Job Accounting) > Setting an Account

Job Accounting for Scan Using WIA

The number of jobs scanned by using WIA can be managed by Job Accounting.

Setting WIA Driver

To manage the number of jobs scanned by using WIA, you need to configure the following settings by using the WIA

Driver on the computer. Instructions are based on interface elements as they appear in Windows 8.1.

1Display the screen.

1Click [Search] in charms, and enter "Scanner" in the search box. Click [View scanners

and cameras] in the search list then the Scanners and Cameras screen appears.

2Select the same name as this machine from WIA Drivers, and press [Properties].

2Configure WIA Driver.

1Select the checkbox beside [Account ID] on the [Settings] tab, and enter the Account ID.

2Click [OK].

NOTE

In Windows 7, click [Start] button on the Windows and enter [Scanner] in [Program and

File Search]. Click [View scanners and cameras] in the search list then the Scanners

and Cameras screen appears.

9-36

User Authentication and Accounting (User Login, Job Accounting) > Setting an Account

Job Accounting for the FAX Transmitted from a

Computer

The number of FAX jobs transmitted from the computer can be managed by Job Accounting.

Setting FAX Driver

To manage the number of FAX jobs transmitted from the computer, you need to configure the following settings by using

the FAX Driver on the computer. Instructions are based on interface elements as they appear in Windows 8.1.

1Display the screen.

1Select [Settings] in charms on Desktop, and select [Control Panel], and then [Devices

and Printers].

2Right click the name of the machine to be used as the FAX Driver and select [Printing

preferences] from the resulting pull-down menu.

3Click [FAX TX Setting] in the [Printing Preferences] window.

2Configure the settings.

1Select [Job Accounting] on the [Authentication] tab.

2Set the Job Accounting.

[Use Specific Account ID]: This option can be used to specify an account ID to use the same

Account ID for every FAX job. If this option is selected, the user does not have to enter the Account ID

for each FAX job.

[Prompt for Account ID]: A screen for entering the Account ID will be displayed when attempting a

transmission. The Account ID must be entered each time a transmission is attempted.

3Click [OK].

NOTE

FAX functions are available only on products with the fax function installed.

NOTE

In Windows 7, click [Start] button on the Windows, and then click [Devices and

Printers].

9-37

User Authentication and Accounting (User Login, Job Accounting) > Configuring Job Accounting

Configuring Job Accounting

Default Setting

Set the defaults for job accounting. To configure the settings, select the item in Default Setting and select the setting

item.

[System Menu/Counter] key > [▲] [▼] key > [User/Job Account] > [OK] key > [▲] [▼] key > [Job Account.Set.] >

[OK] key > [▲] [▼] key > [Default Setting] > [OK] key

For details on each function, see the table below.

Item Description

Apply Limit This specifies how the machine behaves when the counter has reached the limit of restriction.

The table below describes the action taken.

Value

Immediately: Job stops when the counter reaches its limit. The next job will be

prohibited in sending or in storing in the box.

Subsequently: Printing/scanning of the job continues but the subsequent job will be

rejected.

Alert Only: Job continues while displaying an alert message.

Copy/Print Count You can select how the copying and printing page counts are shown - either the total of both or

each of copying and printing individually (Split). The selection may influence restriction on the

count and count method.

Value: Total, Split

Restricting the Use of the Machine (page 9-30)

Print Accounting Report (page 9-40)

9-38

User Authentication and Accounting (User Login, Job Accounting) > Configuring Job Accounting

Counter Limit When you add a new account, you can change the default restrictions on the number of sheets

used. You can set any number from 1 to 9,999,999.

The items that can be set differ depending on whether [Split] or [Total] is selected for [Copy/

Print Count].

Copy/Print Count (page 9-37)

[Split] selected for Copy/Print Count

Copy Restriction Sets the default restriction on the number of sheets used for copying.

Print Restrict. Sets the default restriction on the number of sheets used for printing.

ScanRest.(Other) Sets the default restriction on the number of sheets used for scanning (excludes copying).

FAX Restriction*1 Sets the default restriction on the number of sheets used for sending faxes.

[Total] selected for Copy/Print Count

Print Restrict. Sets the default restriction on the total number of sheets used for copying and printing.

ScanRest.(Other) Sets the default restriction on the number of sheets used for scanning (excludes copying).

FAX Restriction*1 Sets the default restriction on the number of sheets used for sending faxes.

*1 Only on products with the fax function installed.

Item Description

9-39

User Authentication and Accounting (User Login, Job Accounting) > Configuring Job Accounting

Counting the Number of Pages Printed

This counts the number of pages printed. Counts are classified into Total Job Accounting and Each Job Accounting. A

new count can also be started after resetting the count data which was stored for a certain period of time.

[System Menu/Counter] key > [▲] [▼] key > [User/Job Account] > [OK] key > [▲] [▼] key > [Job Account.Set.] >

[OK] key > [▲] [▼] key > [Total Accounting] or [Each Job Account] > [OK] key

Total Accounting

This counts the number of pages for all accounts and resets the counts for those accounts together at the same time.

Each Job Account

This counts the number of pages for each account and resets the counts by account. When checking Each Job

Accounting, select the account for which you want to check the count.

Types of the counts are as follows.

To check other items, select the [OK] key to return to the screen one level higher.

Item Descriptions

Printed Pages Displays the number of pages copied and printed, and the total number of pages used. You can

also use [FAX RX Pages]*1, [Duplex Pages] and [Combine Pages] to check the number of

pages used.

*1 Only on products with the fax function installed.

Copy/Print Pages Displays the number of pages copied and printed, and the total number of pages used. Select

the [►] key to view the next screen. Select the [◄] key to return to the previous screen.

FAX RX Pages Displays the number of pages received.

Total PrintPages Displays the total number of pages used for copying and printing.

Duplex Pages Displays the number of pages printed in [1-Sided] mode, [2-Sided] mode, and the total pages

in both modes. Select the [►] key to view the next screen. Select the [◄] key to return to the

previous screen.

Combine Pages Displays the number of pages printed in [None] (no Combine) mode, [2 in 1] mode, [4 in 1]

mode, and the total pages in both modes. Select the [►] key to view the next screen. Select the

[◄] key to return to the previous screen.

Scanned Pages Displays the number of pages scanned for copying, faxing and other functions, as well as the

total number of pages scanned. Select the [►] key to view the next screen. Select the [◄] key

to return to the previous screen.

FAX TX Pages*1 Displays the number of pages faxed.

FAX TX Time*1 Displays the total duration of FAX transmissions.

Counter Reset Resets the counter.

Select [Yes] in the confirmation screen.

9-40

User Authentication and Accounting (User Login, Job Accounting) > Configuring Job Accounting

Print Accounting Report

The total pages counted of all relevant accounts can be printed as an accounting report.

Reports have different formats depending on how the count of copiers and printers is administered.

When "Split" is selected for Managing the Copy/Print Count.

Use the procedure below to print a job accounting report.

1Prepare paper.

Check that A4 or Letter paper is loaded in the cassette.

2Display the screen.

1[System Menu/Counter] key > [▲] [▼] key > [User/Job Account] > [OK] key

2[▲] [▼] key > [Job Account.Set.] > [OK] key

3Print the report.

[▲] [▼] key > [Account. Report] > [OK] key > [Yes]

Accounting report is printed.

NOTE

If the login user name entry screen appears during operations, enter a login user name

and password, and select [Login]. For this, you need to login with administrator

privileges.

The factory default login user name and login password are set as shown below.

ACCOUNT. REPORT

9-41

User Authentication and Accounting (User Login, Job Accounting) > Using Job Accounting

Using Job Accounting

This section explains procedures while setting job accounting.

If job accounting is enabled, an account ID entry screen appears each time you use this machine.

Use the procedure below to login and logout.

1In the account ID entry screen, enter the account ID using the numeric keys and select the

[OK] key.

When the screen to enter the login user name and password appears

If user login administration is enabled, the screen to enter the login user name and password

appears. Enter a login user name and password to login. If the user has already registered the

account information, the account ID entry would be skipped.

2Proceed to complete the rest of the steps.

Logout

When the operations are complete, select the [Authentication/Logout] key to return to the account ID entry screen.

NOTE

• If you entered a wrong character, select the [Clear] key and enter the account ID

again.

• If the entered account ID does not match the registered ID, a warning beep will sound

and login will fail. Enter the correct account ID.

• By selecting [Counter], you can refer to the number of pages printed and the number

of pages scanned.

Adding a User (Local User List) (page 9-6)

9-42

User Authentication and Accounting (User Login, Job Accounting) > Unknown User Settings

Unknown User Settings

Unknown ID Job

This specifies the behavior for handling the jobs sent with unknown or unsent login user names or User ID. If the User

The setting items are as follows.

1Display the screen.

1[System Menu/Counter] key > [▲] [▼] key > [User/Job Account] > [OK] key

2[▲] [▼] key > [Unknown User] key > [OK] key

2Configure the settings.

[▲] [▼] key > [Unknown ID Job] > [OK] key > [▲] [▼] key > [Reject] or [Permit] > [OK] key

Item Descriptions

Permit The job is permitted to be printed.

Reject The job is rejected (not printed).

NOTE

If the login user name entry screen appears during operations, enter a login user name

and password, and select [

]. For this, you need to login with administrator privileges.

The factory default login user name and login password are set as shown below.

9-43

User Authentication and Accounting (User Login, Job Accounting) > Unknown User Settings

Registering Information for a User whose ID is

Unknown

If you register user information for a user whose ID is unknown, you can check information on the Job Status or Job

History screens. In addition, you can restrict available functions.

1Display the screen.

1[System Menu/Counter] key > [▲] [▼] key > [User/Job Account] > [OK] key

2[▲] [▼] key > [Unknown User] > [OK] key > [▲] [▼] key > [User Property] > [OK] key

2Enter the user information.

The table below explains the user information to be registered.

NOTE

This functions appears when [Unknown ID Job] is set to [Permit].

Unknown ID Job (page 9-42)

NOTE

If the login user name entry screen appears during operations, enter a login user name

and password, and select [

]. For this, you need to login with administrator privileges.

The factory default login user name and login password are set as shown below.

Item Descriptions

User Name Enter the name displayed on the user list (up to 32 characters).

NOTE

This is displayed when user login administration is enabled.

Account Name Add an account where the user belongs.

Overview of Job Accounting (page 9-25)

NOTE

This is displayed when job accounting is enabled.

Auth. Rules Set usage authority.

The following restriction items are available:

Print Restrict.:

Select whether or not use of the print function of the printer is prohibited.

10-1

10 Troubleshooting

This chapter explains the following topics:

Regular Maintenance ....................................................................................................................................... 10-2

Cleaning ................................................................................................................................................. 10-2

Toner Container Replacement ............................................................................................................... 10-5

Waste Toner Box Replacement ............................................................................................................. 10-9

Troubleshooting .............................................................................................................................................. 10-11

Solving Malfunctions ............................................................................................................................. 10-11

Responding to Messages .................................................................................................................... 10-16

Clearing Paper Jams ........................................................................................................................... 10-27

10-2

Troubleshooting > Regular Maintenance

Regular Maintenance

Cleaning

Clean the machine regularly to ensure optimum printing quality.

Glass Platen

Wipe the inside of the document processor and the glass platen with a soft cloth dampened with alcohol or mild

detergent.

Slit Glass

When using the document processor, clean the slit glass surface and the reading guide with the dry cloth.

CAUTION

For safety, always unplug the power cord before cleaning the machine.

IMPORTANT

Do not use thinner or other organic solvents.

IMPORTANT

Do not use water, soap or solvents for cleaning.

NOTE

Dirt on the slit glass or the reading guide may cause black streaks to appear in the output.

10-3

Troubleshooting > Regular Maintenance

Registration Roller

IMPORTANT

Be careful not to touch the black transfer roller and brown transfer belt during

cleaning as this may adversely affect print quality.

Transfer roller

(Black)

10-4

Troubleshooting > Regular Maintenance

Vents

Use a lint free cloth to clean dust and dirt away from the vents.

10-5

Troubleshooting > Regular Maintenance

Toner Container Replacement

When toner runs low, "Toner is low. (Replace when empty.)" appears in the message display. Make sure you have a new

toner container available for replacement.

When the message displays "Replace the toner.", replace the toner.

Frequency of Toner Container Replacement

The life of the toner containers depends on the amount of toner required to accomplish your printing jobs. According to

ISO/IEC 19752 and EcoPrint switched off the toner container can print as follows (A4/Letter paper is assumed):

Life of the Toner Container (Printable pages)

12,500 images

NOTE

• The average number of images that can be printed with the toner container provided with the machine is 6,000

images.

• To maintain quality, we recommend using genuine Kyocera toner containers, which must pass numerous quality

inspections.

• The memory chip in the toner container of this product stores information necessary for improving customer

convenience, operation of the recycling system for used toner containers, and planning and development of new

products. The stored information does not include information that makes it possible to identify individuals, and is

only used anonymously for the above purposes.

CAUTION

Do not attempt to incinerate parts which contain toner. Dangerous sparks may cause burns.

10-6

Troubleshooting > Regular Maintenance

Replacing the Toner Container

NOTE

When removing the toner container from the machine, lift up the right hand side first.

10-7

Troubleshooting > Regular Maintenance

IMPORTANT

Do not touch the points shown below.

10-8

Troubleshooting > Regular Maintenance

NOTE

• If the front cover does not close, check that the new toner container is installed correctly (in step 7).

• Return the exhausted toner container to your dealer or service representative. The collected toner container will be

recycled or disposed in accordance with the relevant regulations.

10-9

Troubleshooting > Regular Maintenance

Waste Toner Box Replacement

When the waste toner box becomes full, immediately replace the waste toner box.

CAUTION

Do not attempt to incinerate parts which contain toner. Dangerous sparks may cause burns.

10-10

Troubleshooting > Regular Maintenance

NOTE

Return the exhausted waste toner box to your dealer or service representative. The collected waste toner box will be

recycled or disposed in accordance with the relevant regulations.

10-11

Troubleshooting > Troubleshooting

Troubleshooting

Solving Malfunctions

The table below provides general guidelines for problem solving.

If a problem occurs with your machine, look into the checkpoints and perform procedures indicated on the following

pages. If the problem persists, contact your Service Representative.

NOTE

When contacting us, the serial number will be necessary.

To check the serial number, refer to the following:

Checking the Equipment's Serial Number (page i)

Symptom Checkpoints Corrective Actions Reference

Page

The screen does not

respond when the main

power switch is turned on.

Check the power cord. Connect both ends of the power cord

securely.

page 2-9

Pressing the [Start] key

does not produce copies.

Is there a message on the screen? Determine the appropriate response to

the message and respond accordingly.

page 10-16

Is the machine in Sleep mode? Select any key on the operation panel to

recover the machine from Sleep mode.

page 2-26

Blank sheets are ejected. Are the originals loaded correctly? When placing originals on the platen,

place them face-down and align them

with the original size indicator plates.

page 5-2

When placing originals in the document

processor, place them face-up.

page 5-3

―Check that the settings of the

application software.

―

Printouts are totally too light. Is the paper damp? Replace the paper with new paper. page 3-2

Have you changed the density? Select appropriate density level. page 6-12

page 8-44

Is the toner distributed evenly within the

toner container?

Shake the toner container from side to

side several times.

page 10-5

Is EcoPrint mode enabled? Disable [EcoPrint] mode. page 8-33

―Select the [System Menu/Counter] key

> [Adjust/Maint.] > [Service Setting] >

[Drum Refresh], and then select [Yes].

―

―Make sure the paper type setting is

correct for the paper being used.

page 8-29

Printouts are too dark even

though the background of

the scanned original is white.

Have you changed the density? Select appropriate density level. page 6-12

page 8-44

10-12

Troubleshooting > Troubleshooting

Copies have a moire pattern

(dots grouped together in

patterns and not aligned

uniformly).

Is the original a printed photograph? Set the original image to [Photo]. page 6-13

Texts are not clearly printed. Did you choose appropriate image

quality for the original?

Select appropriate image quality. page 6-13

Black dots appear on the

white background when

white original is scanned.

Is the original holder or the glass platen

dirty?

Clean the original holder or the glass

platen.

page 10-2

Printouts are fuzzy. Is the machine being used in conditions

of very humid, or humidity or

temperature rapidly changes?

Use in an environment that has suitable

humidity.

―

―Select the [System Menu/Counter] key

> [Adjust/Maint.] > [Service Setting] >

[Drum Refresh] > [Yes]

―

Images are skewed. Are the originals placed correctly?

When placing originals on the platen, align

them with the original size indicator plates.

page 5-2

When placing originals in the document

processor, align the original width guides

securely before placing the originals.

page 5-3

Is the paper loaded correctly? Check the position of the paper width

guides.

page 3-4

page 3-8

The altitude is 1000 m or

higher and irregular

horizontal white lines appear

in the image.

―Select the [System Menu/Counter] key

> [Adjust/Maint.] > [Service Setting] >

[Altitude Adj.], and set to an elevation

one level higher than the current setting.

―

Symptom Checkpoints Corrective Actions Reference

Page

10-13

Troubleshooting > Troubleshooting

The altitude is 1000 m or

higher and dots appear in

the image.

―Select the [System Menu/Counter] key

> [Adjust/Maint.] > [Service Setting] >

[Altitude Adj.], and set to an elevation

one level higher than the current setting.

―

Paper often jams. Is the paper loaded correctly? Load the paper correctly. page 3-2

Is the paper of the supported type? Is it

in good condition?

Remove the paper, turn it over, and

reload it.

page 3-4

Is the paper curled, folded or wrinkled? Replace the paper with new paper. page 3-4

Are there any loose scraps or jammed

paper in the machine?

Remove any jammed paper. page 10-27

2 or more sheets are

overlaps when ejected.

(multi feed)

―Load the paper correctly. page 3-2

Printouts are wrinkled. Is the paper loaded correctly? Load the paper correctly. page 3-2

Is the paper damp? Replace the paper with new paper. page 3-2

Printouts are curled. Is the paper damp? Replace the paper with new paper. page 3-2

Cannot print. Is the machine plugged in? Plug the power cord into an AC outlet. ―

Is the machine powered on? Turn on the power switch. page 2-10

Are the USB cable and network cable

connected?

Connect the correct USB cable and

network cable securely.

page 2-8

Is the print job paused? Resume printing. page 7-13

Cannot print with USB

memory.

USB memory not

recognized.

Is the USB host blocked? Select [Unblock] in the USB host

settings.

page 8-20

―Check that the USB memory is securely

plugged into the machine.

―

Symptom Checkpoints Corrective Actions Reference

Page

10-14

Troubleshooting > Troubleshooting

Printouts have vertical lines.

Is the slit glass dirty? Clean the slit glass. page 10-2

Dirt on the top edge or back

of the paper.

Is the interior of the machine dirty? Clean the interior of the machine. page 10-3

Part of the image is

periodically faint or shows

white lines.

―Select the [System Menu/Counter] key

> [Adjust/Maint.] > [Service Setting] >

[Drum Refresh] > [Yes]

―

Print on the back of the

sheet is visible on the front.

―Set [Prevent Bleed-through] to [On]. page 6-16

page 8-33

Lines appear on ruled lines. Is the paper damp? Replace the paper with new paper. page 3-2

―Select the [System Menu/Counter] key

> [Adjust / Maint.] > [Service Setting]

> [Transfer Adj.], and set to

[LineTextPriority].

―

Part of the image has come

off (poor toner fixation).

―Select the [System Menu/Counter] key

> [Adjust / Maint.] > [Service Setting]

> [Fuser Adjustment], and set to [2].

―

Symptom Checkpoints Corrective Actions Reference

Page

10-15

Troubleshooting > Troubleshooting

Cannot send via SMB. Is the network cable connected? Connect the correct network cable

securely.

page 2-8

Have the network settings for the

equipment been configured properly?

Configure the TCP/IP settings properly. page 8-17

Have the folder sharing settings been

configured properly?

Check sharing settings and access

privileges under the folder properties.

page 3-17

Has the SMB protocol been set to [On]? Set the SMB protocol setting to [On]. page 8-13

Has [Host Name] been entered

properly? *1 Check the name of the computer to

which data is being sent.

page 5-17

Has [Path] been entered properly? Check the share name for the shared

folder.

page 5-17

Has [Login User Name] been entered

properly? *1 *2 Check the domain name and login user

name.

page 5-17

Has the same domain name been used for

[

Host Name

] and [

Delete the domain name and backslash

("/") from [

page 5-17

Has [Login Password] been entered

properly?

Check the login password. page 5-17

Have exceptions for Windows Firewall

been configured properly?

Configure exceptions for Windows

Firewall properly.

page 3-21

Do the time settings for the equipment,

domain server, and data destination

computer differ?

Set the equipment, domain server, and

data destination computer to the same

time.

―

Is the screen displaying Send error? Refer to Responding to Send Error.page 10-24

Cannot send via the e-mail. Is the E-mail send size limit set in the

SMTP server registered on the

machine?

Check the limit value is entered to "E-

mail Size Limit" of [E-mail] setting in

Command Center RX and change the

value as necessary.

page 2-50

The machine is emitting

steam in the area around the

paper ejection slot.

Check the room temperature to see if it

is low, or if damp paper was used.

Depending on the printing environment

and the paper's condition, the heat

generated during printing will cause the

moisture in the paper to evaporate, and

the steam emitted may look like smoke.

This is not a problem, and you can

continue printing. If the steam concerns

you, raise the room temperature, or

replace the paper with a newer, dryer

paper.

―

*1 You can also enter a full computer name as the host name (for example, pc001.abcdnet.com).

*2 You can also enter login user names in the following formats:

Domain_name/user_name (for example, abcdnet/james.smith)

User_name@domain_name (for example, james.smith@abcdnet)

Symptom Checkpoints Corrective Actions Reference

Page

10-16

Troubleshooting > Troubleshooting

Responding to Messages

If the message display or the computer displays any of these messages, follow the corresponding procedure.

NOTE

When contacting us, the serial number will be necessary. To check the serial number, refer to the following:

Checking the Equipment's Serial Number (page i)

Message Checkpoints Corrective Actions Reference

Page

Account error. ―Failed to specify Job Accounting

when processing the job externally.

The job is canceled. Select [OK].

—

Add toner. ―Replace the toner container to our

specified toner container.

page 10-5

Message Checkpoints Corrective Actions Reference

Page

Box is not found.

Job is canceled.

―The specified box cannot be found.

Job is canceled. Select [OK].

—

Box limit exceeded. Job

is canceled.*1

*1 When Auto Error Clear is set to [On], processing resumes automatically after a set amount of time elapses. For details

on Auto Error Clear, refer to the following:

Auto Err. Clear (page 8-32)

Is [OK] displayed on the screen? The specified box is full, and no

further storage is available; Job is

canceled. Select [OK] . Try to

perform the job again after printing

or deleting data from the box.

—

Message Checkpoints Corrective Actions Reference

Page

Cannot connect to

Authentication Server

Check the connection

with the server.

— Check the connection status with

the server.

—

Cannot connect to

Authentication Server

Check the domain name.

— Check the domain name. page 9-2

Cannot connect to

Authentication Server

Check the host name.

— Check the host name. page 8-7

10-17

Troubleshooting > Troubleshooting

Cannot connect to

Authentication Server

Set machine time to

match server's time.

— Set machine time to match the

server’s time.

page 2-16

Cannot connect to

Server. Check the

Connection Status.

Job is canceled.

— Check the connection status with

the server.

—

Cannot duplex print on

this paper.

↑↓

(Displayed alternately)

Press OK to continue

using cassette #.

Did you select a paper size/type

that cannot be duplex printed?

Select [Paper] to select the

available paper. Select [OK] to print

without using Duplex function.

page 6-20

Cannot duplex print on

this paper.

↑↓

(Displayed alternately)

Press OK to continue

using MP tray.

page 6-20

Cannot execute this job.

Restricted by Group

Authorization.

— This job is canceled because it is

restricted by Group Authorization

settings. Select [OK].

page 9-17

Cannot feed paper.

Set cassette #.

— Cannot feed paper. Set the cassette

indicated on the screen.

—

Cannot use this

function.

>> FAX Transmission

―This job is canceled because it is

restricted by User Authorization or

Job Accounting. Select [OK].

―

Cannot use this

function.

>> Print

Cannot use this

function.

>> Send

Cannot use this

function.

>> Store

Check cassette #. ―Open and then close the indicated

cassette.

―

Close # cover. Is there any cover which is open? Close the cover indicated on the

screen.

―

Close document

processor.

Is the document processor open? Close the document processor. ―

Close scanner unit. ―Close the scanner unit. ―

Message Checkpoints Corrective Actions Reference

Page

10-18

Troubleshooting > Troubleshooting

Message Checkpoints Corrective Actions Reference

Page

Error occurred. Turn the

power switch off and on.

―System error has occurred. Turn the

main power switch OFF and then

ON.

―

Message Checkpoints Corrective Actions Reference

Page

Failed to store job

retention data. Job is

canceled.

— The job is canceled. Select [OK]. —

File is not found.

Job is canceled.

— The specified file is not found. The

job is canceled. Select [OK].

—

Message Checkpoints Corrective Actions Reference

Page

Incorrect account ID.

Job is canceled.*1

*1 When Auto Error Clear is set to [On], processing resumes automatically after a set amount of time elapses. For details

on Auto Error Clear, refer to the following:

Auto Err. Clear (page 8-32)

— The account ID was incorrect when

processing the job externally. The

job is canceled. Select [OK].

—

Incorrect box password.

Job is canceled.

— The box password was incorrect

when processing the job externally.

The job is canceled. Select [OK].

—

Incorrect Login User

Name or Password. Job

is canceled.*1

— The login user name or password

was incorrect when processing the

job externally. The job is canceled.

Select [OK].

—

Inner tray is full of paper.

Remove the paper.

— Remove paper from the inner tray. —

Insufficient memory.

Cannot start the job.

— Job cannot be started. Try again

later.

—

Message Checkpoints Corrective Actions Reference

Page

Job Accounting

restriction exceeded.

Job is canceled.

Is the acceptable printing count

restricted by Job Accounting

exceeded?

The printing count exceeded the

acceptable count restricted by Job

Accounting. Cannot print any more.

This job is canceled. Select [OK].

―

10-19

Troubleshooting > Troubleshooting

Message Checkpoints Corrective Actions Reference

Page

KPDL error. Job is

canceled.*1

*1 When Auto Error Clear is set to [On], processing resumes automatically after a set amount of time elapses. For details

on Auto Error Clear, refer to the following:

Auto Err. Clear (page 8-32)

―PostScript error has occurred. The

job is canceled. Select [OK].

―

Message Checkpoints Corrective Actions Reference

Page

Load paper in cassette #.

↑↓

(Displayed alternately)

Press OK to continue

using cassette #.

Is the indicated cassette out of

paper?

Load paper.

Select [Paper] to select the other

paper source. Select the [OK] key

to print on the paper in the currently

selected paper source.

page 3-4

Load paper in cassette #.

↑↓

(Displayed alternately)

Set selected size paper

and press [OK].

Is the indicated cassette out of

paper?

Load paper.

Select [Paper] to select the other

paper source.

page 3-4

Load paper in MP tray.

↑↓

(Displayed alternately)

Press OK to continue

using MP tray.

Is the paper of the selected size

loaded in the multi purpose tray?

Load paper.

Select [Paper] to select the other

paper source. Select the [OK] key

to print on the paper in the currently

selected paper source.

page 3-8

Load paper in MP tray.

↑↓

(Displayed alternately)

Set selected size paper

and press [OK].

Is the paper of the selected size

loaded in the multi purpose tray?

Load paper.

Select [Paper] to select the other

paper source.

page 3-8

Message Checkpoints Corrective Actions Reference

Page

Machine failure. Call

service.

―An error has occurred in the

machine. Make a note of the error

code displayed on the message

display, and contact your service

representative.

―

Maximum number of

scanned pages. Job is

canceled.

Is the acceptable scanning count

exceeded?

Cannot scan pages any more. Job is

canceled.

Select [OK].

—

10-20

Troubleshooting > Troubleshooting

Memory is full. Job is

canceled.

— The process cannot be performed

due to insufficient memory. Select

[OK]. The job will be canceled.

—

Memory is full.

Print job cannot be

processed completely.*1

— Unable to continue the job as the

memory is used up. Select

[Continue] to print the scanned

pages. The print job cannot be

processed completely. Select

[Cancel] to cancel the job.

The machine may reproduce the

same originals by arranging the

following settings:

•Select [On] of RAM Disk Mode

in System Menu, and then

decrease the RAM Disk Size.

•Select [Printer Priority] of

Optional Memory in System

Menu.

NOTE

Before changing the RAM Disk

Setting or Optional Memory setting,

contact your administrator.

—

*1 When Auto Error Clear is set to [On], processing resumes automatically after a set amount of time elapses. For details

on Auto Error Clear, refer to the following:

Auto Err. Clear (page 8-32)

Message Checkpoints Corrective Actions Reference

Page

Non-genuine Toner.

Press [Help].

Is the installed toner container our

own brand?

The manufacturer assumes no

responsibility for damage caused by

a non-genuine toner. We

recommend that you only use

genuine toner containers. When

you want to use the toner container

currently installed, select the [OK]

key and the [Stop] key

simultaneously for 3 seconds or

more.

—

Message Checkpoints Corrective Actions Reference

Page

Paper jammed at MP

tray.

―If a paper jam occurs, the machine

will stop and the location of the jam

will be indicated on the screen.

Leave the machine on and select

[Help]. Follow the instruction to

remove the jammed paper.

page 10-27

Paper jammed in

Cassette #.

Paper jammed in

document processor.

―A paper jam has occurred in the

document processor. Leave the

machine on and select [Help] on the

screen, and follow the instruction to

remove the jammed paper.

—

Message Checkpoints Corrective Actions Reference

Page

10-21

Troubleshooting > Troubleshooting

Paper jammed in rear

cover #.

―If a paper jam occurs, the machine

will stop and the location of the jam

will be indicated on the screen.

Leave the machine on and follow

the instruction to remove the

jammed paper.

page 10-27

Preparing to print. ―The machine is under the

adjustment to maintain its quality.

Please wait.

—

Printing multiple copies

is not allowed.

— Multi copies cannot be printed

because RAM disk is disabled or

the SSD is not installed. The job is

canceled. Select [OK].

Try adding more memory or

installing SSD, and configuring the

RAM disk settings.

—

Print overrun.

Job is paused.

— Warning. Low printer memory. The

job was paused. Re-starting the job.

Select [Continue].

—

Message Checkpoints Corrective Actions Reference

Page

RAM disk error. Press

[OK].

―An error has occurred on the RAM

disk. Job is canceled. Select [OK].

The possible error codes and their

descriptions are as follows.

04: Insufficient space on the RAM

disk. If the optional RAM dis is

installed, increase the RAM Disk

Size by changing RAM Disk Mode

in System Menu.

NOTE

The range of RAM disk size can be

increased by selecting [Printer

Priority] in Optional Memory.

page 8-35

Removable Memory is

full. Job is canceled.*1

―Job is canceled. Select [OK].

Insufficient free space in the

removable memory. Delete

unneeded files.

―

Remove original from

document processor.

Are there any originals left in the

document processor?

Remove originals from the

document processor.

―

Replace all originals and

press Start key.

―Remove originals from the

document processor, put them back

in their original order, and place

them again. Press the [Start] key to

resume printing. Select [Cancel] to

cancel the job.

―

Message Checkpoints Corrective Actions Reference

Page

10-22

Troubleshooting > Troubleshooting

Replace MK. — Replacement of the parts in the

maintenance kit is necessary at

every 300,000 pages of printing and

requires professional servicing.

Contact your Service

Representative.

—

Replace the toner. ―Replace the toner container to our

specified toner container.

page 10-5

Restricted by Job

Accounting.

Cannot print.

— This job is canceled because it is

restricted by Job Accounting. Select

[OK].

—

*1 When Auto Error Clear is set to [On], processing resumes automatically after a set amount of time elapses. For details

on Auto Error Clear, refer to the following:

Auto Err. Clear (page 8-32)

Message Checkpoints Corrective Actions Reference

Page

Scanner memory is full.

Job is canceled.

— Scanning cannot be performed any

more due to insufficient memory.

The job is canceled. Select [OK].

—

Send Error.*1

*1 When Auto Error Clear is set to [On], processing resumes automatically after a set amount of time elapses. For details

on Auto Error Clear, refer to the following:

Auto Err. Clear (page 8-32)

— An error has occurred during

transmission. The job is canceled.

Select [OK].

Refer to Responding to Send Error

for the error code and corrective

actions.

page 10-24

Shake the toner

container.

— Shake the toner container well and

reinstall it.

page 10-5

SSD error. Job is

canceled.

— An error has occurred on SSD. Job

is canceled. Select [OK].

The possible error codes and their

descriptions are as follows.

01: The amount of data that can be

saved at once has been exceeded.

Turn the power OFF/ON. If the error

still occurs, divide the file into

smaller files. If the error occurs after

the file is divided, the specified file

may be damaged. Delete the file.

04: Insufficient space on SSD to

complete this operation. Move data

or delete unneeded data.

—

Message Checkpoints Corrective Actions Reference

Page

10-23

Troubleshooting > Troubleshooting

Message Checkpoints Corrective Actions Reference

Page

The slit glass requires

cleaning.

— Clean the slit glass using the

cleaning cloth supplied with the

document processor.

page 10-2

The toner container is

not locked or improperly

installed.

— The toner container is not installed

correctly. Set it correctly.

page 10-5

This user account is

locked out.

Contact administrator

Job is canceled.

— Contact administrator.

The job is canceled. Select [OK].

—

Toner is low.

(Replace when empty.)

— It is almost time to replace the toner

container. Obtain a new toner

container.

—

Message Checkpoints Corrective Actions Reference

Page

Unknown Toner

Installed. PC [K]

Does the installed toner container's

regional specification match the

machine's?

Install the specified toner container. —

USB memory error.

Job is canceled.

— An error occurred in the removable

memory. The job stopped. Select

[OK].

The possible error codes and their

descriptions are as follows.

01: The amount of data that can be

saved at once has been exceeded.

Turn the power OFF/ON. If the error

still occurs, the removable memory

is not compatible with the machine.

—

Message Checkpoints Corrective Actions Reference

Page

Waste toner box is full or

placed improperly.

— The waste toner box is not installed

correctly. Set it correctly.

page 10-9

Is the waste toner box full? Replace the waste toner box. page 10-9

Message Checkpoints Corrective Actions Reference

Page

You cannot use this box.

Job is canceled.

— You cannot use the specified box.

Job is canceled. Select [OK].

—

10-24

Troubleshooting > Troubleshooting

Responding to Send Error

Error

Code Message Corrective Actions Reference

Page

1101 Failed to send the e-mail. Check the host name of the SMTP server on the

Command Center RX.

page 2-50

Failed to send via FTP. Check the host name of FTP. page 5-17

Failed to send via SMB. Check the host name of SMB. page 5-17

1102 Failed to send via SMB. Check the SMB settings.

• Login user name and login password

NOTE

If the sender is a domain user, specify the domain

name.

•Host name

•Path

page 5-17

Failed to send the e-mail. Check the following on the Command Center RX.

• SMTP login user name and login password

• POP3 login user name and login password

• E-mail size limit

page 2-50

Failed to send via FTP. Check the FTP settings.

• Login user name and login password

NOTE

If the sender is a domain user, specify the domain

name.

•Path

• Folder share permissions of the recipient

page 5-17

1103 Failed to send via SMB. Check the SMB settings.

• Login user name and login password

NOTE

If the sender is a domain user, specify the domain

name.

•Path

• Folder share permissions of the recipient

page 5-17

Failed to send via FTP. Check the FTP settings.

•Path

• Folder share permissions of the recipient

page 5-17

1104 Failed to send the e-mail. Check the e-mail address.

NOTE

If the address is rejected by the domain, you cannot

send the email.

page 5-16

10-25

Troubleshooting > Troubleshooting

1105 Failed to send via SMB. Check the following settings.

[System Menu/Counter] key > [System/Network] >

[Network Setting] > [ProtocolSettings] > [SMB]

page 8-13

Failed to send the e-mail. Select [On] of the SMTP settings on the Command

Center RX.

page 2-50

Failed to send via FTP. Check the following settings.

[System Menu/Counter] key > [System/Network] >

[Network Setting] > [ProtocolSettings] >

[FTP(Client)]

page 8-13

1106 Failed to send the e-mail. Check the sender address of SMTP on the Command

Center RX.

page 2-50

1131 Failed to send via FTP. Enable the SSL.

[System Menu/Counter] key > [System/Network] >

[Network Setting] > [Secure Protocol] > [SSL]

page 8-16

1132 Failed to send the e-mail. Check the following of the SMTP server.

• Is SMTP over SSL available?

• Is the encryption available?

Refer to the

Command

Center RX

User Guide.

Failed to send via FTP. Check the following of the FTP server.

• Is FTPS available?

• Is the encryption available?

—

2101 Failed to send via SMB. Check the network and SMB settings.

• The network cable is connected.

• The hub is not operating properly.

• The server is not operating properly.

• Host name and IP address

• Port number

—

Failed to send via FTP. Check the network and FTP settings.

• The network cable is connected.

• The hub is not operating properly.

• The server is not operating properly.

• Host name and IP address

• Port number

—

Failed to send the e-mail. Check the network and Command Center RX.

• The network cable is connected.

• The hub is not operating properly.

• The server is not operating properly.

• POP3 server name of the POP3 user

• SMTP server name

page 2-50

Error

Code Message Corrective Actions Reference

Page

10-26

Troubleshooting > Troubleshooting

2102

2103

Failed to send via FTP. Check the network.

• The network cable is connected.

• The hub is not operating properly.

• The server is not operating properly.

—

Check the following of the FTP server.

• Is FTP available?

• The server is not operating properly.

—

Failed to send the e-mail. Check the network.

• The network cable is connected.

• The hub is not operating properly.

• The server is not operating properly.

—

2201

2202

2203

2231

Failed to send the e-mail.

Failed to send via FTP.

Failed to send via SMB.

Check the network.

• The network cable is connected.

• The hub is not operating properly.

• The server is not operating properly.

—

2204 Failed to send the e-mail. Check the e-mail size limit of the SMTP settings on

the Command Center RX.

page 2-50

3101 Failed to send the e-mail. Check the authentication methods of both the sender

and the recipient.

—

Failed to send via FTP. Check the network.

• The network cable is connected.

• The hub is not operating properly.

• The server is not operating properly.

—

3201 Failed to send the e-mail. Check the SMTP user authentication method of the

recipient.

—

0007

4201

4701

5101

5102

5103

5104

7101

7102

7103

720f

— Turn the main power switch off and back on. If this

error occurs several times, make a note of the

displayed error code and contact your service

representative.

page 2-10

9181 — The scanned original exceeds the acceptable number

of pages of 999. Send the excess pages separately.

—

Error

Code Message Corrective Actions Reference

Page

10-27

Troubleshooting > Troubleshooting

Clearing Paper Jams

If a paper jam occurs, the message display will display "Paper Jam." and the machine will stop.

Refer to these procedures to remove the jammed paper.

Jam Location Indicators

If a paper jam occurs, the location of the jam will be displayed on the message display as well as the clearing instructions.

After you remove the jam, the machine will warm up again and the error message will be cleared. The machine resumes

with the page that was printing when the jam occurred.

1 Shows the location of a paper jam.

2 Displays the Help screen.

NOTE

For details on Help Screen, refer to the following:

Help Screen (page 2-13)

Paper Jam Location Indicator Paper Jam Location Reference Page

AMulti Purpose Tray page 10-28

BCassettes 1 to 5 page 10-29

CDuplex Unit page 10-30

DInside the Machine page 10-31

EInner Tray / Inside Rear Cover page 10-32

FDocument Processor page 10-33

Paper

jammed in

cassette 1.

Help

JAM****

Paper

jammed in

cassette 1.

Help

JAM****

10-28

Troubleshooting > Troubleshooting

Precautions with Paper Jams

• Do not reuse jammed papers.

• If the paper tears during removal, be sure to remove any loose scraps of paper from inside the machine. Scraps of

paper left in the machine could cause subsequent jamming.

Multi Purpose Tray

CAUTION

The fixing unit is extremely hot. Take sufficient care when working in this area, as there is a danger of getting

burned.

10-29

Troubleshooting > Troubleshooting

Cassettes 1 to 5

Procedures for handling a paper jam in Cassettes 1 to 5 are all the same. This section explains procedures using

Cassette 1 as an example.

10-30

Troubleshooting > Troubleshooting

Duplex Unit

10-31

Troubleshooting > Troubleshooting

Inside the Machine

If the jammed paper appears to be pinched by rollers, pull it along the normal running direction

of the paper.

If you cannot find a paper jam, try checking inside the rear of the printer.

Inner Tray / Inside Rear Cover (page 10-32)

10-32

Troubleshooting > Troubleshooting

Inner Tray / Inside Rear Cover

If you cannot find a paper jam, try checking inside the rear of the machine.

CAUTION

The fixing unit is extremely hot. Take sufficient care when working in this area, as

there is a danger of getting burned.

10-33

Troubleshooting > Troubleshooting

Document Processor

10-34

Troubleshooting > Troubleshooting

11-1

11 Appendix

This chapter explains the following topics:

Optional Equipment .......................................................................................................................................... 11-2

Overview of Optional Equipment ............................................................................................................ 11-2

Optional Applications .............................................................................................................................. 11-7

Character Entry Method .................................................................................................................................... 11-9

Using the Keys ........................................................................................................................................ 11-9

Selecting Type of Characters ................................................................................................................ 11-10

Characters That Can be Entered Using the Numeric Keys .................................................................. 11-10

Entering Symbols .................................................................................................................................. 11-11

Entering Characters .............................................................................................................................. 11-11

Entering Using the Character Selection Screen ................................................................................... 11-13

Paper .............................................................................................................................................................. 11-14

Basic Paper Specifications ................................................................................................................... 11-14

Choosing the Appropriate Paper .......................................................................................................... 11-15

Special Paper ........................................................................................................................................ 11-18

Specifications .................................................................................................................................................. 11-22

Machine ................................................................................................................................................ 11-22

Copy Functions ..................................................................................................................................... 11-24

Printer Functions ................................................................................................................................... 11-24

Scanner Functions ................................................................................................................................ 11-25

Document Processor ............................................................................................................................ 11-25

Paper Feeder (500-sheet) (Option) ...................................................................................................... 11-26

Glossary .......................................................................................................................................................... 11-27

11-2

Appendix > Optional Equipment

Optional Equipment

Overview of Optional Equipment

The following optional equipment is available for the machine.

(2) PF-3110

(1) Card Authentication Kit(B)

(3) Expansion Memory

(6) IB-50 (7) IB-51(5) HD-6/HD-7

(4) SD Memory Card

SDHC Memory Card

(8) IB-36

Software option

(9) Data Security kit(E)

(10) UG-33

(11) USB Keyboard

11-3

Appendix > Optional Equipment

(1) Card Authentication Kit(B) "Card Authentication Kit"

User login administration can be performed using ID cards. To do so, it is necessary to register ID card information on

the previously registered local user list. For more information about how to register this information, refer to the

following:

Card Authentication Kit(B) Operation Guide

(2) PF-3110 "Paper Feeder (500-sheet x1)"

Up to four additional cassettes identical to the machine's cassettes can be installed in the machine. Loading method are

the same as the standard cassettes.

Loading in the Cassettes (page 3-4)

(3) "Expansion Memory"

The machine can perform the more multiple jobs simultaneously by adding more memories. You can increase the

machine's memory up to 3,072 MB by plugging in the optional memory modules.

Precautions for Handling the Memory Modules

To protect electronic parts, discharge static electricity from your body by touching a water pipe (faucet) or other large

metal object before handling the memory modules. Or, wear an antistatic wrist strap, if possible, when you install the

memory modules.

Installing the Memory Modules

1Turn off the machine and disconnect the power cord and interface cable.

2Remove the covers.

NOTE

If the optional IB-50/51 or HD-6/7 is installed, remove it.

11-4

Appendix > Optional Equipment

3Remove the memory module from its package.

4With the memory connection terminal pointing toward the socket, align the cut-out part with

the socket terminal and insert directly in at an angle.

5Carefully press the inserted memory down and into the machine.

6Reinstall the covers.

Removing the Memory Module

To remove a memory module, remove the right cover and the memory slot cover from the machine. Then, carefully push

out the two socket clamps. Ease the memory module out of the socket to remove.

Verifying the Expanded Memory

To verify that the memory module is working properly, test it by printing a status page.

Report (page 8-5)

(4) "SD/SDHC Memory Card"

An SD/SDHC memory card is useful for storing fonts, macros, and overlays. The machine is equipped with a slot for an

SDHC memory card with a maximum size of 32 GB, and an SD memory card with a maximum size of 2 GB.

Reading the SD/SDHC Memory Card

Once inserted in the machine's slot, the contents of the SD/SDHC memory card can be read from the operation panel or

automatically when you power on or reset the machine.

Installing and Formatting the SD/SDHC Memory Card

To use an unused SD/SDHC memory card, you must first use the machine to format the SD/SDHC memory card. For

information on formatting an SD/SDHC memory card, consult your Service Representative.

1Power off the machine and unplug the power cord.

11-5

Appendix > Optional Equipment

2Remove the cover.

3Insert the SD/SDHC memory card into the SD/SDHC memory card slot.

4Replace the covers.

5Insert the power cord into the socket and turn on the power switch.

(5) HD-6/HD-7 "SSD"

With SSD installed in the machine, received data can be rasterized and stored on this SSD. This enables high-speed

printing of multiple copies using an electric sort function. Also, you can use the Document Box functions.

What is Document Box? (page 5-31)

11-6

Appendix > Optional Equipment

(6) IB-50 "Network Interface Kit"

The Network Interface Kit provides a high-speed connection for the Gigabit-per-second interface. Settings are possible

for a variety of OS and network protocols.

IB-50 User's Manual

(7) IB-51 "Wireless Network Interface Kit"

This is a wireless LAN interface card which supports the wireless LAN specifications IEEE802.11n (Max 300 Mbps) and

11 g/b.

With the utilities supplied, settings are possible for a variety of OS and network protocols.

IB-51 User's Manual

(8) IB-36 "Wireless Network Interface Kit"

This is a wireless LAN Interface card which supports the wireless LAN specifications IEEE802.11n (Max 65 Mbps) and

11 g/b. In addition, network printing is possible without using the wireless LAN router because Wi-Fi Direct is supported.

(9) Data Security Kit(E) "Data Security Kit"

The Data Security Kit overwrites all unnecessary data in the storage area so that it cannot be retrieved. The Data

Security Kit encrypts data before storing it in the SSD. It guarantees higher security because no data cannot be decoded

by ordinary output or operations.

(10) UG-33 "ThinPrint Option"

This application allows print data to be printed directly without a print driver.

(11) USB Keyboard "USB Keyboard"

A USB keyboard can be used to enter information into the text fields on the operation panel. A special mount is also

available to install the keyboard on the machine. Please contact your dealer or service representative for information on

keyboards that are compatible with your machine before you purchase one.

11-7

Appendix > Optional Equipment

Optional Applications

Overview of the Applications

The applications listed below are installed on this machine.

Starting Application Use

Use the procedure below to start using an application.

1[System Menu/Counter] key > [▲] [▼] key > [System/Network] > [OK] key

2[▲] [▼] key > [Op Functions] > [OK] key

3Select the desired application, and select the [OK] key.

4[▲] [▼] key > [Official] > [OK] key

To use the application as a trial, select [Trial] without entering the license key.

5Enter the license key > [OK] key

Some applications do not require you to enter a license key. If the license key entry screen does not

appear, go to Step 6.

Application

Data Security Kit

Card Authentication Kit*1

*1 This can be used on a trial basis for a limited time.

ThinPrint Option*1

NOTE

• Restrictions such as the number of times the application can be used during the trial period differ depending on the

application.

• If you change the date/time while using the trial version of an application, you will no longer be able to use the

application.

NOTE

If the login user name entry screen appears during operations, enter a login user name

and password, and select [Login]. For this, you need to login with administrator

privileges.

The factory default login user name and login password are set as shown below.

NOTE

You can view detailed information on the selected application by selecting [Menu] >

[Detail] > [OK] key.

11-8

Appendix > Optional Equipment

6Select [Yes].

Checking Details of Application

Use the procedure below to check the details of application.

1[System Menu/Counter] key > [▲] [▼] key > [System/Network] > [OK] key

2[▲] [▼] key > [Op Functions] > [OK] key

3Select the desired application, and select [Menu].

4[▲] [▼] key > [Detail] > [OK] key

You can view detailed information on the selected application. Select the [►] key to view the next

screen. Select the [◄] key to return to the previous screen.

The table below lists the item you can view.

Extend the trial period.

[◄] [►] key > [Date of Trial] > [Extend] > [Yes]

The trial period is extended.

NOTE

If you started the Security Kit or Thin Print option and entered the license key, turn the

power OFF/ON.

NOTE

If the login user name entry screen appears during operations, enter a login user name

and password, and select [Login]. For this, you need to login with administrator

privileges.

The factory default login user name and login password are set as shown below.

Item

Function Name

License On

Trial Counts

Date of Trial

Status

11-9

Appendix > Character Entry Method

Character Entry Method

This section explains how to enter characters.

Using the Keys

Use the following keys to enter characters.

No. Display/Key Description

1Message Display Displays entered characters.

2Cursor Characters are entered at the position of the cursor.

3Right Select key Select to select the type of characters you want to enter. (When [Text] is displayed)

4[OK] key Select to finalize entry and return to the screen before the entry. To enter a symbol, select to confirm

the selected symbol.

5[Clear] key Select to delete characters.

6Numeric keys Select to enter characters and symbols.

7Arrow keys Select to select the entry position, or select a character from the character list.

Account Name:

Text

ABC

516

11-10

Appendix > Character Entry Method

Selecting Type of Characters

To enter characters, the following three types are available:

In a character entry screen, select [Text] to select the type of characters you want to enter.

Each time you select [Text], the character type switches as follows: [ABC], [123], [Symbols], [ABC] ...

Characters That Can be Entered Using the Numeric

Keys

The following table lists the characters that can be entered using the numeric keys.

Types Description

ABC To enter alphabets.

123 To enter numerals.

Symbols To enter symbols.

Keys Characters (Each press of a key changes the character in the order from left to right.)

. @ - _ / : ~ 1 (Repeats from the first character on the left)

1 (During number entry)

a b c A B C 2 (Repeats from the first character on the left)

2 (During number entry)

d e f D E F 3 (Repeats from the first character on the left)

3 (During number entry)

g h i G H I 4 (Repeats from the first character on the left)

4 (During number entry)

j k l J K L 5 (Repeats from the first character on the left)

5 (During number entry)

m n o M N O 6 (Repeats from the first character on the left)

6 (During number entry)

p q r s P Q R S 7 (Repeats from the first character on the left)

7 (During number entry)

t u v T U V 8 (Repeats from the first character on the left)

8 (During number entry)

Symbols:

Text

!"#$%&'()*+,-./:;<=>

?@[\]^_`{|}~^

Account Name:

Text

123

Account Name:

Text

ABC

11-11

Appendix > Character Entry Method

Entering Symbols

Symbols can be entered.

1Select the [#] key. Displays the symbol list.

2Select the [▲], [▼], [►] or [◄] key to move the cursor and select the symbol to be entered.

3Select the [OK] key. The selected symbol is entered.

Entering Characters

Follow the steps shown below to enter "R&D" for example.

1Select the [7] key three times. [r] is entered.

w x y z W X Y Z 9 (Repeats from the first character on the left)

9 (During number entry)

. , - _ ' ! ? (space) 0 (Repeats from the first character on the left)

0 (During number entry)

Select to change the character in the cursor position between upper case and lower case.

"*" or "." (During number entry)

! " # $ % & ' ( ) * + , - . / : ; Displays the

symbol list. For

details, refer to the

following:

Entering

Symbols (page

11-11)

<=>?@[ \ ] ^_ ` { | }~

# (During number entry)

* Depending on the functions, there are symbols that cannot be entered.

Keys Characters (Each press of a key changes the character in the order from left to right.)

Symbols:

Text

!"#$%&'()*+,-./:;<=>

?@[\]^_`{|}~^

Symbols:

Text

!"#$%&'()*+,-./:;<=>

?@[\]^_`{|}~^

Account Name:

Text

ABC

Account Name:

Text

ABC

11-12

Appendix > Character Entry Method

2Select the [*/.] key. [r] changes to [R].

3Select the [►] key. The cursor moves to the right.

4Select the [#] key. Displays the symbol list.

5Select the [▲] or [▼] key to move the cursor and select [&].

6Select the [OK] key. [&] is entered.

7Select the [3] key four times. [D] is entered.

8Select the [►] key.

Account Name:

Text

ABC

Account Name:

Text

ABC

Symbols:

Text

!"#$%&'()*+,-./:;<=>

?@[\]^_`{|}~^

Symbols:

Text

!"#$%&'()*+,-./:;<=>

?@[\]^_`{|}~^

Account Name:

Text

ABC

Account Name:

Text

ABC

R&D

Account Name:

Text

ABC

R&D

11-13

Appendix > Character Entry Method

Entering Using the Character Selection Screen

If "Login Operation" is [Select Character], then the screen is displayed to enter details by selecting from the characters

on the message display. For details on changing the login operation method, refer to the following:

1Select the [▲], [▼], [►] or [◄] key to move the cursor and select the character to be

entered.

2Select the [OK] key. The selected character is entered.

You can go back one character by selecting the [Clear] key.

3When the entry is complete, select [Complete].

Complete

abcdefghijklmnopqrst

uvwxyzABCDEFGHIJKLMNO

Complete

abcdefghijklmnopqrst

uvwxyzABCDEFGHIJKLMNO

Complete

uvwxyzABCDEFGHIJKLMNO

Admin

abcdefghijklmnopqrst

11-14

Appendix > Paper

Paper

This section explains the paper sizes and types that can be used in the paper source.

For details on the sizes, types, and number of sheets of paper that can be loaded in each paper tray, refer to the

following:

Specifications (page 11-22)

Basic Paper Specifications

This machine is designed to print on standard copy paper as used in regular ('dry') copiers and page printers such as

laser printers. It also supports a variety of other types of paper that conform to the specifications given in this appendix.

Be careful when choosing paper. Paper unsuitable for the machine may cause jams or may be wrinkled.

Supported Paper

Use standard copy paper for regular copiers or laser printers. The printing quality will be affected by the quality of paper.

Poor quality paper may result in unsatisfactory output.

Basic Paper Specifications

The following table lists the specifications of paper that is supported with this machine. Refer to the subsequent sections

for further details.

We are not responsible for the problems occurred from the use of paper that does not conform to our specifications.

Criteria Specifications

Weight Cassettes: 60 to 120 g/m2

Multi purpose tray: 60 to 220 g/m2, 209.5 g/m2 (Cardstock)

Dimensional accuracy ±0.7 mm

Squareness of corners 90° ±0.2°

Moisture content 4 to 6%

Pulp content 80% or more

NOTE

Some recycled paper does not meet requirements for use with this machine as listed in the Basic Paper Specifications

shown below, such as moisture or pulp content. For this reason, we recommend purchasing a small amount of

recycled paper as a sample for testing prior to use. Choose recycled paper that gives the best printing results and

contains low levels of paper dust.

11-15

Appendix > Paper

Choosing the Appropriate Paper

This section describes guidelines for choosing paper.

Condition

Avoid using paper with bent corners or that is curled, dirty, or torn. Do not use paper that has a rough surface or paper

fiber lint, or that is especially delicate. Use of paper in any of these conditions will not only deliver poor copies but may

also cause jams and shorten the useful life of the machine. Choose paper with a smooth and even surface; however,

avoid coated paper or paper with a treated surface as it may damage the drum or fusing unit.

Ingredients

Do not use paper such as paper that has been coated or surface-treated or paper that contains plastic or carbon. Those

types of paper may produce harmful fumes from the heat of printing and may damage the drum.

Be sure to use the standard paper that contains at least 80% pulp, i.e., not more than 20% of the total paper content

consists of cotton or other fibers.

Supported Paper Sizes

Paper of the following sizes is supported by the machine.

Measurements in the table take into account a ±0.7 mm dimensional accuracy for length and width. Corner angles must

be 90° ± 0.2°.

Paper Size Cassette 1 Cassettes 2 to 5 Multi Purpose

Tray

Envelope Monarch (3-7/8 × 7-1/2") ×

Envelope #10 (4-1/8 × 9-1/2") ×

Envelope DL (110 × 220 mm) ×

Envelope C5 (162 × 229 mm)

Executive (7-1/4 × 10-1/2")

Letter

Legal

A4 (297 × 210 mm)

B5 (257 × 182 mm)

A5 (210 × 148 mm)

A6 (148 × 105 mm) ×

B6 (182 × 128 mm) ×

Envelope #9 (3-7/8 × 8-7/8") ×

Envelope #6 (3-5/8 × 6-1/2") ×

ISO B5 (176 × 250 mm)

Hagaki (Cardstock) (100 × 148 mm) × ×

Oufuku hagaki (Return postcard) (148 × 200 mm) ×

Oficio II

216 × 340 mm

16K (273 × 197 mm)

11-16

Appendix > Paper

Smoothness

The paper surface should be smooth, but it must be uncoated. With paper that is too smooth and slippery, several

sheets may accidentally be supplied at once, causing jams.

Basis Weight

In countries that use the metric system, basis weight is the weight in grams of one sheet of paper one square meter in

area. In the United States, basis weight is the weight in pounds of one ream (500 sheets) of paper cut to the standard

size (or trade size) for a specific grade of paper. Paper that is too heavy or too light may be supplied incorrectly or cause

paper jams, which may cause excessive wear of the machine. Mixed paper weight (i.e., thickness) may cause several

sheets to be supplied at once accidentally and may also cause blurring or other printing problems if the toner fails to

adhere correctly.

Moisture Content

Paper moisture content is the ratio of moisture to dryness expressed as a percentage. Moisture affects how the paper is

supplied, the electrostatic chargeability of the paper, and how the toner adheres.

Paper moisture content varies depending on the relative humidity in the room. High relative humidity causes paper to

become damp, making the edges expand so it appears wavy. Low relative humidity causes paper to lose moisture,

making the edges tighten and weakening print contrast.

Wavy or tight edges may cause the paper to slip when it is supplied. Try to keep the moisture content between 4 to 6%.

To maintain the right level of moisture content, bear in mind the following considerations.

• Store paper in a cool, well-ventilated place.

• Store paper flat and unopened in the package. Once the package is opened, reseal it if the paper is not to be used for

a while.

• Store paper sealed in the original package and box. Put a pallet under the carton to keep it raised above the floor.

Especially during rainy seasons keep the paper a sufficient distance away from wooden or concrete floors.

• Before using paper that has been stored, keep it at the proper moisture level for at least 48 hours.

• Do not store paper where it is exposed to heat, sunlight, or dampness.

Statement

Folio (210 × 330 mm)

Youkei 4 (105 × 235 mm) ×

Youkei 2 (114 × 162 mm) ×

Custom Cassette 1: 140 × 148 to 216 × 356 mm

Cassettes 2 to 5: 92 × 162 to 216 × 356 mm

Multi Purpose Tray: 70 × 148 to 216 × 356 mm

Paper Size Cassette 1 Cassettes 2 to 5 Multi Purpose

Tray

11-17

Appendix > Paper

Other Paper Specifications

Porosity: The density of the paper fibers.

Stiffness: Paper must be stiff enough or it may buckle in the machine, causing jams.

Curl: Most paper naturally tends to curl after the package is opened. When paper passes through the fixing unit, it curls

upward slightly. To deliver flat printouts, load the paper so that the curl faces towards the bottom of the paper tray.

Static electricity: During printing, paper is electrostatically charged so that the toner adheres. Choose paper that can be

discharged quickly so that copies do not cling together.

Whiteness: Paper whiteness affects print contrast. Use whiter paper for sharper, brighter copies.

Quality: Machine problems may occur if sheet sizes are not uniform or if corners are not square, edges are rough,

sheets are uncut, or edges or corners are crushed. In order to prevent these problems, be especially careful when you

cut the paper yourself.

Packaging: Choose paper that is properly packaged and stacked in boxes. Ideally, the packaging itself should have

been treated with a coating to inhibit moisture.

Specially treated paper: We do not recommend printing onto the following types of paper, even if it conforms to the

basic specifications. When you use these kinds of paper, purchase a small amount first as a sample to test.

• Glossy paper

• Watermarked paper

• Paper with an uneven surface

• Perforated paper

11-18

Appendix > Paper

Special Paper

This section describes printing onto special paper and print media.

The following paper and media can be used.

• Transparencies

• Preprinted paper

• Bond paper

• Recycled paper

• Thin paper

• Letterhead

• Colored paper

• Prepunched paper

• Envelopes

• Hagaki (Cardstock)

• Thick paper

• Labels

• High-quality paper

When using these paper and media, choose those that are designed specifically for copiers or page printers (such as

laser printers). Use the multi purpose tray for transparencies, thick paper, envelopes, cardstocks, and label paper.

Choosing Special Paper

Although special paper that meets the following requirements can be used with the machine, print quality will vary

considerably due to differences in the construction and quality of special paper. Thus, special paper is more likely than

regular paper to cause printing problems. Before purchasing special paper in volume, try testing a sample to ensure the

print quality is satisfactory. General precautions when printing onto special paper are given below. Note that we are not

responsible for any harm to the user or damage to the machine caused by moisture or specifications of special paper.

Select a cassette or multi purpose tray for special paper.

Transparencies

Transparencies must be able to withstand the heat of printing. Transparencies must meet the following conditions.

To avoid problems, use the multi purpose tray for transparencies and load transparencies with the long side facing the

machine.

If transparencies jam frequently at output, try pulling the leading edge of sheets gently as they are ejected.

Heat resistance Must withstand at least 190°C

Thickness 0.100 to 0.110 mm

Material Polyester

Dimensional accuracy ±0.7 mm

Squareness of corners 90° ±0.2°

11-19

Appendix > Paper

Label

Be sure to feed labels from the multi purpose tray.

For selecting labels, use extreme care so that the adhesive may not come in direct contact with any part of the machine

and that the labels are not easily peeled from the carrier sheet. Adhesives that stick to the drum or rollers and peeled

labels remaining in the machine may cause a failure.

When printing onto labels, you must be liable for the print quality and possible trouble.

Labels consist of three layers as shown in the illustration. The adhesive layer contains materials that are easily affected

by the force applied in the machine. The carrier sheet bears the top sheet until the label is used. This composition of

labels may cause more problems.

The label surface must be covered completely with the top sheet. Gaps between labels may cause peeling of labels,

resulting in a serious failure.

Some label paper has large margins on the top sheet. When using such paper, do not peel these margins from the

carrier sheet before completing output.

Use label paper that conforms to the following specifications.

Top sheet weight 44 to 74 g/m²

Basis weight

(overall paper weight)

104 to 151 g/m²

Top sheet thickness 0.086 to 0.107 mm

Overall paper thickness 0.115 to 0.145 mm

Moisture content 4 to 6 % (composite)

Top sheet

Adhesive layer

Carrier sheet

Not allowedAllowed

Top sheet

Carrier sheet

11-20

Appendix > Paper

Hagaki (Cardstock)

Before loading Hagaki (Cardstock) into the multi purpose tray, fan them and align the edges. If the Hagaki (Cardstock)

paper is curled, straighten it before loading. Printing onto curled Hagaki (Cardstock) may cause jams.

Use unfolded Oufuku hagaki (Return postcard) (available at post offices). Some Hagaki (Cardstock) may still have rough

edges developed by a paper cutter on the back side. Remove any such rough edges by placing the Hagaki (Cardstock)

on a flat surface and rubbing the edges gently a few times with a ruler.

Envelopes

Envelopes should be fed from the MP tray with the print-side up or the optional paper feeder with the print-side up.

Due to the structure of envelopes, printing evenly over the entire surface may not be possible in some cases. Thin

envelopes in particular may be wrinkled by the machine in some cases as they pass through. Before purchasing

envelopes in volume, try testing a sample to ensure the print quality.

Storing envelopes for a long period may cause them to become wrinkled. Thus, keep the package sealed until you are

ready to use them.

Keep the following points in mind.

• Do not use envelopes with exposed adhesive. In addition, do not use the type of envelope in which the adhesive is

exposed after the top layer is peeled off. Serious damage may be caused if the paper covering the adhesive comes

off in the machine.

• Do not use envelopes with certain special features. For example, do not use envelopes with a grommet for winding a

string to close the flap or envelopes with an open or film-covered window.

• If paper jams occur, load fewer envelopes at once.

Thick Paper

Before loading thick paper in the multi purpose tray, fan it and align the edges. Some thick paper may still have rough

edges developed by a paper cutter on the back side. Remove any such rough edges just as with Hagaki (Cardstock) by

placing the paper on a flat surface and rubbing the edges gently a few times with a ruler. Printing onto paper with rough

edges may cause jams.

NOTE

Do not load paper above the load limits located on the paper width guide of the optional paper feeder.

NOTE

If the paper is not supplied correctly even after it is smoothed, load the paper in the multi purpose tray with the leading

edge raised a few millimeters.

Burrs

11-21

Appendix > Paper

Colored Paper

Colored paper must conform to the specifications.

Basic Paper Specifications (page 11-14)

In addition, the pigments in the paper must be able to withstand the heat of printing (up to 200°C or 392°F).

Preprinted Paper

Preprinted paper must conform to the specifications.

Basic Paper Specifications (page 11-14)

The colored ink must be able to withstand the heat of printing. It must be resistant to silicone oil as well. Do not use

paper with a treated surface such as glossy paper used for calendars.

Recycled Paper

Recycled paper must conform to the specifications; however, its whiteness may be considered separately.

Basic Paper Specifications (page 11-14)

NOTE

Before purchasing recycled paper in volume, try testing a sample to ensure satisfactory print quality.

11-22

Appendix > Specifications

Specifications

Machine

IMPORTANT

Specifications are subject to change without notice.

NOTE

For more information on using the FAX, refer to the following:

FAX Operation Guide

Item Description

Type Desktop

Printing Method Electrophotography by semiconductor laser

Paper Weight Cassette 60 to 120 g/m2

Multi Purpose

Tray

60 to 220 g/m2, 209.5 g/m2 (Cardstock),

136 to 163 g/m2 (Banner sheet)

Paper Type Cassette Plain, Rough, Recycled, Preprinted, Bond, Color (Colour),

Prepunched, Letterhead, High Quality, Custom 1 to 8

(Duplex: Same as Simplex)

Multi Purpose

Tray

Plain, Transparency (OHP film), Rough, Vellum, Labels, Recycled,

Preprinted, Bond, Cardstock, Color (Colour), Prepunched,

Letterhead, Envelope, Thick, High Quality, Custom 1 to 8

Paper Size Cassette A4, A5, B5, Letter, Legal, Statement, Executive,Oficio II, Folio,

216 × 340 mm, 16K, B5 (ISO), Envelope DL, Envelope C5,

Custom (140 × 148 mm to 216 × 356 mm)

Multi Purpose

Tray

A4, A5, A6, B5, B6, Folio, 216 × 340 mm, Letter, Legal, Statement,

Executive, Oficio II, 16K, B5 (ISO), Envelope #10, Envelope #9,

Envelope #6 3/4, Envelope Monarch, Envelope DL, Envelope C5,

Hagaki (Cardstock), Oufuku Hagaki (Return postcard), Youkei 4,

Youkei 2, Custom (70 × 148 mm to 216 × 356 mm),

Banner sheet (216 × 470.1 mm to 216 × 915 mm)

Warm-up Time

(22°C/71.6°F,

60%)

Power on 16 seconds or less

Low Power

Mode

10 seconds or less

Sleep 16 seconds or less

Paper Capacity Cassette 500 sheets (80 g/m2)*1

*1 Up to upper limit height line in the cassette.

Multi Purpose

Tray

100 sheets (80 g/m2)

11-23

Appendix > Specifications

Item Description

Output Tray

Capacity

Inner tray 250 sheets (80 g/m2)

Image Write System Semiconductor laser and electrophotography

Memory 1024 MB

Interface Standard USB Interface Connector: 1 (Hi-Speed USB)

Network interface: 1 (10 BASE-T/100 BASE-TX/1000 BASE-T)

USB Port: 2 (Hi-Speed USB)

Fax: 1 (ECOSYS M3645dn only)

Option eKUIO: 1

Operating

Environment

Temperature 10 to 32.5°C/50 to 90.5°F

Humidity 15 to 80 %

Altitude 3,500 m/11,482 ft maximum

Brightness 1,500 lux maximum

Dimension (W × D × H) 18.71" × 18.74" × 22.64"

475 × 476 × 575 mm

Weight Approx. 49.2 lb/Approx. 22.3 kg

(without toner container)

Space Required (W × D)

(Using multi purpose tray)

18.71 × 26.23

475 × 666 mm

Power Source 120 V Specification Model: 120 V 60 Hz 10.0 A

230 V Specification Model: 220 to 240 V 50/60 Hz 5.6 A

The power consumption of the

product in networked standby (If

all network ports are connected.)

The information is available at the website below.

http://www.kyoceradocumentsolutions.eu/index/environment/

green_products/low_power_consumption.html

Options Optional Equipment (page 11-2)

11-24

Appendix > Specifications

Copy Functions

Printer Functions

Item Description

Copy Speed (Standard cassette) A4 45 sheets/min

Letter 47 sheets/min

Legal 38 sheets/min

B5 36 sheets/min

A5 23 sheets/min

Statement 22 sheets/min

First Copy Time (A4, place on the

platen, feed from Cassette)

7 seconds or less

Zoom Level Manual mode: 25 to 400%, 1% increments

Auto mode: Preset Zoom

Continuous Copying 1 to 999 sheets

Resolution 600 × 600 dpi

Supported Original Types Sheet, Book, 3-dimensional objects (maximum original size: Legal/

Folio)

Original Feed System Fixed

Item Description

Printing Speed Same as Copying Speed.

First Print Time (A4, feed from

Cassette)

5.9 seconds or less

Resolution Fast 1200, Fine 1200, 600 dpi

Operating System

Windows 7, Windows 8, Windows 8.1, Windows 10,

Windows Server 2008/R2, Windows Server 2012/R2,

Windows Server 2016

Mac OS 10.5 or later

Interface USB Interface Connector: 1 (Hi-Speed USB)

Network interface: 1 (10 BASE-T/100 BASE-TX/1000 BASE-T)

Optional Interface (Option): 1 (For IB-50/IB-51 mounting)

Wireless LAN (Option): 1 (For IB-36 mounting)

Parallel Interface (Option):1 (For IB-32B mounting)

Page Description Language PRESCRIBE

Emulations PCL6 (PCL-XL, PCL5e), KPDL3, XPS, TIFF/JPEG, IBM Proprinter,

LQ-850, LinePrint

11-25

Appendix > Specifications

Scanner Functions

Document Processor

Item Description

Resolution 600 dpi, 400 dpi, 300 dpi, 200×400 dpi, 200 dpi, 200×100 dpi

File Format TIFF (MMR/JPEG compression), JPEG, PDF (MMR/JPEG

compression), XPS, PDF/A, High compressive PDF, Encrypted PDF,

OPEN XPS

Scanning

Speed*1

*1 When using the document processor (except TWAIN and WIA scanning)

(A4 landscape,

200 dpi, Image

quality: Text/

Photo original)

1-sided B/W 60 Images/min

Color 40 Images/min

2-sided B/W 26 Images/min

Color 17 Images/min

(A4 landscape,

300 dpi, Image

quality: Text/

Photo original)

1-sided B/W 60 Images/min

Color 40 Images/min

2-sided B/W 26 Images/min

Color 17 Images/min

Interface Ethernet (10 BASE-T/100 BASE-TX/1000 BASE-T), USB

Transmission System SMB, SMTP, FTP, FTP over SSL, USB, TWAIN*2, WIA*2, WSD

*2 Available Operating System: Windows Server 2008/Windows Server 2008 R2/Windows 7/Windows 8/

Windows 8.1/Windows 10/Windows Server 2012/Windows Server 2012 R2/Windows Server 2016

Item Description

Supported Original Types Sheet originals

Paper Size Maximum 8.5" × 14"

216 × 355.6 mm

(Long-sized 216 × 915 mm)

Minimum 4.13" × 5.82"

105 mm × 148 mm

Paper Weight 1-sided: 50 to 120 g/m²

2-sided: 50 to 120 g/m²

Loading Capacity 75 sheets (50 to 80 g/m²) maximum*1

*1 Up to upper limit height line in the document processor

11-26

Appendix > Specifications

Paper Feeder (500-sheet) (Option)

Item Description

Paper Supply Method Friction roller feeder (No. Sheets: 500, 80 g/m²)

Paper Size A4, A5, B5, B6, Folio, Letter, Legal, Statement, Executive, Oficio II,

16K, B5 (ISO), Envelope #10, Envelope #9, Envelope #6 3/4,

Envelope Monarch, Envelope DL, Envelope C5,

Oufuku Hagaki (Return postcard), Youkei 4, Youkei 2,

Custom (92 × 162 to 216 × 356 mm)

Supported Paper Paper weight: 60 to 120 g/m²

Media types: Plain, Rough, Recycled, Preprinted, Bond,

Color (Colour), Prepunched, Letterhead, High Quality, Custom 1 to 8

Dimensions

(W) × (D) × (H)

14.97" × 16.16" × 4.77"

380 × 410 × 121 mm

Weight 8.4 lbs. or less/ 3.8 kg or less

NOTE

Consult your dealer or service representative for recommended paper types.

11-27

Appendix > Glossary

Glossary

Accessibility

The machine is designed featuring good accessibility even for the elderly and those who are physically challenged or

visually impaired.

Apple Talk

AppleTalk offers file sharing and printer sharing and it also enables you to utilize application software that is on another

computer on the same AppleTalk network.

Auto Form Feed Timeout

During data transmission, the machine may sometimes have to wait until receiving the next data. This is the auto form

feed timeout. When the preset timeout passes, the machine automatically prints output. However, no output is

performed if the last page has no data to be printed.

Auto-IP

Auto-IP is a module that enables dynamic IPv4 addresses to be assigned to a device on startup. However, DHCP

requires a DHCP server. Auto-IP is a server-less method of choosing an IP address. IP addresses between 169.254.0.0

to 169.254.255.255 are reserved for Auto-IP and assigned automatically.

Auto Paper Selection

A function to automatically select paper in the same size as originals when printing.

Auto Sleep

A mode designed for electrical power saving, activated when the machine is left unused or there is no data transfer for a

specific period. In Sleep mode, power consumption is kept to a minimum.

Bonjour

Bonjour, also known as zero-configuration networking, is a service that automatically detects computers, devices and

services on an IP network. Bonjour, because an industry-standard IP protocol is used, allows devices to automatically

recognize each other without an IP address being specified or DNS server being set. Bonjour also sends and receives

network packets by UDP port 5353. If a firewall is enabled, the user must check that UDP port 5353 is left open so that

Bonjour will run correctly. Some firewalls are set up so as to reject only certain Bonjour packets. If Bonjour does not run

stably, check the firewall settings and ensure that Bonjour is registered on the exceptions list and that Bonjour packets

are accepted. If you install Bonjour on Windows OS, the Windows firewall will be set up correctly for Bonjour.

Custom Box

The Custom Box function stores print data for each individual user on the printer and allows the user to print single or

multiple copies of the stored data later using the printer's operation panel.

Default Gateway

This indicates the device, such as a computer or router, that serves as the entrance/exit (gateway) for accessing

computers outside the network that you are on. When no specific gateway is designated for a destination IP address,

data is sent to the host designated as the Default Gateway.

11-28

Appendix > Glossary

DHCP (Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol)

Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol (DHCP) that automatically resolves IP addresses, subnet masks, and gateway

addresses on a TCP/IP network. DHCP minimizes the load of network management employing a large number of client

computers because it relieves individual clients including printers from the IP address being assigned.

DHCP (IPv6)

DHCP (IPv6) is the next-generation of the Internet's Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol and supports IPv6. It extends

the BOOTP startup protocol that defines the protocols used for transferring configuration information to hosts on the

network. DHCP (IPv6) permits the DHCP server to use its expanded functionality to send configuration parameters to an

IPv6 node. Because the network addresses that can be used are allocated automatically, the IPv6 node management

workload is reduced in systems where the administrator has to exercise close control over IP address allocation.

dpi (dots per inch)

A unit for resolution, representing the number of dots printed per inch (25.4 mm).

EcoPrint Mode

A printing mode that helps save toner. Copies made in this mode are thus lighter than normal.

Emulation

The function to interpret and execute other printers' page description languages. The machine emulates operation of

PCL6, KPDL3 (PostScript 3 compatible).

FTP (File Transfer Protocol)

A protocol to transfer files on the TCP/IP network, whether the Internet or an intranet. Along with HTTP and SMTP/POP,

FTP is now frequently used on the Internet.

Grayscale

A computer color expression. Displayed images of this sort are typically composed of shades of gray, varying from black

at the weakest intensity to white at the strongest, without any other colors. Gray levels are displayed in numerical levels:

that is, white and black only for 1 bit; 256 gray levels (including white and black) for 8 bits; and 65,536 gray levels for 16

bits.

IP Address

An Internet protocol address is a unique number that represents a specific computer or related device on the network.

The format of an IP address is four sets of numbers separated by dots, e.g. 192.168.110.171. Each number should be

between 0 and 255.

IPP

IPP (Internet Printing Protocol) is a standard that uses TCP/IP networks such as the Internet to enable print jobs to be

sent between remote computers and printers. IPP is an extension of the HTTP protocol used to view websites and

enables printing to be carried out via routers on printers in remote locations. It also supports the HTTP authentication

mechanisms along with SSL server and client authentication as well as encryption.

Job Box

The Job Box function stores print data on the printer and allows users to print single or multiple copies of the stored data

later using the printer's operation panel.

11-29

Appendix > Glossary

KPDL (Kyocera Page Description Language)

Kyocera's PostScript page description language compatible with Adobe PostScript Level 3.

Multi Purpose (MP) Tray

The paper supply tray on the front side of the machine. Use this tray instead of the cassettes when printing onto

envelopes, Hagaki (Cardstock), transparencies, or labels.

NetBEUI (NetBIOS Extended User Interface)

An interface, developed by IBM in 1985, as an update from NetBIOS. It enables more advanced functions on smaller

networks than other protocols such as TCP/IP, etc. It is not suitable for larger networks due to lack of routing capabilities

to choose the most appropriate routes. NetBEUI has been adopted by IBM for its OS/2 and Microsoft for its Windows as

a standard protocol for file sharing and printing services.

Outline font

With outline fonts, character outlines are represented with numerical expressions and fonts can be enlarged or reduced

in different ways by changing the numeric values of those expressions. Printing remains clear even if you enlarge fonts,

since the characters are defined with outlines represented with numerical expressions. You can specify the font size in

steps of 0.25 points up to 999.75 points.

PDF/A

This is "ISO 19005-1. Document management - Electronic document file format for long-term preservation - Part 1: Use

of PDF (PDF/A)", and is a file format based on PDF 1.4. It has been standardized as ISO 19005-1, and is a

specialization of PDF, which has been mainly used for printing, for long-term storage. A new part, ISO 19005-2 (PDF/A-

2), is currently being prepared.

POP3 (Post Office Protocol 3)

A standard protocol to receive E-mail from the server in which the mail is stored on the Internet or an intranet.

PostScript

A page description language developed by Adobe Systems. It enables flexible font functions and highly-functional

graphics, allowing higher quality printing. The first version called Level 1 was launched in 1985, followed by Level 2 that

enabled color printing and two-byte languages (e.g. Japanese) in 1990. In 1996, Level 3 was released as an update for

the Internet access and PDF format as well as gradual improvements in implementation technologies.

PPM (prints per minute)

This indicates the number of A4 size printouts made in one minute.

Printer Driver

The software to enable you to print data created on any application software. The printer driver for the machine is

contained in the DVD enclosed in the package. Install the printer driver on the computer connected to the machine.

RA(Stateless)

The IPv6 router communicates (transmits) information such as the global address prefix using ICMPv6. This information

is the Router Advertisement (RA).

ICMPv6 stands for Internet Control Message Protocol, and is a IPv6 standard defined in the RFC 2463 "Internet Control

Message Protocol (ICMPv6) for the Internet Protocol Version 6 (IPv6) Specification".

11-30

Appendix > Glossary

RAM Disk

Using part of the printer's memory as a virtual disk, you can set any amount of memory from overall printer memory as a

RAM disk in order to use features such as electronic sorting (shortening print time).

Send as E-mail

A function to send the image data stored in the machine as an E-mail attachment. E-mail addresses can be selected

from the list or entered at each time.

SMTP (Simple Mail Transfer Protocol)

A protocol for E-mail transmission over the Internet or an intranet. It is used for transferring mail between mail servers as

well as for sending mail from clients to their servers.

Status Page

The page lists machine conditions, such as the memory capacity, total number of prints and scans, and paper source

settings.

Subnet Mask

The subnet mask is a way of augmenting the network address section of an IP address.

A subnet mask represents all network address sections as 1 and all host address sections as 0. The number of bits in

the prefix indicates the length of the network address. The term "prefix" refers to something added to the beginning and,

in this context, indicates the first section of the IP address. When an IP address is written, the length of the network

address is indicated by the prefix length after a forward slash (/). For example, "24" in the address "133.210.2.0/24". In

this way, "133.210.2.0/24" denotes the IP address "133.210.2.0" with a 24-bit prefix (network section). This new network

address section (originally part of the host address) made possible by the subnet mask is referred to as the subnet

address. When you enter the subnet mask, be sure to set the "DHCP" setting to "Off".

TCP/IP (Transmission Control Protocol/Internet Protocol)

TCP/IP is a suite of protocols designed to define the way computers and other devices communicate with each other

over a network.

TCP/IP (IPv6)

TCP/IP (IPv6) is based on the current Internet protocol, TCP/IP (IPv4). IPv6 is the next-generation Internet protocol and

expands the available address space, which resolves the problem of the lack of addresses under IPv4, while also

introducing other improvements such as additional security functionality and the capacity to prioritize data transmission.

TWAIN (Technology Without An Interesting Name)

A technical specification for connecting scanners, digital cameras, and other image equipment to computers. The

TWAIN compatible devices enable you to process image data on any relevant application software. TWAIN is adopted

on a large amount of graphic software (e.g. Adobe Photoshop) and OCR software.

USB (Universal Serial Bus) 2.0

A USB interface standard for Hi-Speed USB 2.0. The maximum transfer rate is 480 Mbps. This machine is equipped with

USB 2.0 for high-speed data transfer.

WIA (Windows Imaging Acquisition)

A function to import images supported after Windows Me/XP from digital cameras and other peripheral devices. This

function replaces what TWAIN used to do. The feature is provided as a part of Windows functions and improves ease of

operation, so that you import images directly to My Computer without using any application.

Index-1

Index

Accessibility 11-27

Address Book 3-25

Adding 3-25

Contact 3-25

Editing and Deleting 3-30

Group 3-28

Address Book/One Touch 8-43

Adjustment/Maintenance 8-44

Print Density 8-44

AirPrint 4-11

Anti-theft Lock Slot 2-3

Apache License (Version 2.0) 1-14

Apple Talk 11-27

Auto Error Clear 8-32

Auto Form Feed Timeout 11-27

Auto Panel Reset 8-31

Auto Paper Selection 11-27

Auto Sleep 2-26, 11-27

AutoColorCorrect 8-44

Auto-IP 11-27

Settings 8-10

Automatic 2-Sided Print Function 1-17

Background Density Adjustment 6-15, 8-44

Default 8-33

Bluetooth Set. 8-20

Bonjour 11-27

Settings 8-12

Border Line 6-18

Default 8-34

Cables 2-7

Card Authentication Kit 11-3

Cassette

Loading Paper 3-4

Paper Size and Media Type 3-12, 8-28

Cassette 1 2-2

Cassette Settings 3-12

Cassettes 2 to 4 2-6

Character Entry Method 11-9

Checking the Counter 2-41

Checking the Remaining Amount of Toner 7-16

Cleaning 10-2

Glass Platen 10-2

Registration Roller 10-3

Slit Glass 10-2

Collate 6-12

Default 8-33

Color Selection 6-14

Default 8-33

Combine 6-18

Command Center RX 2-44

Common Settings 8-24

Date Setting 8-30

Default Screen 8-24

Display Brightness 8-24

Display Status/Log 8-36

Error Handling 8-30

Function Defaults 8-33

Keyboard Type 8-36

Language 8-24

Measurement 8-29

Optional Memory 8-35

Orig./Paper Set. 8-25

Preset Limit 8-29

RAM Disk Mode 8-35

Sound 8-24

Timer Setting 8-31

TonerAlert Level 8-36

Connecting

LAN Cable 2-8

Power Cable 2-9

USB cable 2-9

Connection Method 2-7

Continuous Scan 6-22

Default 8-34

Contrast 6-15, 8-44

Contrast (Copy) 8-44

Contrast (Send) 8-44

Conventions Used in This Guide xviii

Copy 5-9

Copy Denst. Adj. 8-44

Copy Settings 8-38

Auto % Priority 8-38

AutoPaperSelect. 8-38

Paper Selection 8-38

Reserve Priority 8-38

Select Key Setting 8-38

Copy Speed 11-24

Correct. Bk Line 8-45

Counting the Number of Pages Printed

Counter 2-41

Each Job Account 9-39

Print Accounting Report 9-40

Total Accounting 9-39

Unknown ID Job 9-42

Custom Box 11-27

Creating a New Box 5-33

Deleting Documents 5-38

Editing and Deleting Custom Box 5-35

Editing Documents 5-37

Printing Documents 5-36

Storing Documents 5-35

Data Security 8-21

Data Security Kit 11-6

Date Format 8-30

Index-2

Date Setting

Date Format 8-30

Date/Time 8-30

Summer Time 8-30

Time Zone 8-30

Date/Time 8-30

Date/Timer/Energy Saver

EnergySaver RecoveryLevel 8-37

Low Power Timer 8-31

Weekly Timer Settings 8-32

Default Gateway 11-27

Settings 8-10

Default Screen 8-24

Del. after Print 6-31

Density 6-12

Destination

Adding a Destination 3-25

Address Book 5-14

Checking and Editing 5-20

Confirmation Screen of Destinations 5-21

Destination Check 8-41

Entering a New E-mail Address 5-16

Multi Sending 5-23

One Touch Key 3-31

Search 5-15

Sort 8-43

Specifying a New PC Folder 5-17

Destination Check

Check before Send 8-41

Check New Destination 8-41

Device 7-14

Device Common

Bluetooth Set 8-20

DHCP 11-28

Settings 8-10

DHCP (IPv6) 11-28

Settings 8-11

Display Brightness 8-24

Display Status/Log 8-36

Document Box

Custom Box 5-31, 5-33

Job Box 4-12, 5-31

Removable Memory Box 5-32

What is Document Box? 5-31

Document Box Settings 8-42

Custom Box 8-42

Job Box 8-42

Polling Box 8-42

Select Key Setting 8-42

Sub Address Box 8-42

Document Processor

How to Load Originals 5-3

Loading Originals 5-3

Originals Not Supported by the Document

Processor 5-3

Originals Supported by the Document

Processor 5-3

Part Names 2-2

dpi 11-28

Duplex 6-20

Duplex (2-sided Original) 6-24

Duplex Cover 2-4

EcoPrint 6-13, 11-28

Default 8-33

Printer 8-39

Edit Destination 8-43

Address Book 3-25

Address Book Defaults 8-43

Contact 3-25

Edit Restriction 8-43

Group 3-28

One Touch Key 3-31

E-mail Settings 2-50

E-mail Subject/Body

Default 8-34

Emulation 11-28

Selection 8-39

Encrypted PDF 6-33

Energy Saver Recovery Level 8-37

Energy Saving Control Function 1-17

Energy Star (ENERGY STAR®) Program 1-18

Enhanced WSD

Protocol Settings 8-15

EnhancedWSD (SSL)

Protocol Settings 8-15

Entry

File Name 6-22

Subject 6-30

Environment 1-3

Err. Clear Timer 8-32

Error Handling 8-30

eSCL

Protocol Settings 8-15

eSCL over SSL

Protocol Settings 8-16

Expansion Memory 11-3

FAX 8-41

File

Format 6-26

PDF 6-28

Separation 6-30

File Format 6-26

Default 8-34

File Name Entry 6-22

Default 8-33

File Separation 6-30

Default 8-34

Finishing Binding 6-21

First Copy Time 11-24

First Print Time 11-24

Front Cover 2-2

Front Cover Open Button 2-2

FTP 11-28

FTP (Clien)

Protocol Settings 8-13

Index-3

FTP (Server)

Protocol Settings 8-13

FTP Encrypted TX 6-31

Function Defaults 8-33

Fuser Cover 2-4

Glossary 11-27

Google Cloud Print 4-11

GPL/LGPL 1-12

Grayscale 11-28

Group Authorization Set. 9-17

Group Authorization 9-17

Guest Authorization Set. 9-18

Guest Authorization 9-18

Guest Property 9-19

Guides Provided with the Machine xv

Handle 2-2

Help 11-28

Help Screen 2-13

High Compression PDF 6-27

Host Name 8-7

HTTP

Protocol Settings 8-14

HTTPS

Protocol Settings 8-14

I/F Block Set. 8-20

Image Quality 6-26

Inner Tray 2-2

Install

Macintosh 2-36

Software 2-28

Windows 2-29

IP Address 11-28

Settings 8-10

IP Filter (IPv4)

Settings 8-12

IP Filter (IPv6)

Settings 8-12

IPP 11-28

Protocol Settings 8-13

IPP over SSL

Protocol Settings 8-14

IPSec

Settings 8-12

Job

Available Status 7-2

Canceling 7-13

Checking History 7-8

Checking Status 7-2

Displaying History Screen 7-9

Displaying Status Screens 7-2

Pause and Resumption 7-13

Sending the Log History 7-12

Job Accounting 9-25

Adding an Account 9-28

Counting the Number of Pages Printed 9-39

Default Setting 9-37

Deleting an Account 9-32

Editing an Account 9-31

Enabling Job Accounting 9-26

FAX Driver 9-36

Job Accounting Access 9-27

Logout 9-41

Overview of Job Accounting 9-25

Print Accounting Report 9-40

Printing 9-33

Restricting the Use of the Machine 9-30

TWAIN 9-34

WIA 9-35

Job Box 11-28

Deletion of Job Retention 8-42

Private Print Box 4-13

Proof and Hold Box 4-19

Quick Copy Box 4-17

Quick Copy Jobs 8-42

Specifying the Job Box from a Computer and Storing

the Job 4-12

Storage Media 8-42

Stored Job Box 4-15

Job Finish Notice 6-22

JPEG/TIFF Print 6-33

Default 8-34

Keyboard Type 8-36

Knopflerfish License 1-14

KPDL 11-29

Label 11-19

LAN Cable 2-7

Connecting 2-8

Language 8-24

LDAP

Protocol Settings 8-14

Left Cover 2-5

Legal Information 1-11

Legal Restriction on Copying 1-9

Legal Restriction on Scanning 1-9

Limited Use of This Product 1-10

LINE Connector 2-4

Index-4

Loading Originals 5-2

Loading Originals in the Document Processor 5-3

Placing Originals on the Platen 5-2

Local Authorization 9-16

Logout 2-15

Long Original 6-32

Low Power Mode 2-25

Low Power Timer 8-31

LPD

Protocol Settings 8-13

Management 9-1

Manual Settings (IPv6) 8-11

Manual stapler 11-6

Measurement 8-29

Media Type Setting 8-29

Mixed Size Originals 6-9, 6-12

Monotype Imaging License Agreement 1-13

Mopria 4-11

MP Tray Settings 8-28

Multi Purpose Tray 2-4, 11-29

Paper Size and Media Type 3-13, 8-28

Multi Sending 5-23

NetBEUI 11-29

Protocol Settings 8-12

Network

Preparation 2-17

Settings 8-7

Network Interface 2-7

Network Interface Connector 2-4

Network Interface Kit 11-6

Network Setup

Wired Network 2-17

Wireless Network 2-19

New E-mail Address 5-16

New PC Folder 5-17

Notice 1-2

NW InterfaceSend 8-19

One Touch Key

Adding 3-31

Editing and Deleting 3-32

OpenSSL License 1-12

Operation Panel 2-2

Option

Card Authentication Kit 11-3

Data Security Kit 11-6

Expansion Memory 11-3

Manual stapler 11-6

Network Interface Kit 11-6

Overview 11-2

Paper Feeder 11-3

SD Card 11-4

SSD 11-5

ThinPrint Option 11-6

USB Keyboard 11-6

Wireless Network Interface Kit 11-6

Option Interface Slot 2-4

Optional Applications 11-7

Optional Function 8-22

Optional Memory 8-35

Optional Network

Basic 8-17

Orig./Paper Set. 8-25

Original

Auto Detect Original Size (DP) 8-25

Custom Orig. Size 8-25

Default Original Size 8-25

Settings 8-25

Original Binding 6-21, 6-24

Original eject table 2-2

Original Image 6-13

Default 8-33

Original Orientation 6-11

Default 8-33

Original Size 6-9

Original Size Indicator Plates 2-2

Original SSLeay License 1-12

Original Stopper 2-2, 5-4

Original Table 2-2

Original Width Guides 2-2

Outline font 11-29

Panel Reset Timer 8-31

Index-5

Paper

Checking the Remaining Amount of Paper 7-16

Appropriate Paper 11-15

Cassette 8-28

Custom Paper Size 8-26

Default Paper Source 8-27

Loading Cardstock 3-11

Loading Envelopes 3-11

Loading Paper 3-2

Loading Paper in the Cassettes 3-4

Loading Paper in the Multi Purpose Tray 3-8

Media for Auto 8-27

Media Type Setting 8-27

Multi Purpose Tray 8-28

Precaution for Loading Paper 3-3

Size and Media Type 3-12, 11-14

Special Paper 11-18

Special Paper Action 8-27

Specifications 11-14

Weight 8-29

Paper Feed Mode 8-40

Paper Feeder 11-3

Paper Jams 10-27

Cassettes 1 to 5 10-29

Document Processor 10-33

Duplex Unit 10-30

Inner Tray 10-32

Inside Rear Cover 10-32

Inside the Machine 10-31

Jam Location Indicators 10-27

Multi Purpose Tray 10-28

Paper Length Guide 2-4, 3-5

Paper Selection 6-10

Paper Stopper 2-2, 3-14

Paper Width Guides 2-4, 3-5

Part Names 2-2

PDF/A 6-26, 11-29

Ping 8-17

Platen 2-2

POP3 11-29

Protocol Settings 8-13

PostScript 11-29

Power Cable

Connecting 2-9

Power Management 1-17

Power Off 2-10

Power On 2-10

Power Switch 2-2

PPM 11-29

Precaution for Loading Paper 3-3

Precautions for Use 1-4

Preset Limit 8-29

Prevent Bleed-thru 6-16

Default 8-33

Print Density 8-44

Print Override 6-23

Print Settings 4-9

Printer 8-39

Auto Cassette Change 8-40

Copies 8-39

CR Action 8-39

Duplex 8-39

EcoPrint 8-39

Emulation Set. 8-39

Form Feed TimeOut 8-39

Job Name 8-40

LF Action 8-39

MP Tray Priority 8-40

Orientation 8-39

Override A4/Letter 8-39

Paper Feed Mode 8-40

Print setting 4-9

Printing Job Terminator 8-40

User Name 8-40

Wide A4 8-39

Printer Driver 11-29

Help 4-10

Printing Documents Stored in Removable USB

Memory 5-39

Printing from PC 4-2

Printing Speed 11-24

Product Library xvi

Program 5-5

Confirming 5-6

Deleting 5-7

Overwriting 5-7

Recalling 5-6

Registering 5-5

Quiet Mode 6-23, 8-44

RA (Stateless) 11-29

RA(Stateless)

Settings 8-11

RAM Disk 11-30

RAM Disk Mode 8-35

Raw

Protocol Settings 8-13

Rear Cover 1 2-3

Recycled Paper 11-21

Regarding Trade Names 1-11

Registration Roller 2-5

Regular Maintenance 10-2

Toner Container Replacement 10-5

Waste Toner Box Replacement 10-9

Report 8-5

Admin Report Settings 8-6

Job Log History 8-6

Report Print 8-5

Result Report Settings 8-6

Report Print

Font List 8-5

Menu Map 8-5

Opt NW Status 8-5

Status Page 8-5

Index-6

Resolution 6-30, 11-24

Resource Saving - Paper 1-17

Responding to Messages 10-16

REST

Protocol Settings 8-16

REST over SSL

Protocol Settings 8-16

Restart 8-22

Restart Network 8-17

Safety Conventions in This Guide 1-2

Saving Documents to USB Memory 5-41

Scan Resolution 6-30

Default 8-33

SD Card 11-4

Secure Protocol 8-16

Security Level 8-20

Security Precautions when Using Wireless LAN 1-9

Select Key Setting 8-38, 8-41, 8-42

Send and Forward 8-41

Send as E-mail 5-12

Send Result 8-6

Send Settings 8-41

Broadcast 8-41

Default Screen 8-41

Destination Check 8-41

New Destination Entry 8-41

Recall Destination 8-41

Select Key Setting 8-41

Send and Forward 8-41

Send to Folder (FTP) 5-12

Send to Folder (SMB) 5-12

Send/Box Density 8-44

Sending 5-12

Preparation for Sending a Document to a PC 3-15

Sending Size 6-25

Service Setting 8-45

Setting Date and Time 2-16

Sharpness 6-14

Simple Login 2-15

Size Dial 2-4

Skip Blank Page 6-23

Sleep 2-26

Sleep Level 2-27, 8-31

Sleep Rules 2-26, 8-31

Sleep Timer 8-31

Slit Glass 2-2

SMB

Protocol Settings 8-13

SMTP 11-30

Protocol Settings 8-13

SNMPv1/v2c

Protocol Settings 8-13

SNMPv3

Protocol Settings 8-12

Solving Malfunctions 10-11

Sound 8-24

Specifications 11-22

Copy Functions 11-24

Document Processor 11-25

Machine 11-22

Paper Feeder (500-sheet) (Option) 11-26

Printer Functions 11-24

Scanner Functions 11-25

Specifying Destination 5-14

SSD 11-5

SSD Initializ. 8-21

SSL 8-16

Status Page 11-30

Status/Job Cancel 7-1

Storing Size 6-32

Subject/Body 6-30

Default 8-34

Subnet Mask 11-30

Settings 8-10

Supplies

Checking the Remaining Amount 7-16

Symbols 1-2

System Menu 8-2

Address Book/One Touch 8-43

Adjustment/Maintenance 8-44

Common Settings 8-24

Copy 8-38

Document Box 8-42

Edit Destination 8-43

FAX 8-41

Printer 8-39

Report 8-5

Send 8-41

System/Network 8-7

User Login/Job Accounting 8-23

User Property 8-23, 9-10

System/Network 8-7

Data Security 8-21

I/F Block Set. 8-20

Network Setting 8-7

NW InterfaceSend 8-19

Optional Function 8-22

Optional Network 8-17

Restart 8-22

Security Level 8-20

Wireless Network 8-18

TCP/IP 11-30

Settings 8-10, 8-11

TCP/IP (IPv4)

Settings 2-17, 8-10

TCP/IP (IPv6) 11-28

Settings 8-11

TEL Connector 2-4

Thin Print over SSL

Protocol Settings 8-14

ThinPrint

Protocol Settings 8-14

ThinPrint Option 11-6

Time Zone 8-30

Index-7

Timer Setting

Auto Error Clear 8-32

Auto Panel Reset 8-31

Err. Clear Timer 8-32

PanelReset Timer 8-31

Ping Timeout 8-32

Sleep Level 8-31

Sleep Rules 8-31

Sleep Timer 8-31

Unusable Time 8-32

Toner Container 2-5

Toner Container Lock Lever 2-5

Toner Container Replacement 10-5

TonerAlert Level 8-36

Tray Extension 2-4

Troubleshooting 10-11

TWAIN 11-30

Scanning using TWAIN 5-29

Setting TWAIN Driver 2-38

USB 11-30

USB Cable

Connecting 2-9

USB Interface 2-7

USB Interface Connector 2-4

USB Keyboard 11-6

USB Memory

Printing 5-39

Remove 5-43

Save 5-41

USB Memory Slot 2-2

User Login Administration 9-2

Adding a User 9-6

Changing User Properties 9-9

Enabling User Login Administration 9-3

FAX Driver 9-15

Group Authorization Set. 9-17

Guest Authorization Set. 9-18

ID Card Settings 9-22

Local Authoriz. 9-16

Logout 2-15

Obtain NW User Property 9-21

Overview of User Login Administration 9-2

Printing 9-11

TWAIN 9-13

User Account Lockout Setting 9-5

WIA 9-14

User Login/Job Accounting 8-23

Job Accounting 9-25

Unknown ID Job 9-42

User Login 9-2

User Property 8-23

Waste Toner Box 2-5

Waste Toner Box Replacement 10-9

Weekly Timer Settings 8-32

WIA 11-30

Setting WIA Driver 2-40

Wi-Fi

Settings 2-19, 8-8

Wi-Fi Direct

Printing 4-11

Settings 2-23, 8-7

Wireless Connection 1-9

Wireless Network 8-18

Basic 8-17

Settings 2-19

Setup 8-18

Wireless Network Interface Kit 11-6

WSD Scan 5-25

WSD-PRINT

Protocol Settings 8-15

WSD-SCAN

Protocol Settings 8-15

XPS FitTo Page 6-33

Default 8-34

Zoom 6-16

Default 8-33

KYOCERA Document Solutions America, Inc.

Headquarters

225 Sand Road,

Fairfield, New Jersey 07004-0008, USA

Phone: +1-973-808-8444

Fax: +1-973-882-6000

Latin America

8240 NW 52nd Terrace Dawson Building, Suite 100

Miami, Florida 33166, USA

Phone: +1-305-421-6640

Fax: +1-305-421-6666

KYOCERA Document Solutions Canada

, Ltd.

6120 Kestrel Rd., Mississauga, ON L5T 1S8,

Canada

Phone: +1-905-670-4425

Fax: +1-905-670-8116

KYOCERA Document Solutions

Mexico, S.A. de C.V.

Calle Arquimedes No. 130, 4 Piso, Colonia Polanco

Chapultepec, Delegacion Miguel Hidalgo,

Distrito Federal, C.P. 11560, México

Phone: +52-555-383-2741

Fax: +52-555-383-7804

KYOCERA Document Solutions Brazil, Ltda.

Alameda África, 545, Pólo Empresarial Consbrás,

Tamboré, Santana de Parnaíba, State of São Paulo, CEP

06543-306, Brazil

Phone: +55-11-2424-5353

Fax: +55-11-2424-5304

KYOCERA Document Solutions Chile SpA

Jose Ananias 505, Macul. Santiago, Chile

Phone: +562-2350-7000

Fax: +562-2350-7150

KYOCERA Document Solutions

Australia Pty. Ltd.

Level 3, 6-10 Talavera Road North Ryde N.S.W, 2113,

Australia

Phone: +61-2-9888-9999

Fax: +61-2-9888-9588

KYOCERA Document Solutions

New Zealand Ltd.

Ground Floor, 19 Byron Avenue, Takapuna, Auckland,

New Zealand

Phone: +64-9-415-4517

Fax: +64-9-415-4597

KYOCERA Document Solutions Asia Limited

13/F.,Mita Centre, 552-566, Castle Peak Road Tsuen Wan,

New Territories, Hong Kong

Phone: +852-2496-5678

Fax: +852-2610-2063

KYOCERA Document Solutions

(China) Corporation

8F, No. 288 Nanjing Road West, Huangpu District,

Shanghai,200003, China

Phone: +86-21-5301-1777

Fax: +86-21-5302-8300

KYOCERA Document Solutions

(Thailand) Corp., Ltd.

335 Ratchadapisek Road, Wongsawang, Bangsue,

Bangkok 10800,

Thailand

Phone: +66-2-586-0333

Fax: +66-2-586-0278

KYOCERA Document Solutions

Singapore Pte. Ltd.

12 Tai Seng Street #04-01A,

Luxasia Building, Singapore 534118

Phone: +65-6741-8733

Fax: +65-6748-3788

KYOCERA Document Solutions

Hong Kong Limited

16/F.,Mita Centre, 552-566, Castle Peak Road Tsuen Wan,

New Territories, Hong Kong

Phone: +852-3582-4000

Fax: +852-3185-1399

KYOCERA Document Solutions

Taiwan Corporation

6F., No.37, Sec. 3, Minquan E. Rd.,

Zhongshan Dist., Taipei 104, Taiwan R.O.C.

Phone: +886-2-2507-6709

Fax: +886-2-2507-8432

KYOCERA Document Solutions Korea Co., Ltd.

#10F Daewoo Foundation Bldg 18, Toegye-ro, Jung-gu,

Seoul, Korea

Phone: +822-6933-4050

Fax: +822-747-0084

KYOCERA Document Solutions

India Private Limited

Second Floor, Centrum Plaza, Golf Course Road,

Sector-53, Gurgaon, Haryana 122002, India

Phone: +91-0124-4671000

Fax: +91-0124-4671001

KYOCERA Document Solutions Europe B.V.

Bloemlaan 4, 2132 NP Hoofddorp,

The Netherlands

Phone: +31-20-654-0000

Fax: +31-20-653-1256

KYOCERA Document Solutions Nederland B.V.

Beechavenue 25, 1119 RA Schiphol-Rijk,

The Netherlands

Phone: +31-20-5877200

Fax: +31-20-5877260

KYOCERA Document Solutions (U.K.) Limited

Eldon Court, 75-77 London Road,

Reading, Berkshire RG1 5BS,

United Kingdom

Phone: +44-118-931-1500

Fax: +44-118-931-1108

KYOCERA Document Solutions Italia S.p.A.

Via Monfalcone 15, 20132, Milano, Italy,

Phone: +39-02-921791

Fax: +39-02-92179-600

KYOCERA Document Solutions Belgium N.V.

Sint-Martinusweg 199-201 1930 Zaventem,

Belgium

Phone: +32-2-7209270

Fax: +32-2-7208748

KYOCERA Document Solutions France S.A.S.

Espace Technologique de St Aubin

Route de IOrme 91195 Gif-sur-Yvette CEDEX,

France

Phone: +33-1-69852600

Fax: +33-1-69853409

KYOCERA Document Solutions Espana, S.A.

Edificio Kyocera, Avda. de Manacor No.2,

28290 Las Matas (Madrid), Spain

Phone: +34-91-6318392

Fax: +34-91-6318219

KYOCERA Document Solutions Finland Oy

Atomitie 5C, 00370 Helsinki,

Finland

Phone: +358-9-47805200

Fax: +358-9-47805212

KYOCERA Document Solutions

Europe B.V., Amsterdam (NL) Zürich Branch

Hohlstrasse 614, 8048 Zürich,

Switzerland

Phone: +41-44-9084949

Fax: +41-44-9084950

KYOCERA Bilgitas Document Solutions

Turkey A.S.

Gülbahar Mahallesi Otello Kamil Sk. No:6 Mecidiyeköy

34394 ùiúli østanbul, Turkey

Phone: +90-212-356-7000

Fax: +90-212-356-6725

is a trademark of KYOCERA Corporation

KYOCERA Document Solutions

Deutschland GmbH

Otto-Hahn-Strasse 12, 40670 Meerbusch,

Germany

Phone: +49-2159-9180

Fax: +49-2159-918100

KYOCERA Document Solutions Austria GmbH

Wienerbergstraße 11, Turm A, 18. OG, 1100 Wien,

Austria

Phone: +43-1-863380

Fax: +43-1-86338-400

KYOCERA Document Solutions Nordic AB

Esbogatan 16B 164 75 Kista, Sweden

Phone: +46-8-546-550-00

Fax: +46-8-546-550-10

KYOCERA Document Solutions Norge Nuf

Olaf Helsetsv. 6, 0619 Oslo, Norway

Phone: +47-22-62-73-00

Fax: +47-22-62-72-00

KYOCERA Document Solutions Danmark A/S

Ejby Industrivej 60, DK-2600 Glostrup,

Denmark

Phone: +45-70223880

Fax: +45-45765850

KYOCERA Document Solutions Portugal Lda.

Rua do Centro Cultural, 41 (Alvalade) 1700-106 Lisboa,

Portugal

Phone: +351-21-843-6780

Fax: +351-21-849-3312

KYOCERA Document Solutions

South Africa (Pty) Ltd.

KYOCERA House, Hertford Office Park,

90 Bekker Road (Cnr. Allandale), Midrand, South Africa

Phone: +27-11-540-2600

Fax: +27-11-466-3050

KYOCERA Document Solutions Russia LLC.

Building 2, 51/4, Schepkina St., 129110, Moscow,

Russia

Phone: +7(495)741-0004

Fax: +7(495)741-0018

KYOCERA Document Solutions Middle East

Dubai Internet City, Bldg. 17,

Office 157 P.O. Box 500817, Dubai,

United Arab Emirates

Phone: +971-04-433-0412

KYOCERA Document Solutions Inc.

2-28, 1-chome, Tamatsukuri, Chuo-ku

Osaka 540-8585, Japan

Phone: +81-6-6764-3555

http://www.kyoceradocumentsolutions.com

2018.4

2TGKDEN001